electrical engineering - ingegneria elettrica

The course aims at providing to electric systems engineers the technology knowledge background and the foundation methodologies and principles for being able to understand the key role of communications and networks to support emerging smart power systems and markets.
Through the course, the students will achieve the foundation knowledge and basic capabilities to design and manage the communication networks that enable the advanced and intelligent services of the smart grid.
The first part of the course is devoted to covering the fundamental concepts behind any networked communication system, with the objective to create a basic foundation knowledge background, starting from basic principles of communications based on analog and digital signals in wired and wireless media, focusing then on TCP/IP protocol suite used by the Internet and by the majority of enterprise networks.
The second part of the course is dedicated to the analysis of the communication needs of the smart grid and the communication technologies and standards commonly used for smart metering and substation automation.

M.Sc. students in electrical engineering will achieve the basic knowledge in communications and networking technologies that will allow them to understand the role of communications and networking to empower the development of modern power systems and markets. The students will be able to understand the different communications and network technologies and to match them against power systems communications requirements from different relevant engineering perspectives (functional, performance, availability, security, operability and cost) and against sample use cases (smart metering and substation automation). The students will have a view on the role of relevant standards and will be able to appreciate the applicability of technologies and standards in national and international contexts. The students will gain the capability to discuss in technical meetings about networking issues in modern smart grids, as well as to understand technical, scientific and business documents dealing with the design and operation choices and issues of communication networks in smart power systems (DdD1 and 2).
The students will be provided with the capability to solve basic problems, take design decisions, and face troubleshooting tasks in communications networks based on IP protocol.
The students will have the option to present the main findings of a scientific paper to further test their capability to understand the main contributions and to prepare a presentation to an intended audience (DdD4).

The course will cover the following topics:

• Introduction to communications for the Smart Grid: Motivations and technological context, role of the communications in the Smart Grid, communications and control needs, relation between electric and telecommunications worlds, general system architecture, security problems, quality of service issues.
• Basics of communications and networks: General scheme of a communication system, communication network architecture, functional models, protocols and primitives, stack models, transmission systems, transmission media, link and quality management, network functions, switching techniques, transport mechanisms.
• TCP/IP networks: Local networks, Ethernet, Layer 2 interconnections, IP addressing, IP protocol, signaling and management, forwarding and routing, TCP and UDP, general security concepts.
• Wireless networks: architecture and wireless access issues, wireless local networks, mobile radio networks architecture and services.
• Communication infrastructures for the Smart Grid: conceptual model, Home Area Network, Neighborhood Area Network, Wide Area Network, last mile connections, user premises, core network, network of the control center, sensors and actuators network.
• Access technologies for the Smart Grid: access architecture of Telco operators, DSL technologies, fiber optic technologies, powerline technologies, cellular access and M2M services, other wireless technologies (WiFi, WiMax).
• Communications in the substations and among substations: substation network architecture and SCADA systems, extended substation model, application level protocols (including Modbus and IEC 61850).
• Measurement, sensors and actuators networks: smart metering technologies, home energy management systems, wireless sensor networks, PLC for metering, wireless technologies.
• Cybersecurity by design: basic cybersecurity requirements and attacks, basic guidance to cybersecurity enforcement measures, standards and certifications

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
The final examination is based on a written examination. An oral exam is optional upon request by the instructor.
The first part of the written exam is based on numerical exercises, aiming at verifying the capability to apply the engineering methodologies provided through lectures and exercise sessions. The second part is based on theoretical questions, aiming at testing the knowledge on the theoretical contents of the lectures. (DdD1 and DdD2).

Riccardo Melen, Vittorio Trecordi, "IoT Networking", Editore: Pearson, Anno edizione: 2023, ISBN: 8891931934
James F. Kurose, Keith Ross, Computer Networking, 8th edition, Editore: Pearson, Anno edizione: 2020, ISBN: 9780136681557
Ekram Hossain, Zhu Han, H. Vincent Poor, Smart Grid Communications and Networking, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2013

This course aims to provide students with the theoretical foundations of Digital Signal Processing (DSP). In particular, the proliferation of the “smart everything” paradigm requires the collection of vast amounts of measurement data that must be properly digitized, stored and processed. In this context, it is essential to understand under which conditions the relevant information content is preserved. Furthermore, appropriate algorithms are required to extract the needed information from the collected discrete-time data.
The course focuses specifically on the measurement of electrical quantities in power grids, which is a prerequisite for effective monitoring and control applications. Current and voltage waveforms must be sampled, while fundamental and harmonic components, as well as frequency, must be estimated from the acquired data. The course includes laboratory sessions aimed at addressing the practical implications of the theory covered during lectures and providing hands-on experience in implementing basic digital signal processing and spectral analysis techniques using the MATLAB environment.
It is worth emphasizing that many of the topics covered in both lectures and laboratory sessions are of a general nature and can therefore be applied in a wide range of fields. The course learning outcomes are aligned with the Dublin Descriptors (DD), as detailed in the following sections.

At the end of the course, Students are expected to acquire the ability to analyze signals in both the time and frequency domains and to identify the conditions under which a continuous-time signal can be sampled and converted into a discrete-time signal while preserving the relevant information content (DD1).
Students are expected to understand and identify the possible errors associated with sampling, particularly in the case of the quasi-periodic waveforms typical of AC power systems, and to apply suitable techniques to mitigate them (DD1, DD2).
Students are expected to master the fundamentals of digital filtering by designing and implementing simple FIR (Finite Impulse Response) and IIR (Infinite Impulse Response) filters, possibly with the support of computer-aided design software (DD1, DD2).
Students are expected to understand the basic principles of estimating the spectral components and frequency of electrical signals in AC power systems (DD1, DD2).
Upon successful completion of all laboratory sessions, Students are also expected to be capable of implementing simple DSP algorithms in the MATLAB environment for the analysis and processing of signals in both the time and frequency domains (DD1, DD2, DD3, DD5).
Moreover, Students are expected to be capable of appropriately adapting and applying the methods studied during the course to other fields and conditions (DD1, DD2, DD3, DD5).

Topic #1: Theory of discrete-time signals. Sequences. Discrete-time systems. Time- and frequency-domain analysis of sequences. Fourier transform of a sequence.
Topic #2: The sampling theorem: general formulation. Aliasing artifacts. Practical applications.
Topic #3: Spectral analysis of signals: the Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT).
Topic #4: Sampling of periodic signals. Coherent and non-coherent sampling. Spectral leakage.
Topic #5: Methods for mitigating spectral leakage.
Topic #6: Extraction of spectral components from power systems waveforms.
Topic #7: Frequency measurement of quasi-periodic signals typical of AC power systems.
Topic #8: Dynamic discrete-time systems. Representation in the n-domain.
Topic #9: The z-transform. Definition and properties. Relationship with the Fourier transform.
Topic #10: Dynamic discrete-time systems. Representation in the z-domain. Transfer functions. Poles, zeros, stability and relationship with the frequency response.
Topic #11: FIR filters. Architectures and properties. Linear-phase FIR filters.
Topic #12: IIR filters. Architectures and properties.
Topic #13: From continuous-time to discrete-time dynamic systems: discretization methods.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
The final assessment consists of a written examination covering the fundamentals of discrete-time signals and the sampling of continuous-time signals (DD2).
Obtaining a mark of at least 25/30 in the written examination is a prerequisite for accessing the optional oral examination, which covers all topics addressed during lectures and laboratory sessions (DD2, DD4).
Students who obtain a mark of at least 25/30 in the written examination but decide not to take the oral examination will receive a final mark capped at 24/30.
At the lecturer's discretion, Students may be contacted for clarification regarding their written examination.

Gabriele D'Antona, Alessandro Ferrero, Digital Signal Processing for Measurement Systems - Theory and Applications, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2006, ISBN: 978-0357249667
Brian McFee, Digital Signals Theory, Editore: Routledge - Taylor & Francis Group, Anno edizione: 2024, ISBN: 978-1032200507
Alan V. Oppenheim, Ronald W. Schafer, Discrete-time Signal Processing, Editore: Pearson, Anno edizione: 2013, ISBN: 978-0137549771

The course is meant to provide the basic analytical and computational tools to reach a complete and deep understanding of the planning and operation of large power systems, including controls, starting from the basic knowledge acquired during the basic electrical courses and from some basic concepts of numerical analysis, according to the Knowledge and understanding Dublin descriptor.
The course will show how the different electrical components and machines interact to each other resulting in a system, whose behaviour can be complex to understand and control. A thorough understanding of the main phenomena (that would include multi-physic aspects) is the target of the course; this will make it possible for the student to face the challenges of his/her future job and to find out solutions to power system problems (Applying knowledge and understanding, Making judgements).
Another goal is the acquisition of a common technical and scientific terminology, which will make it possible for the student to read and understand both technical and scientific documents (communication skills and learning skills).
The course will make use of teaching methods based on the "learning by problems" approach and the "flipped classroom" for a few subjects, in order to make it possible for the student to tackle practical, although reduced in size, problems related to power system dynamic and control.

M.Sc. students in electrical engineering after following and passing Electric Power Systems will be able
To make use of the system knowledge acquired to have a general insight of the power system behaviour, both from the steady-state and the dynamic point of view (Applying knowledge and understanding),
to discuss in technical and scientific meetings about power system related issues (Communication skills),
to read and understand specialized documents related to planning and operation of power systems, to roughly identify problems and solutions (DdD1 and 2). (Learning skills)
The students will be able to identify necessary data and to elaborate them to obtain results using simple commercial softwares and to discuss critically results, providing directions to the solution and obtaining sensitivities on the parameters (Making Judgements).
Assessment of the proposed solutions is also a part of the knowledge provided by the course.
Three projects assigned during the course will make it possible for the student to experience the mechanisms of team working and will improve abilities related to communication and public presentation skills, thanks to the presentations that some of them will have to make to the rest of the class (DdD4).
Students are expected to spend five to seven hours on average per week outside of class on this course to read the textbook, review the class material, and work on projects.
Attendance will not be taken and students are free to attend or not attend class as they choose.

The course is organized in theoretical lectures and numerical/project tutorials: during theoretical lectures, models and methodologies will be taught and some simple numerical examples will be developed; during numerical/project tutorials, some more complex and elaborate examples will be explained, based on real reduced systems, actual problems and solutions coming from the experience.
Three project will be assigned to students and will have to be developed and solved in small teams (learning by problems). All projects will be checked by Teaching Assistants and a mark will be given to each project. Whenever possible, projects will be discussed during classes.
The program is as follows:
Introduction to electric systems: definitions, typical structures, statistics, current challenges.
Steady – state operation of power systems: Y matrix, Power flow computations and solution methods: Gauss, Gauss-Seidel, Newton-Raphson, Carpentier, Fast Decoupled Load Flow, DC Power Flow.
Security analysis, sensitivities.
State estimation for transmission systems: linear and non linear approaches. Numerical problems of state estimation.
Short-circuit currents computation of large power systems: positive/negative/zero sequence circuits, computation of faulted state: currents, voltages. Matrix approach. Single line to ground, double line to ground, line to line faults, three phase faults. Series faults and interruptions.
Dynamics of power systems: Definitions and stability.
Large perturbation Angle stability: equal-area criterion, simulation methods. Critical clearing time.
Small perturbations angle stability: Single machine infinite bus systems, large systems. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors of the state matrix and their meaning, participation factors and modes of oscillation. Role of Power System Stabilizers.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
Three projects will be assigned during the course. They will have to be developed in team (maximum 4 people) and will be checked by Teaching Assistants. A mark will be given to all passed projects and will be considered for the final mark. The project part will be valued 30% on the final mark of each student. A couple of the projects will be selected for presentation to the class and for discussion of results.
The exam (total weight 70% ) is a written test. Writing should be understandable. It consists of few questions on the theoretical subjects explained during lectures and a few numerical exercises. Theoretical questions can be either multiple answer questions, true/false questions or complete proof as explained during classes. In particular, for open questions, the student will have to critically elaborate on the subject requested, using the correct notation and terminology, highlighting assumptions and restrictions of the methodologies, drawing clear conclusions and limitations. Any topic explained during classes (including seminars) might be subject for questions during the exam. The value associated to each question will be clearly indicated in the text, in order to allow the student to self evaluate.
If the exam mark is lower than 10/30, the student will not be allowed to apply for any other call in the same session (for example, if a student gets 9/30 in the first January call, he/she will get the mark “ Reject ” and will not be allowed to apply for another call before June).
At the sole discretion of the professor, after the written test, an oral test can be required to get the mark.
Students who have a final mark (including projects) strictly greater than 28/30 can ask for an oral exam on the complete program to increase their mark.
Examples of the past exams are available in the WeBeep application of the Politecnico di Milano, together with their solution.
Every cheating will be reported directly to the university. Copying, stealing papers, etc. is considered dishonest and will be prosecuted.

J. Duncan Glover, Mulukutla S. Sarma, Thomas Overbye, Power Systems Analysis and Design, Editore: Cengage, ISBN: 978-8131516355
John J. Grainger, William D. Stevenson, Power System Analysis, Editore: Mcgraw Hill Book Co, ISBN: 978-0070612938
Roberto Marconato, Electric power systems, Editore: CEI, ISBN: 978-8843200252
Prabha Kundur, Power System Stability and Control, Editore: McGraw Hill, ISBN: 0-07-035958-X
M.Eremia and M. Shahidehpour Editors, Handbook of Electrical Power System Dynamics, Editore: IEEE Press - Wiley, Anno edizione: 2013, ISBN: 978-1118497173
J.Machowski,J. Bialek,J. R. Bumby, Power System Dynamics and Stability, Editore: John Wiley & Sons, ISBN: 0471956430
Ali Abur, Antonio gomes Exposito, Power system state estimation: Theory and Implementation, Editore: Taylor and Francis Inc., Anno edizione: 2004, ISBN: 978-0824755706
Slides of the course https://webeep.polimi.it/login/index.php

The course aims to provide a deep understanding regarding the liberalization process of the electricity sector and its evolution in a liberalized environment.
In the first part, tools to understand the process of liberalization of the electricity sector, the requirements and the conditions necessary for an efficient electricity market will be provided. Different market structure are compared and analyzed. Afterwards, models for price and power market analysis will be introduced.
In the second part, emphasis will be given to the European electricity market: the problem of the market coupling in Europe is analyzed and the evolution and the projects regarding the integration of the different market sections (day ahead electricity markets, intraday markets, and ancillary services markets) is analyzed.
Finally, starting from the liberalization of the Italian electricity market, due to the Bersani Decree, the complex framework that characterizes this market and its rules will be described and critically analyzed.
The subjects are organized in theoretical lessons and practical (numerical) lessons.
Then, a project related to the simulation and analysis of the electricity markets will be organized and the students will follow the project organized in teams.

The course will allow the students to know ( DdD1, DdD4 ):
what are the prerequisites for the liberalization of the electricity market;
what are the market structures in the electricity sector;
how the technical constraints (due to the generation plants and the electricity grid) influence the design of the electricity market;
what are the different approaches to represent the network in the market models;
the evolution of the market paradigms due to the penetration of the non-programmable renewable energy sources;
to evolution of the market coupling project in Europe;
the Cross-Border Redispatch Cost-Sharing problem among different Countries.
The practical (numerical) lessons and the project work will allow the students to ( DdD2, DdD4 ):
understand how it is possible to implement (from a mathematical point of view) an electricity market model;
apply the optimization theory and algorithms for modelling electricity markets.

Electrical systems management in liberalized markets environment: liberalization process from vertically integrated structures to liberalized markets, the players and their role.
Main electricity markets paradigms: bilateral contracts and pool market models.
Power electricity exchange (PX) and the role of the Transmission System Operator (TSO): electricity market models and congestion management. Transmission capacity value.
Ancillary Services and Ancillary Services Market: description of ancillary services and their management in special market (ancillary services markets).
The evolution of the ancillary services markets.
Capacity market.
Imperfect competition; market power and promotion of competition: tools for market power analysis, game theory. Strategic interaction between day-ahead market and the ancillary services markets.
The Italian spot electricity market (MPE: mercato a pronti): structure and rules. MGP (Mercato del Giorno Prima), MI (Mercato Infragiornaliero), MSD (Mercato dei Servizi di Dispacciamento) and MB (Mercato di Bilanciamento).
The Italian Forward Electricity Market (MTE: mercato a termine): characteristics and rules. Interaction with the spot market.
Market coupling project in Europe.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
The final mark of the exam is split between the project (25%) and the final examination (75%). Both will be evaluated with a score of up to 30p and the student is considered promoted if the written test is passed with minimum 18p and if the resulting final mark is also 18p.
After the end of the course, students participate to one of the available final examinations.
The examination consists of a written part and of an oral part.
The written part contains the numerical applications and it will be scored with a maximum of 15p.
If the student provides a satisfactory answer in the written part, i.e. if it obtains at least 60% of the score (9p/15p), the student will have access to the oral part. Otherwise, the student exam is considered RIMANDATO/POSTPONED to the next exam sessions.
The oral part generally consists in one question on all the theoretical topics covered by the course and it will be scored with a maximum of 15p.
The mark of the final exam will be made by the sum of the two parts. The student passes the final exam if it obtains at least 18p out of 30p.
Students should demonstrate full comprehension of the subjects and the usage of the appropriate technical language ( DdD1, DdD2 and DdD4 ).

Chris Harris, Electricity Markets: Pricing, Structures and Economics, Editore: John Wiley & Sons Ltd, Anno edizione: 2013, ISBN: 9780470011584 https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/book/10.1002/9781118673409
Allen J. Wood, Bruce F. Wollenberg, Gerald B. Sheblé, Power Generation, Operation, and Control, 3rd Edition, Editore: Wiley, New York, Anno edizione: 2013, ISBN: 978-0-471-79055-6 https://www.wiley.com/en-us/Power+Generation%2C+Operation%2C+and+Control%2C+3rd+Edition-p-9780471790556

The course builds on basic principles and concepts (in the fields of electric circuit analysis, signals and systems, electronics, and electromagnetic fields) to provide an introduction to Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC). The course is designed to help students develop a deeper understanding of electromagnetic interference and the prevention of it through suitable design strategies. The course subjects cover: nonideal behavior of components, transmission line circuit models for EMC, conducted emissions and susceptibility, radiated emissions and susceptibility, antennas (basic principles, test and measurement antennas for EMC), crosstalk, shielding, grounding, measurement instrumentation, setups and facilities for EMC testing, governmental and functional requirements, system design for EMC. Practical applications considered in this course concern EMC aspects in complex electrical and electronic systems and environments, such as those found in aerospace, automotive, electric power generation, transmission/delivery, and railway industry sectors.
The teaching activity of this course includes lecture hours, training sessions, and lab sessions.
Lab sessions are mainly aimed at the design, implementation, and testing of an EMI filter for automotive applications. Students will work partly in the EMC lab and partly at home (remotely connected). Depending on company availability and course calendar constraints, additional lab sessions may be organized in collaboration with leading companies of the EMC sector, aimed at showing (remotely) specialized instrumentation and setups.
Expectations of achievements and abilities resulting from successful attendance of this course are those associated with the Dublin Descriptors DD1, DD2, DD3, DD4.
Innovative Teaching [IT] approaches (i.e. flipped classroom and blended learning) will be adopted for some of the course subjects. Those subjects are denoted with the acronym IT in the list of subjects reported below.
Notes:
The Electromagnetic Compatibility B course allows students to gain background knowledge to access the elective teaching module on Signal and Power Integrity of High-Speed Printed Circuit Boards. This is a 2-credit, elective, and extracurricular module organized and delivered in collaboration with companies, belonging to the Innovative Teaching Course Basket of Politecnico di Milano (named "Passion in Action"). This teaching module and relevant credits will be reported in the transcript of records.
The 8-credit course Electromagnetic Compatibility A (093576) is offered jointly with the course Electromagnetic Compatibility B (054165). These courses have the same learning outcomes and associated competence levels. The only difference concerns course contents. Course EMC A does not include the parts on (a) electromagnetic field equations and waves, (b) two-conductor transmission lines. For students taking the 8-credit course, those parts are considered prerequisites.
The 5-credit course Electromagnetic Compatibility C (055521) is offered jointly with the course Electromagnetic Compatibility B (054165) and covers a selection of the topics addressed in the main course (054165). The addressed topics are EMC requirements, conducted emissions and power supply filter design, radiated emissions and antennas for EMC, conducted and radiated susceptibility, crosstalk (and introductory notes on signal integrity), and shielding. For students taking the 5-credit course, knowledge of electromagnetic field equations and waves, transmission line theory, and scattering parameters are considered prerequisites.

Lecture hours will allow students
to know and understand (DD1):
the most important electromagnetic interference phenomena. Particularly, to know and understand the four basic EMC subproblems (i.e., radiated emissions; radiated susceptibility, conducted emissions, and conducted susceptibility) and their role on the design of electrical and electronic systems
the basic principles of the measurement procedures and setups for EMC assessment
to apply knowledge and understanding (DD2, DD3):
to lumped or distributed-parameter circuit models as well as electromagnetic models for the prediction of EMC behavior of electrical/electronic systems
to identify the dominant effects in EMC problems, and to orient the design of an electrical/electronic system toward EMC compliance.
Training sessions will allow students (DD1, DD2, DD3):
to become familiar with the theoretical concepts presented during lecture hours
to learn how to work with numerical tools for circuit simulation and electromagnetic analysis in order to develop EMC prediction models
to predict and assess nonideal behavior of circuit components
to design and analyze power supply filters
to design wired interconnections minimizing crosstalk
to predict the effect of field-to-wire coupling as well as radiated emissions in wiring structures
to analyze and design simple shielding structures.
Lab hours will allow students (DD2, DD4) to understand how instrumentation and special facilities can be used for EMC model extraction, as well as for EMC pre-compliance and compliance testing.

Introduction to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
EMC requirements (basic concepts and introductory notes)
Conducted emissions and power supply filter design [IT]
Nonideal behavior of components [IT]
Signal Spectra [IT]
Spectrum analyzer basics (for EMC and EMI testing)
Electromagnetic field equations and waves
Radiated emissions and antennas for EMC
Transmission lines and modal analysis ( two-conductor lines, and multi-conductor structures [IT])
Scattering parameters
Conducted and radiated susceptibility
Crosstalk (and introductory notes on signal integrity)
Shielding
System Design for EMC

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
Classroom assessment will be based on homework sessions (exercises and problems) and end-of-course examination (written test).
Homework
During the course, three sets of exercises and problems (involving both theoretical work and use of electromagnetic simulation tools) will be proposed as homework to students. In this activity, students will interact and be assisted by instructors (tutoring sessions), and will be required to submit homework reports. The three homework sessions will be ranked Pass/Fail. The end-of-course examination will be accessible only if all homework sessions are successfully passed.
Homework is intended to deepen subjects developed and discussed during classroom hours (DD1, DD2). At the same time, it is aimed at encouraging proactive approach of engaged students who care about their learning. It enhances team working skills, helps to develop the ability to make judgments, and improves communication skills (DD3, DD4).
End-of-Course Examination
The end-of-course examination is a comprehensive exam aimed at assessing the examinee's knowledge of basic EMC concepts and his/her ability to solve simple EMC problems. It is in the form of a written test composed of two parts: a) multiple-answer questions and b) problems/exercises (numerical and/or literal solution required).
The written test is aimed at evaluating (DD1, DD2):
knowledge and understanding of key concepts in EMC (multi-answer questions),
ability to apply knowledge and understanding of EMC concepts to simple problems by: (a) resorting to a logical and tidy approach, (b) showing ability to identify dominant EMC phenomena and focus analysis on fundamental aspects.
No oral examination is foreseen.

C. R. Paul, Introduction to Electromagnetic Compatibility, 2nd Edition, Editore: John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Anno edizione: 2006, ISBN: 9780471755005
C. R. Paul, Analysis of Multiconductor Transmission Lines, 2nd Edition, Editore: Wiley IEEE Press, Anno edizione: 2007, ISBN: 978-0-470-13154-1
F. T. Ulaby, Fundamentals of Applied Electromagnetics, 5th Edition, Editore: Pearson Education Inc., Anno edizione: 2007, ISBN: 0-13-241326-4

L’insegnamento illustra la struttura ed il funzionamento dei principali dispositivi utilizzati per la conversione statica dell’energia elettrica, in tutte le combinazioni possibili: CA-CC, CC-CC, CC-CA, CA-CA (CC = corrente continua, CA = corrente alternata).
Si analizza dal punto di vista teorico il funzionamento in alcuni casi base, semplici ma significativi, in cui si adottano opportune ipotesi semplificative. Per illustrare invece il funzionamento in casi reali, ci si basa su simulatori circuitali (Simulink) e su alcune esperienze di laboratorio.
Inoltre vengono presentate le nozioni fondamentali, necessarie per comprendere i principi su cui si basa il dimensionamento di alcuni di tali dispositivi (i dispositivi di uso più comune, nella loro forma più semplice)

Conoscenza e comprensione
A seguito del superamento dell’esame lo studente:

• Conosce i dispositivi principali usati per la conversione statica dell’energia
• Sa come funzionano, quali sono le loro caratteristiche, quando e dove vanno impiegati
  Capacità di applicare conoscenza e comprensione
  A seguito del superamento dell’esame lo studente:
• È in grado di dare un dimensionamento di massima di tali dispositivi
• È in grado di prevederne il funzionamento in casi reali, simulandolo tramite software
  Autonomia di giudizio
  Il dimensionamento e l’analisi funzionale simulativa richiedono autonomia di scelta e giudizio.
  Abilità comunicative
  A seguito del superamento dell’esame lo studente è in grado di comunicare struttura e funzionamento dei convertitori studiati
  Capacità di apprendimento
  Lo studente ha la possibilità di sviluppare le conoscenze acquisite in attività svolte in modo autonomo nell'ambito di tesi di Laurea Magistrale.

1) I componenti. Valvole controllate e non controllate.
2) Aspetti generali. Le valvole reali (curve caratteristiche; perdite, comando, ritardi,…); grandezze elettriche ed energetiche (valori medi ed efficaci, armoniche, potenze, rendimento, fattore di potenza).
3) Comportamento termico dei convertitori. Sistemi ad una e due costanti di tempo, impedenza termica, raffreddamento; calcolo della resistenza termica di un dissipatore.
4) Conversione c.a.-c.c. non controllata (diodi) e controllata (tiristori). Raddrizzatore a ponte di Graetz monofase e trifase, con diversi tipi di carico (RL, RC, RLE); commutazione, controllo di fase; analisi armonica. Filtri delle correnti armoniche iniettate in rete.
5) Conversione c.c.-c.c.. Convertitori “buck”, “boost”, CUK, SEPIC, a ponte ad H.
6) Conversione c.c.-c.a.. Inverter VSI a due livelli monofase e trifase: topologie, tecniche di modulazione; analisi armonica; inverter VSI a tre livelli; reversibilità degli invertitori VSI; conversione c.a.-c.c. con PF = 1.
Il corso prevede:
a) lezioni frontali;
b) lezioni in modalità flipped: agli studenti è assegnato del materiale, e in aula vi è discussione su di esso;
c) esercitazioni numeriche svolte dal docente;
d) esercitazioni numeriche svolte in aula dagli studenti;
e) simulazioni al calcolatore in ambiente Matlab/Simulink svolte in aula dagli studenti;
f) esercitazioni sperimentali in laboratorio.

Prova orale obbligatoria
L’esame è orale.
Valuta il livello di apprendimento raggiunto sui diversi fronti affrontati durante l'insegnamento, per cui consta di alcune fra le seguenti richieste:

• domande aperte sul programma svolto durante le lezioni (DdD1)
• esercizi numerici, del tipo di quelli svolti durante le esercitazioni numeriche (DdD1, DdD2, DdD3)
• simulazione di un dispositivo, fra quelli simulati in aula (DdD1, DdD2, DdD3)
• domande aperte sulle esperienze svolte in laboratorio (DdD1)
  Essendo l'eame orale, oltre alla conoscenza e alla capacità di applicarla, vengono testate anche le capacità comunicative (DdD4).
  Il sostenimento dell'esame è per sua natura un modo per valutare la capacità di apprendimento (DdD5) dello studente.

Ned Mohan, Tore M. Undeland, William P. Robbins, Power Electronics Converters, Applications, and Design, Editore: Hoepli, Anno edizione: 2002, ISBN: 9780471226932
Note: 3rd Edition. Language: English
Ned Mohan, Tore M. Undeland, William P. Robbins, Elettronica di potenza. Convertitori e applicazioni, Editore: Hoepli, Anno edizione: 2005, ISBN: 8820334283
Note: A cura di F. Castelli Dezza. Lingua: Italiano
Materiale disponibile su portale Beep del corso https://webeep.polimi.it

The main goal of the course is to give the fundamentals of the materials used in electrical engineering applications; in particular, the course will focus on the three functional classes of materials classified in terms of their final applications: electronic conductors, electrical insulators and magnetic materials. Details on materials involved in some practical applications for common devices and alternative energy generators such as batteries, fuel cells, capacitors and piezoelectrics will be also provided.

When the student has successfully passed the exam, he has a good knowledge of the following topics (DdD1):
knows the fundamentals properties of the three main classes of electrical materials, i.e. electrical conductors, electrical insulators and magnetic materials;
knows to which traditional class of materials they belong to, i.e. polymers, ceramics, metals and composites;
knows the relations existing between microscopic (physical-chemical) features of a material and its macroscopic properties and functions;
knows the typical ranges of values of the qualifying electrical properties for each class of materials.
A consistent and continuous part of the course will be devoted to solve numerical and practical problems encountered in the application of electrical materials, then the student will be able to solve specific problems, and to select the optimal materials for any case (DdD2,3).
A project on a specific case study will be discussed with the teacher (DdD4,5).

1. Industrial and technological relevance of electrical materials and their classification.
2. Microstructure and bonding in electrical materials.
3. Dielectric materials: main properties, permittivity, electric dipoles, polarizability, mechanisms of polarization, behavior in AC and DC fields, applications and uses.
4. Polymers involved in insulators: differences among thermoplastic, thermosetting and elastomeric materials; glass transition, vulcanization, mechanical behavior.
5. Electrical conductivity in metals: physical properties, drift mobility and drift velocity, conductivity and resistivity trends as a function of temperature and applications. Semi-conductors: physical-chemical properties, main materials, applications.
6. Magnetic materials: magnetic dipoles, classification of magnetic materials, domain theory; soft and hard magnetic materials: types and applications.
7. Piezoelectric materials: definition of direct and indirect effect, ferroelectric domains, hysteresis loop, PZT phase diagram, KNN properties, piezo-composites.
8. Examples of materials for alternative energy generators and storage devices: fuel cells, accumulators, capacitors.
Practical classes’ activity: numerical exercises on all topics of the course will be performed. All exercises and tests will be solved during class activity.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
Written exam (2 h) with numerical exercises and theoretical questions. The exam is not open-book, but the teacher will provide all the equations and constants necessary to solve the exercises.
Students who wish to improve their grade may request an additional oral examination. The maximum possible increase in the final grade is 3 points. Please note that the final grade may also be lowered if the performance during the oral examination is not considered satisfactory.

Kasap S.O., Principles of electronic materials and devices, Editore: McGraw Hill, Anno edizione: 2002, ISBN: 0-07-112237-0
K.M. Gupta and N. Gupta, Advanced electrical and electronics materials, Editore: Scrivener Publishing and John Wiley & Sons, Anno edizione: 2015, ISBN: 978-1-118-99835-9

Aims and scope
Problem solving for ordinary and partial differential equations. Manipulation of analytic functions of complex variable, distributions, Fourier series, Fourier transform, Laplace transform, distribution signals. These topics will be presented in the perspective of their relevant applications to problems in Electrical Engineering.
The teaching activity of this course includes lecture hours and training sessions. Expectations of achievements and abilities resulting from a successful attendance of this course are those associated with the Dublin Descriptors DD1, DD2, DD3, DD4.

The course is focused on the acquisition and critical use of basic tools for: functions of complex variable, zeroes, poles, residues, methods for solving problems related to partial differential equations, distributions, Fourier series, Fourier transform, Laplace transform, separation of variables techniques, essentials of Functional Analysis. Main applications are: periodic solutions of ordinary differential equations; Cauchy problem for wave equation and heat equation; boundary value problems for Laplace equation; analysis of distribution signals; in-depth study of signal processing using time and frequency domain.
Lecture hours will allow students to know and understand the topics above (DD1) and to apply knowledge and understanding (DD2, DD3).
Training sessions will allow studentsto become familiar with the theoretical concepts presented during lecture hours (DD1, DD2, DD3),
help developing ability to make judgements, and improves communication skills (DD3, DD4).

PROGRAM
1 - Introduction - Mathematical modeling. Examples of partial differential equations. Well posed problems. Boundary value problems: Dirichlet and Neumann boundary conditions. Initial value problems. Classification of second order linear Partial Differential Equations with constant coefficients. Conservation Laws. Linear transport equation. Characteristics. Superposition principle for linear problems. Harmonic functions and their properties.
2 - Analytic functions - Complex derivative. Cauchy-Riemann conditions. Cauchy Theorem. Analiticity of holomorphic functions. Residues Theorem. Practical evaluation of residues. Jordan Lemma. Uniqueness of analytic extension. Euler Gamma function. Multivalued functions of complex variable. Logarithmic Index. Rouché Theorem. Evaluation of path integrals by complex variable techniques.
3 - Functional Analysis - Banach spaces. Hilbert spaces. $C^k$ spaces. Lebesgue integral. Dominated convergence Theorem. Absolutely continuous functions. $L^p$ spaces. H\"older and Minkowski inequalities. Test functions. Dirac delta. Distributions or generalized functions. Derivative of a distribution. Tempered distributions. Distributional convergence. Division problems. Convolution. The fundamental solution of Laplace equation in R^n. Newtonian potential.
4 - Heat equation - The diffusion equation. Heat conduction. Maximum principle and uniqueness. The fundamental solution. The Cauchy problem for the heat equation. Energy estimates. Separation of variables: domains with radial symmetry, domains with rectangular symmetry. Eigenvalue problems.
5 - Fourier transform - Fourier transform in L^1 and in L^2. Riemann-Lebesgue Lemma. Inverse transform. Plancherel Identity. Fourier transform of tempered distributions. Paley-Wiener Theorem. Transform-based techniques for solving differential equations with finite energy conditions. Analogic, discrete, causal signals. Discrete and continuous spectra. Sobolev spaces of periodic functions and regularity properties. Uncertainty principle. Fundamental Theorem of filters. Transfer function. Shannon sampling Theorem.
6 - Fourier series of periodic signals – Coefficients evaluation for locally integrable functions. Convergence properties of Fourier series. Parseval Identity. Periodic distributions. Interference, beats, chaotic superposition. Fourier series of periodic signal: relationship between Forier series and Fourier transform of a periodic signal. Fourier series and Fourier transform of the Dirac comb. Periodic solutions of ordinary differential equations. Separation of variables method for linear PDEs. Eigenvalue problems.
7 - Laplace transform – Laplace transformable functions. Laplace transformable distributionns. Analiticity of the Laplace transforms. Algebraic and functional transformation rules. Heaviside formula. Riemann-Fourier inversion formula. Relationship between Laplace transform and Fourier transform. Initial value Theorem. Final value Theorem. Transform-based methods for solving differential equations with conditions. Integro-differential equations. Differential equations with delayed argument.
8 - Wave equation - Transverse waves in a string. Vibrations of a membrane. The one-dimensional wave equation. The Cauchy problem and d’Alembert’s formula. Domain of dependence and range of influence. Huygens principle. Energy conservation. D'Alembert’s formula. Fundamental solution of the wave equation (N=1, 2, 3). Plane waves, Spherical waves. Huygens’principle. Helmoltz equation. Deduction of 3D wave equation from Maxwell’s system of equations. Scalar potential and vector potential. Separation of variables in rectangular and radial domains.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, con prove in itinere
The final exam is written, and consists of two parts.
The first part is a multiple choice tests. Passing grade in the first part is a threshold for admittance to the second part.
The second part consists in solving exercises, providing detailed motivations and answering theoretical questions, all of them related with the topics of the course, in order to assess the knowledge of theorems and ability to exploit the mathematical tools presented in the frontal lessons.
All exam tasks will have prescribed scores.
The exam will check acquired skills, understanding of mathematical tools and ability to apply knowledge concerning: Linear Partial Differential Equations, Analytic functions of complex variable, Functional Analysis tools, Heat equation, Fourier transform of functions and distributions, Fourier series of periodic signals, Laplace transform, Wave equation and vibrations, in-depth study of signal processing using time and frequency domain.
Referring to the Dublin Descriptors, the first part of the exam is aimed at evaluating DD1, DD2;the second part is aimed at evaluating DD3, DD4.

Franco Tomarelli, Mathematical Analysis Tools for Engineering, Editore: Esculapio, Anno edizione: 2024
Note: ISBN 978-88-9385-346-0
Filippo Gazzola, Franco Tomarelli & Maurizio Zanotti, Analytic functions, Integral transforms, Differential equations - Second edition, Editore: Esculapio, Anno edizione: 2023, ISBN: 978-88-9385-345-3
Note: The English version of the text will be also available as an E-book.
Filippo Gazzola, Franco Tomarelli, Maurizio Zanotti, Analisi Complessa, Trasformate, Equazioni Differenziali - Terza edizione, Editore: Esculapio, Anno edizione: 2023, ISBN: 978-88-9385-344-6

The course deals with static converters, based on diodes, thyristors and controllable switches together with electromagnetic devices. The schemes, the operation, the control, the component data, together with the input and output quantities are analyzed. The main design criteria and some applications are also studied.
The goal is also to give the students a methodology to analyse new converters.
The course is based on:
a) theoretical lessons and numerical exercises;
b) computer simulations Matlab/Simulink to analyse the performances of a static converter;
c) experimental tests in the laboratory; the students will be divided into groups with at most three people per table.

After passing the exam, the student:
will know the fundamental principles and the operation theory of several static converters (DdD1);
will know some general design concepts used in Power Electronics (DdD1);
will learn how to apply some concepts, learnt in other courses, to Power Electronics: in detail, reference is made to the thermal aspects, most important in the design of a converter, and to control theory, necessary to make a controlled converter operate (DdD2);
will be able to apply his knowledge to other problems dealing with Power Electronics; reference is made to the applications to Electric Power Systems and Electrical Machines (DdD2, 3);
will be able to simulate a converter in Matlab/Simulink and to design its control system, implementing it (DdD2).
Datasheets of common static switches will be provided during the course: the student will learn how to pick up the necessary and useful information (DdD2).
During the exam, the student should show the ability to find out the best way to solve a problem (DdD3, 5) and to describe some aspects of a converter in a sequential and understandable way (DdD4).

1) The components. Diodes, thyristors and controllable switches; transformers and reactors for the conversion, auxiliary components (inductors, capacitors for power factor correction and filtering).
2) General aspects. Real switches (characteristic curves, losses, delays,…); electrical and energetic quantities (average and RMS values, harmonics, power, efficiency, power factor).
3) Thermal behaviour of the converters. Systems with one or two time constants, thermal transient impedance, cooling.
4) Line-commutated a.c-d.c. conversion. Single – phase and three – phase Graetz rectifier, with different types of load (RL or RC); non-instantaneous commutation, phase–control; harmonic analysis; twelve–pulse converters. Filter for the harmonic components of the current injected into the grid.
5) D.c. – d.c. switch-mode conversion. “buck”, “boost”, full-bridge converter.
6) D.c. – a.c. switch-mode conversion. Two–level single–phase and three–phase VSI inverters: structure, modulation techniques; harmonic analysis; Multi-level NPC and cascaded inverters; a.c.-d.c. conversion with PF = 1; operation as an inverter and as a rectifier.
7) Compensation of the reactive power: thyristor-controlled inductors; Statcom.
8) Design of a converter from the electrical, thermal and control viewpoints.
9) Zero voltage/current switching converters: analysis of one converter.
10) Switching dc power supplies: analysis of one converter.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale obbligatoria
The exam consists in a written test (about three hours) and an oral test (30-45 minutes). The teacher may decide to skip the oral test for a student, if he thinks it is not necessary.
The student must:
*) express a reasoning in a linear way: the assumptions, the development and the conclusions (DdD4); a neat written task is required (DdD4);
*) explain the operation of a converter from an analytical view-point, through schemes, formulas and plots (DdD1);
*) solve the numerical exercises, analysing the results critically (DdD1, 2);
*) make correlations between different subjects (DdD2).
The numerical exercises explained during the lectures are a subject of the exam.
If a student is caught cheating during an exam session, they will not be allowed to take the next exam session.

Mohan - Undeland - Robbins, Power Electronics - Converters, Applications, and Design, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 2003
Some papers available on Webeep
Note: Papers to fulfil what can be found in the book.
Rashid, Power Electronics, Editore: Editore: Academic Press ebook available in the Polimi electronic library

This course deals with power systems analyzed from ethical and social perspectives. It is intended to give students a chance to reflect on the ethical, social, and cultural impacts of power systems by focusing on the issues faced by and brought about by electrical engineers.
This integrated course includes lectures by two instructors with complementary expertise, covering the issues of power systems at the intersection of technical and socio-ethical issues, and invited lecturers, covering specific topics at the forefront of research in the socio-technical management of power systems.
Class participation is expected, as classes will be organized as short workshop sessions in which experiences, and individual and group reflections are punctuated by Socratic discussions or microlectures.

Knowledge and understanding
Students will:
Acquire a broad perspective on the ethical and social impacts and implications of power systems;
Be acquainted with normative ethics and normative argumentation;
Learn how to recognize and analyze ethical and social aspects and issues inherent in development, control, and design of power systems;
Be able to understand how technical problems are inherently connected to a social dimension within a socio-technical perspective.
Applying knowledge and understanding
Students will:
Be able to use critical skills in clarifying and ethically analyzing case-studies involving power systems;
Be able to apply ethical theories to problems created, aggravated or transformed by smart grids;
Be able to explore and assess possibilities for solving or diminishing existing and emerging ethical and social problems of smart grids.
Making judgements
Students will be able:

• To autonomously analyze the ethical issues of a technology and to develop a critical analysis on that;
• To evaluate and select the appropriate knowledge in the effort of elaborating and justifying a philosophical argument on a topic autonomously selected.
  Communication
  Students will learn to:
• Work in small groups;
• Present in an effective way the results of their independent research, being able to justify their choices.
  Lifelong learning skills
  Students will:
  Be better prepared to their future professional life in an ethically and socially responsible way;
  Be able to analyze problems through an ethical lens.

The course will cover different topics from both a theoretical and a more practical point of view.
The following topics will be presented within the context of power systems development and technologies:
Privacy and privacy-preserving analysis of energy data: infrastructure components and consumer devices as data acquiring network devices.
Security both at the individual and national level: power disruption causing loss of infrastructure, endangering public safety and jeopardizing national security.
Equity: equitable pricing and affordability of access; fair distribution of costs and benefits; energy management burden on uniformed consumer; managing consumer behavior.
Environmental sustainability: future affordability of energy; intergenerational justice; possible conflict between reliability and environmental sustainability.
AI/ML techniques and Big Data analytics for the smart grid: their increasing role and critical issues (e.g., fair algorithmic decision making).
Social acceptance issues: effects of moral values on the acceptance of smart grid technologies; ethics of technology and technology acceptance models.
Professional codes of conduct: benefits and limits; how codes face innovation such as the smart grid.
Students will be supervised in the development of the final project (class presentation) in order to achieve the required standards.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Foreword: The program is the same for the both versions of the course (i.e, 5 ECTS, and 6 ECTS).
Grading will be on the following basis.
5 ECTS: 50% final project (team presentation in class); 50% written test on the course topics.
6 ECTS: 50% final project (team presentation in class + individual assignment); 50% written test on the course topics. The additional ECTS is accounted for by the individual assignment, which will be announced and agreed upon at the beginning of the course.

Il corso è focalizzato sull'insegnamento di metodi e strumenti per la pianificazione e la gestione di progetti di piccole e grandi dimensioni. Gli argomenti sono trattati dal punto di vista strategico, tattico e operativo, l'obiettivo è quello di dare una visione dei possibili aspetti critici, dei rischi e delle opportunità nella gestione di tutti i tipi di progetti. Il materiale del corso comprende anche gli strumenti necessari per comprendere la natura e le caratteristiche dei diversi tipi di innovazione e dei relativi processi di apprendimento. È approfondito l'impatto dei progetti di innovazione, nonché le modalità con cui aggiornare i processi aziendali e presentare il prodotto finale. Il corso affronta le questioni a livello strategico, nonché le decisioni di carattere più tattico. Alcuni casi di studio in ambito industriale espongono i fattori che portano al successo o al fallimento nella gestione di progetti e dell'innovazione anche tramite l'utilizzo di semplici software (ad esempio, MS Project, MS Excel, ecc.).
Il programma affronterà i seguenti argomenti.
Metodi e strumenti avanzati di project management..
Dinamica del sistema.
Applicazione realistica dei metodi per la gestione dei rischi.
Project Organizations.
Organizzazione dell'innovazione, innovazione, e successo di nuovi prodotti.

This course will introduce methods and devices for collecting and processing power system's measurements, finalized to monitor and control energy systems and smart grids.
Considering the measurement devices, the course aims to define the main requirements and specifications for properly design, select and maintain the components of the measurement chain.
For what concerns the topic dealing with the measurement data processing, the course aims to enable the students to specify, design and develop measurement data processing algorithms.

Lectures and exercise sessions will allow the student to (DdD1-2)
know the working principle of the several voltage and current sensors employed in power systems; select the proper set of sensors for specific measurement problems and specify their characteristics;
define the characteristics of the system interfacing sensors and instrumentation, in relation with electromagnetic compatibility requirements
specify the characteristics and architecture of a data acquisition system for a specific measurement task
analyze discrete time signals and systems in order to develop digital signal processing algorithms for optimal estimation, with particular reference to the static and dynamic state estimation in power systems
develop discrete time signal processing algorithms for forecasting in power systems.
The experimental laboratory will allow the student to (DdD1-2-4)
test the learned theoretical concepts
write a document reporting the instruments’ characteristics and the measurement results
develop simple measurement processing algorithms using commercial platforms such as Matlab and Labview

I - Fundamental principles of electrical and electronic measurements
Definition of measurements and measurement chain
The International System of Quantities and the International System of Units
Measurement errors: definition, probabilistic representation
II - Power system's transducers
General concepts and terminology
Current trasnducers: shunt, current transformer, Rogowsky coil, Hall effect current transducers
Voltage transducers: inductive voltage transformer, capacitive voltage transformer, voltage divider, Hall effect voltage transducers
III - Instrumentation
Sensor's interfacing: grounding, shielding, balancing, analog front end, mode rejection ratios, safety requirements
Data acquisition systems: sampling, analog to digital conversion, architectures, merging units
Power meters: power measurements in polyphase systems, Blondel's theroem, polyphase system identification
Energy meters: standards requirements (IEC 62052, IEC 62053, EN 50470, MID)
Advanced Metering Infrastructures (AMI), communication protocols (ModBus, IEC 61850, etc.)
IV - Elements of measurement signal processing
Estimation: estimator definition and general attributes, minimum mean square error, maximum a posteriori, maximum likelihood, measuremnt uncertainty;
Estimators: linear least squares, weighted least squares, recursive least squares, non-linear least squares;

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
The examination consists of a compulsory written test for all students. The written test covers the entire course programme and is based on the analysis of a practical case study.
Students will be asked to (DdD1-2-3):

• identify the main requirements of the proposed problem;
• define a suitable measurement system architecture;
• specify the main characteristics of the measurement system components;
• define an appropriate data-processing algorithm.
  During the written examination, the following skills will be assessed (DdD1-2-3-4):
• ability to address the assigned problem using a logical, clear, and well-structured approach;
• ability to focus the analysis on the main features of the proposed problem;
• level of knowledge and understanding of the topics covered in the course;
• ability to perform analytical manipulations and develop relevant demonstrations.
  Students who obtain a written test score above the established threshold may choose to take an optional oral examination. The oral examination covers the course topics and may result in either an increase or a decrease in the score obtained in the written test.

Teaching material for this course is available on the Polimi Beep Portal https://beep.metid.polimi.it/

GOALS
The course aims to provide a deep understanding of how to develop measurement methods and techniques, based on intelligent instruments. Since the course is offered to future electrical engineers, the considered applications are related to the monitoring and control of the modern electric power systems, in the new smart-grid scenario, where these methods and modern instruments have become more and more necessary nowadays. However, it is also important to know that the explained methods and techniques have a general validity and can be used in any measurement scenario, whichever are the physical quantities to be measured.
It is therefore important that the students have a deep knowledge of both the measurements theoretical basis and the modern measurement equipment.
The subject is organized in theoretical lessons, practical lessons and laboratories. The theoretical lessons will provide the students the necessary theoretical knowledge in the field of measurement and modern instrumentation based on DSP. During the theoretical lessons, some virtual instruments will be shown and discussed together with the students, to better understand the explained theorems.
The practical lessons will show the students numerical exercises, involving the provided theoretical knowledge. Different kinds of Lab classes are given:
informatic laboratories: after some explanations about the basis of programming, the students are guided in completing some small projects during the laboratory itself or at home;
experimental laboratories: the students will be shown practical applications of the theoretical concepts learnt in the theoretical lessons. In the experimental laboratories, students are divided into small groups. Each group works on a table equipped with a DSP system, an ADC board and LabView software, on which the measurement methods learned during the theoretical classes can be developed. Starting from the acquisition of real voltage signals, the students will realize virtual instruments and distributed measurement instruments.
Within the framework of innovative didactics, students will also be invited to attend additional courses (i.e., MOOCs ) or similar learning activities.

EXPECTED LEARNING OUTCOMES
The course “ SMART MEASUREMENT ARCHITECTURES FOR ELECTRIC SYSTEMS ” will allow the students to know (DdD1):
the modern scenario of the electricity market (the smart-grid scenario);
the measurement techniques applicable in the smart-grid scenario (DSP techniques);
the theoretical fundamentals of the DSP techniques, that is the sampling theorem and the correlated topics, such as the aliasing problem and the anti-aliasing methods, the leakage errors, the observation interval, the windowing techniques and so on;
the DSP measurement systems and architectures;
the distributed measuring systems and the related topics, such as the time synchronization;
the available methods for time synchronization (the GPS system and the time protocols).
The practical lessons of the course will allow the students to (DdD2):
apply the theoretical fundamentals of DSP techniques to practical examples;
understand and comment the results of a measurement obtained with DSP techniques.
The laboratories of the course will allow the students (DdD2 and DdD4):
to know LabView software, the most common used graphical programming languages for the realization of virtual instruments;
to realize virtual instruments with LabView;
to know in depth how the sampling parameters (sampling frequency, observation interval, observation window and so on) affect the measurement results;
to know from a practical point of view the importance of time synchronization.

TOPICS
Introduction and perspectives. I ntroduction to the modern electric system and the necessities for its monitoring and control. The distributed measurement systems and their characteristics. The DSP measurement architectures and the motivations for which they are particularly suitable to monitor and control the modern electric systems.
The concept of sampling. The passage from the analog world to the digital world. Advantages and possible problems.
Sequences and discrete time systems. The sequences: the mathematical representation of the sampled signals. Convolution between sequences. Discrete time systems. Linearity. Shift-invariance. Frequency response of a linear, shift-invariant system.
Signal sampling. The signal sampling. The sampling theorem. The aliasing phenomenon and the techniques to avoid it. The periodic signal sampling. The synchronous condition. The errors introduced by a non-coherent sampling (the leakage errors). The methods for the mitigation of the leakage errors and the observation windows. Mitigation of the leakage errors and phantom harmonics. Sampling of multiple signals and power evaluation with different algorithms.
Architecture of a DSP based measurement instrument. The analog-to-digital conversion. Characteristics of the analog-to-digital converters (ADC) from the metrological point of view. Behaviour of the ADC in the presence of noise. Description of the analog-to-digital converters: successive approximation ADC, flash ADC, sigma-delta ADC. Sample and Hold devices. M easurement architectures for the digital signal processing (microprocessors, digital signal processors, dedicated hardware structures).
Time synchronization. The satellite synchronization systems (GPS, GLONASS, GALILEO). The time protocols (NTP and PTP).
Virtual instruments. The description of a virtual instrument and the use of LABVIEW.
Measurements on real signals. Evaluation of the mean value of the acquired signal. Evaluation of the period. Evaluation of the spectrum. Introduction of the observation windows for the mitigation of the leakage errors when acquiring out of synchronism. Evaluation of the instantaneous power and the power spectrum. Evaluation of the phasors. Data-socket communication. Realization of a distributed measurement system.
Fundamentals of Measurement uncertainty. Understanding the concepts of measurement and measurement uncertainty. Calculation and propagation of measurement uncertainty.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale obbligatoria
Altro
ASSESSMENT
The final examination will consist on a written part [DdD1, DdD2, DdD5] and on an oral part [DdD1, DdD3, DdD4].
The written examination consists of numerical exercises - aimed to verify if the students have understood how the sampling of a continuous signal modifies the information of the signal itself and how to apply the theoretical concepts. The student must solve the numerical problems, showing the adopted formulas and motivating their answers. Passing positively the written part is necessary to access the oral examination.
The oral examination consists of various questions on all the topics covered by the course. During the oral exam, students should demonstrate full understanding of the subjects and the usage of appropriate technical language. They students can write on the blackboard (or on pieces of paper, depending on the location) and provide formula, graphs, proofs, drawings... everything that is useful to explain the subject.
The score of the oral part is decided according to:
the knowledge of the subject;
the details given during the exposition;
the clarity of the exposition;
the capability of reasoning and answering to detailed questions;
the technical language.
The final score will then be based on: the written examination, the oral examination, the results of other assessments based on innovative didactic.
In addition, students need to complete the following module as a part of the overall course (the earned badge must be uploaded, and random questions related to the course content may be asked during the oral examination):
Measurement Fundamentals (Italian version: POK – Measurement Fundamentals (Italian); English version: POK – Measurement Fundamentals (English) ). French version will also be available soon.

Gabriele D'Antona - Alessandro Ferrero, Digital Signal Processing for Measurement Systems - Theory and applications, Editore: Springer, ISBN: 0-387-24966-4
Note: Chapters 1 to 6 are to be studied.
additional notes https://webeep.polimi.it/login/index.php
Note: Additional teaching material beyond what is reported in the textbook will be uploaded to Webeep before the start of the academic year.

The methods and procedures are studied for the design and the electromagnetic and thermal check of the static and rotating electrical machines.
The considered machines are those of the four most common ones, that is transformers, induction machines, synchronous and d.c. commutator machines, with some suitable variants, such as special transformers and permanent magnet a.c. and. d.c. rotating machines (of brush and brushless type).
The analyzed topics are those of specific interest for the designer. However, they are useful also for readers interested in “inside” understanding of the electrical machines and also for who needs to evaluate the equivalent model parameters of the machines, in order to analyze and to control their operation.
As concerns the calculation approach point of view, the analytical treatments are favoured, suited to point out the dependence on the constructional parameters and on the electrical and magnetic loadings, by developing and using the classical sizing equations.
The use of analytical and numerical techniques are described for the basic sizing and the detailed design of components and for the evaluation of their performances, characteristic curves and related electrical parameters. The employment of calculation algorithms is illustrated, using design sheets for sizing and FEM codes for the check evaluations: the use of free student versions of tools are favoured (MathCad Prime Express, Maxwell Ansoft 2D).

Knowledge and understanding
Following the getting through of the exam, the student gains the following skills:
he knows the fundamentals, the general aspects, the theory elements and the basic ideas for the electrical machines sizing;
he knows the appropriate terms and the main elements of static and rotating electrical machines design;
he knows the sizing equations and the scaling laws linking power and main sizes of similar machines series;
he knows the meaning, the list and the calculation procedure of the rated and nameplate quantities of each kind of electrical machines;
he knows the link among the loadings and the electromagnetic and thermal limits of the used materials and of insulation and cooling systems of the electrical machines;
he understands the adopted approximations in the design models and he knows how to estimate their parameters.
Ability to apply knowledge and understanding
Moreover, following the getting through of the exam, the student:
is able to use the acquired knowledge to evaluate the main sizes of the electrical machines and all the operation and costructional quantities of the preliminary design;
is able to identify the main parameters and variables linking the design and the performances of an electrical machine;
is able to choose the parametric ratios involved in the sizing equations and in the expressions of the parameters to obtain performances close to the specifications;
is able to adapt, to modify and to use worksheets for the design analysis and the check evaluations of the various kinds of electrical machines;
is able to use FEM tools for the evaluation of leakage reactances, additional losses in the windings, check of the dielectric field and of the local saturation levels.
Autonomy of judgment
During the exam, the student should show he has suitably refined an autonomous ability of judgment about the adequacy of the approach adopted for the solution of a problem, choosing the corrective actions to be employed in order to improve the design results.
Communication skills
Moreover, the student is able to communicate the design results with effectiveness, pointing out the main consequences on the performances of the analyzed electrical machine.
Learning skills
At last, the student has the opportunity to furtherly develop the acquired knowledge and methodologies, through autonomous activities carried out within the M. Sc. thesis activity.

Topic 1: general aspects; conductive materials (circular and rectangular wires: standard sizes); insulating materials; soft laminated and solid magnetic materials; permanent magnets (PM) and their features (grades; B-H plane parameters; operating point; temperature dependence and irreversible demagnetization risks); losses and heating: core losses, ohmic and eddy current losses, cooling aspects, duty types.
Topic 2: transformers: magnetic dispositions (single-phase, shell type, three and five limb cores); winding structures; pulse stress and insulation protection; sizing of standard and special transformers (zig-zag windings, autotransformers, three-winding transformers); leakage reactance evaluation for concentric and double concentric windings, zig-zag connection, three-winding transformers; dissymmetry aspects and their effects on losses, reactances, electro-dynamical stress.
Topic 3: windings for a.c. rotating machines and fields in the air gap: m.m.f.s, fluxes and e.m.f.s; main, fundamental and harmonic fields; slot harmonic fields; cartesian and Goerges m.m.f. diagrams; winding types (with integer and fractional slots/(pole-phase)), their representation and electromagnetic properties; surface and linear current density and their relations; sizing equations; cages: bar and ring currents; construction features and operating aspects (shaft currents, Carter factor, leakage reactance and its contributions, main and parasitic torques).
Topic 4: induction machines: equivalent circuit and parameter transportation factors; disturbances due to harmonic fields (parasitic torques and noise); simple, deep bar and multiple bar cages; wound rotor types; parameter evaluation and calculation of the torque-speed characteristic curves; performances and figures of merit; p.u. values; design and check aspects.
Topic 5: synchronous machines: wound rotor types (isotropic and salient-pole; evaluation of the field m.m.f. in loaded operation); PM types (a.c. brushless: types of rotors, PM dispositions –surface, buried –, PM materials and geometry); no-load and loaded operation; cogging and torque ripple at load; characteristic curves and phasor diagrams determination, taking or not saturation into account; armature reaction and related parameters; design and check calculations.
Topic 6: d.c. machines: commutator types, with field current or PM excitation; d.c. brushless machines; armature reaction and commutation aspects; winding data and design choices; sizing evaluations; magnetization characteristic curve; checks regarding commutation and auxiliary pole.

Prova orale obbligatoria
The examination is oral, it consists of three questions and it regards the subjects developed during lessons and throughout the practice activities.
During the examination, the following skills are evaluated in the description of the topics:
ability to organize the description of assigned topic in a tidy and logic sequence;
ability to focus the presentation on the priority aspects of the topic considered;
level of critical in-depth knowledge of the topic under discussion;
quality of the exposition: property of language, ability of analytical manipulation to develop demonstrations, ability to interact with the conversation partners during the discussion of the topic;
knowledge of the order of magnitude of the main quantities and parameters involved in the expressions concerning operation, sizing and check of electrical machines.

Teaching material for this course is available on the Polimi Beep Portal https://beep.metid.polimi.it/
Note: The available material includes: Lecture Notes: "Construction and Design of Electrical Machines", by F. Correggiari, A. Di Gerlando, G.M. Foglia; practice lessons notes; slides used for presentations
J. Harlow, Electric Power Transformer Engineering, Editore: CRC Press, Anno edizione: 2012, ISBN: 978-1-4398-5636-9
Note: 3rd Edition
J. Pyrhonen, T. Jokinen, V. Hrabovcova, Design of Rotating Electrical Machines, Editore: Wiley and sons, Anno edizione: 2008, ISBN: 978-0-470-69516-6
I. Boldea, S. Nasar, Induction Machine Design Handbook, Editore: CRC Press, Anno edizione: 2010, ISBN: 978-1-4200-6668-5
Note: 2nd Edition
D. Hanselman, Brushless PM Motor Design, Editore: Magna Physics Pub., Anno edizione: 2006, ISBN: 1-881855-15-5
Note: 2nd Edition
J. Gieras, M. Wing, PM Motor Technology, Design and Applications, Editore: Marcel Dekker, Anno edizione: 2002, ISBN: 0-8247-0739-7
Note: 2nd Edition
J.R. Hendershot, T.J.E. Miller, Design of brushless permanent-magnet machines, Editore: Motor Design Books, Anno edizione: 2010, ISBN: 978-0-9840687-0-8

The overarching aim of this unit is to provide students with an overview on electric drives and interfacing technologies for renewable power generation, and build technical skills on design, control and integration of the main electric components within such systems. The main focus is on wind energy, with some light-touch of wave energy and solar-photovoltaic applications. The delivered content will include
Lectures
Tutorials with numerical examples.
Simulation labs: Finite-Element / CAD software and Matlab-Simulink.

After successful completion of this unit, students will be able to:
Describe the key features of the main electric generator and converter topologies for renewable energy systems and analyse their operation and performance in a quantitative manner (DdD1).
Select and combine drivetrain, generator and converter for a power generation drive and define the relevant specifications for a given application (DdD2, DdD3).
Carry out an initial design for an electric generator from a set of specifications and assess the performance using a software package for Finite Element analysis (DdD2).
Devise the control structure for a power generation drive, design the controller details and tune the related parameters (DdD2, DdD3).
Implement integrated lumped-parameter simulation models of generator, power converter and control for a renewable power generation system using Matlab-Simulink (DdD2).
Present and communicate technical information in a concise, precise and effective way (DdD4).
Gather, appraise and apply new technical information from the literature, product brochures, and datasheets (DdD5).

Electric generators. Power trains for wind turbine generators. Modelling of Permanent Magnet and Wound-Field Synchronous Generators, Induction and Doubly-Fed Induction Generators. Materials for ac generators: characteristics and loss mechanisms. Windings for ac generators. Magnetic circuit design. Electromagnetic modelling: flux, electromotive force, torque and loss calculation. Thermal modelling and cooling methods. Mechanical aspects. Generator specifications and design criteria, sizing equations and design flowchart. Finite Element Analysis of electrical machines: FEA model workflow and postprocessing, FEA simulation labs. Fully-worked PMSG design example and performance assessment via Finite Element Analysis.
Power Electronics and control. Generator-side converters: multi-pulse rectifiers, interleaved dc/dc converters, voltage-source inverters. Torque and speed capability of PM and induction generators. Power control maximum power point tracking startegies for PM and induction generators. Doubly-fed induction generators: features, power flow and field-oriented control technique. Grid-side converters: current control and synchronisation techniques, stand-alone operation.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
2.5-hour unseen written examination with theoretical and numerical questions. The Lecturer may require an additional oral examination. In order to pass the exam, students must be able to:
Describe the construction and operating features of Permanent-Magnet, Induction and Doubly-Fed Induction Generators and explain their steady-state and dynamic operation by using fundamental equations and diagrams (DdD1).
Carry-out initial design of Permanent-Magnetand Induction from a set of basic specifications by using sizing equations and making sensible assumptions about material characteristics, operating conditions and constraints ((DdD2, DdD3).
Sketch diagrams and typical waveforms of power electronics converters for renewable power generation units and explain the operation and control of these components within the broader context of power systems (DdD1, DdD3).
Explain the control techniques for renewable power generation units (DdD1), select and design the appropriate control strategy for a given drive configuration (DdD2).
Discuss Finite Element Analysis setup and post-processing techniques to compute electrical machine parameters and performances (DdD1).
Provide theoretical explanations with a logical structure (e.g. assumptions, deductions, discussion and conclusion) and appropriate terminology (DdD4).

J. Pyrhonen, T. Jokinen, V. Hrabovcova, Design of Rotating Electrical Machines, Editore: Wiley & S, Anno edizione: 2008
H. Abu-Rub, M. Malinowski, K. Al-Haddad, Power Electronics for Renewable Energy Systems, Transportation and Industrial Applications, Editore: Wiley & S, Anno edizione: 2014
N. Bianchi, Electrical Machine Analysis Using Finite Elements, Editore: Taylor & Francis CRC, Anno edizione: 2005
I. Boldea, Linear Electric Machines, Drives and MAGLEVs Handbook, Editore: Taylor & Francis CRC, Anno edizione: 2018

This course is aimed to introduce aspects and issues related to the design and operation of transmission and distribution grids, electronic converters for high power applications, the conversion of renewable sources and their interactions with the networks.

The course will allow the Students to know (DdD1):
the conversion of renewable sources, mainly photovoltaic and wind, into electric energy;
the high voltage direct current power transmission through modern power converters in the era of a high penetration of renewable sources;
the constructive parameters of the distribution and transmission lines and their influence on the electric parameters;
the analysis of the transient events, e.g. lightnings, their propagation and measurements for their mitigation;
storage systems and compensating devices to improve the quality of the power delivered to the end users in the presence unpredictable generation from renewable sources;
architectures of AC and DC grids and their comparison.
The laboratory project will allow the Students to (DdD2 and DdD3)
prepare, present and discuss about the design issues, benefits and problematics related to renewable source generators in actual power systems;
use software tools to study and simulate distribution and transmission systems that can also include power electronic devices.
guided work on the project with review in progress.
A Training Section of 5 hours available via webminar will introduce the laboratory projects.
Technical visits to real high power systems will show to the Students the practical application of the theoretical aspects (DdD2).

1.: Renewable sources: this section is related to the electricity production from renewable primary sources, especially for wind and photovoltaic technologies modern solutions are highlighted. Besides, sizing criteria and criticalities of renewable sources are presented and discussed.
2.: HVDC transmission: this topic is focused on the modern High Voltage DC transmission systems, with LCC or VSC technologies, used for long-distance electricity transmission and to embed more renewable power plants in the transmission grid.
3.: Storage systems: these systems are currently under investigation for renewable generation dispatchability. In this part different technologies are presented and discussed applied to renewable sources.
4.: Transmission lines: the first part of this section is related to the calculation of the series and shunt line parameters. The second part is focused on the behavior of the transmission lines in different working conditions, both in transient and in steady state.
5.: Distribution systems: this section is focused on the medium voltage distribution systems, analyzing their different configurations, working principles and possible criticalities as intermittent arcs.
6.: Stability of systems: in this section the stability of both rotating machines and transmission lines is analyzed.
7.: Insulation coordination: the insulation coordination between different systems is discussed and presented using a statistical approach.
Room exercise lessons are dedicated to the sizing of renewable electricity generation, storage devices and transmission systems through practical exercises and simulation software tools.
Technical visits on real power systems complete the course.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), individuale, con revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
Final exam at the end of the course will be in written form.
Some questions on specific subjects will be asked to assess the knowledge of the theoretical aspects of the course (DdD1).
Moreover, a written test will assess the ability of the Student to link the theoretical subjects to the practical aspects (DdD2).
During this test, the Student will have to integrate the different aspects of the topics of the course to find the correct solution (DdD3).
A design project carried out during the laboratory will contribute to the final evaluation (DdD2).

M. Eremia and others, Advanced solutions in Power Systems:HVDC, FACTS, and Artificial Intelligence, Editore: IEEE Press - Wiley, Anno edizione: 2016, ISBN: 9781119175391

The main objective of the course consists of the definition of the procedures for the design of the powertrain of electric transportation means, by land, air or water.
To achieve this objective, different configurations of electrical machines, power supplies, control systems and powertrain topologies are presented. An analysis of the problems of the interface between vehicle and grid, in terms of components, is also introduced.

Knowledge and understanding (DdD1)
After taking the exam the student:
knows the modeling and the design principles of the main electrical drives for the electric propulsion
understands and knows the dynamic operating modes of the main electrical machines
knows how to design the components of an electric powertrain
knows the problems related to the connection of an electric vehicle to the grid
Applying knowledge and understanding (DdD2)
During the laboratory activities, made using computer simulations tools and demo boards, the student:
is able to analyze the behavior of a dynamic system
is able to analyze the interaction between the electric vehicle and the grid
After taking the exam the student:
is able to identify and calculate the main parameters of the electrical components of a powertrain
is able to define simulation environments for electric transportation means and the connection to the grid.
Communication (DdD4)
During the laboratory activities, delivered through innovative teaching methods, the student is able to discuss different solutions of the implementation of the control schemes on a microcontroller.
After taking the exam, the student is able to effectively communicate the results of the design of the powertrain of an electric transportation mean.

Lectures program
Scenarios of pure electric transportation systems: current status, perspective, applications
Electrical machines for propulsion: modeling and operation principle of electrical machines (induction motor, AC and DC brushless, Switched Reluctance Machine,...); selection and sizing criteria.
Control techniques for electrical drives used in electric propulsion applications: field oriented control, direct torque control and SRM technique.
Analysis and sizing of static power converters for electric propulsion, for the energy management of storage systems and for the interface with the grid
Rechargeable Electric vehicles: powertrain architectures for different configurations
EV Charging: AC electric vehicle supply equipment (EVSE), DC EVSE, Multiple EVSE
Communication Protocols: Smart Grid Architecture model, IEC standards about EV, EV Charging Stations
Case studies on road, rail, water or air transportation means
Computer laboratory and experimental activities:
Simulation of field oriented control and direct control of an induction machine
Simulation of the field oriented control of an AC brushless
Experimental activities on demo boards (delivered through innovative teaching methods)

Prova orale obbligatoria
The exam consists of an oral test to verify the knowledge of the powertrain electrical components and a discussion on a report of one of the exercise activities, taken during the semester.
The exam consists of questions in order to test the knowledge of the student about (DdD1, DdD2, DdD4):

• design parameters of the components (electrical machines, static converter and control schemes)
• problems related to the interface between electric mean and the grid
  The report has to show the definition of the parameters of the control system and the results of the simulation of the application (Matlab/Simulink) (DdD3, DdD5).

Lesson Notes and other Course materials available for download at: https://beep.metid.polimi.it/

The course deals with electric power systems for transportation with particular reference to ground transportation systems for people, goods and merchandises. Electric traction installation for rail and urban services are described in detail with reference to the DC supply and the AC one, this latter considering both industrial and rail frequency.
In the second part of the course the devices and the systems on board of the trains are presented and a written project on the urban electric transportation system design is performed during the exercise activity of the course.
Basic notions on modern electric road vehicles will be provided.
Electric systems for road electric vehicles (charging stations, charging modes, etc.) are also developed and discussed.

The course will allow the Students to know (DdD1):
The advantages of electric traction systems, mainly for terrestrial transportation systems;
DC supply infrastructures for urban and regional tramway, subway and railway systems;
AC supply infrastructures for heavy-duty and high-speed railway systems;
AC and DC motor drives for vehicle propulsion;
Multi-system electric vehicles for their interoperability across the borders;
Self-propelled railway vehicles (diesel-electric and fuel cell);
Architectures of powertrains of different hybrid and plug-in electric road vehicles;
AC and DC charging infrastructures for electric road vehicles.
The training lessons will allow the Students to design an urban or regional transportation system analyzing technical, economic, and environmental aspects (DdD2 and DdD3).
Technical visits to real high power systems will show to the Students the practical application of the theoretical subjects (DdD2).
Class seminars with industries of the transportation sector will allow the Student to know actual and future trends of the electric technologies in the transportation systems (DdD2) and interact with experts of this field (DdD4).

1.: Electric Traction: overview of electrified transportation systems and economical evaluation of electrified railroad lines.
2.: Direct Current Supply: DC power generation, rectifiers and power converters, electric substation, voltage and current harmonics and filters, line voltage drops, disturbances, the problem of stray currents and related corrosion.
3.: Alternate Current Supply: single phase AC supply at rail frequency, single phase AC supply at industrial frequency, the electric substations, problems related to the connection at AC three-phase power supply transmission network; electric and electromagnetics disturbances.
4.: DC Rolling Stock: Traction circuits, the line current absorption devices, motors and protection systems, the speed control, the auxiliary services.
5.: AC Rolling Stock: Traction circuits, motors and protection systems, the speed control, the auxiliary services.
6.: Self-propelled Rolling Stock: General description of the operation.
7.: High Speed Rail Lines: System operation and control.
8.: Electric Road Vehicles: Connection of the charging stations to the mains, AC and DC charging modes, base structure of an electric road vehicle.
Room exercise lessons are dedicated to the design of an urban or regional transportation system.
Class seminars with industries of the transportation sectors (railway and automotive) will show the actual and future trends of the technologies in this field.
Technical visits on real power systems complete the course.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), individuale, con revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
Final exam at the end of the course will be in written form.
Some questions on specific subjects will be asked to assess the knowledge of the theoretical aspects of the course (DdD1).
Moreover, a written test will assess the ability of the Student to link the theoretical subjects to the practical aspects (DdD2).
During this test, the Student will have to integrate the different aspects of the topics of the course to find the correct solution (DdD3).
A design project carried out during the training lessons will contribute to the final evaluation (DdD2 and DdD4).
Final exam will be written
It consists in 24 T/F questions + 4 written questions (1 point for every correct answer, 0 if wrong or not aswered)
+
Short project on the training part, not mandatory but can give up to 3 points on the final mark (mandatory for the final mark with honors)

Morris Brenna, Federica Foiadelli, Dario Zaninelli, Electrical Railway Transportation Systems, Editore: Wiley-IEEE Press, Anno edizione: 2018, ISBN: 978-1-119-38680-3

The goal of the course is to enable students to master the principles of electrical drives. In particular, the students will be able to design the electrical drive for a particular application defining both the necessary power hardware and the control scheme. Each topic is treated both theoretically and pratically. The theoretical part is achieved by means of lectures during which the model of the drive is built starting from the knowledge of electromagnetic principles and the control is derived by a deep analysis of the model. The practical part is achieved through different lab activities divided in two parts. In the first part, the modeling and simulation in Matlab/Simulink environment of the electrical drives analysed during the course will be performed. In the second part the control of the drives will be implemented on microcontrollers and tested, experimentally, on small test-benches.
Each student is called to built its own model and its own control, applying the knowledge aquired during the lectures.

Lectures and lab sessions will allow students to:
Analyse and understand the goals, assumptions and requirements to design an electrical drive (DdD1 and DdD2);
Design and tune electrical drives to fulfil specific requirements (DdD2 and DdD3);
Explain the results of his designing in a clear and convincing manner (DdD3, DdD4 and DdD5).

The course is organised in lessons, computer lab and practical lab activities. In the following, details about the topics of the lessons and of the labs are reported.
Program of the lectures:
Introduction: Electrical drives for industrial automation and transportation systems. Definitions and preliminary concepts.
Electrical drive components: electrical machines, power converters, sensors, control units.
Control of systems, control loops and modeling of the system. Control of the current in an ohmic-inductive load. Regulators: designing and tuning.
DC brushed machines: dynamic modeling; control of both armature and field currents; operative region; speed and position regulation.
Induction machines: dynamic modeling; operative regions; scalar control; field oriented controls; direct torque control.
DC brushless machines: operative principle; dynamic modeling; speed control; sensorless control.
AC brushless machines: dynamic modeling for isotropic and anisotropic motors; operative regions; speed control.
Photovoltaic systems: Algorithms for maximum power point tracking; power converters for PV systems and control; stand-alone and grid connected systems.
Computer lab program:
Current control in an ohmic-inductive load. Tuning of a regulator.
Control of the DC brushed machine
Rotor field oriented control of the induction machine
Direct torque control for the induction machine
DC brushless motor control
MPPT and control of a a PV system both operating as standalone or grid connected.
Practical lab program:
Basic of microcontrollers programming in Simulink environment
Communication with the microcontroller: configuration and use of DAC, PWM, Interrupt
Integration of the control with the power electronics
Implementation of torque control on DC brushed motors
Implementation of speed control on DC motors
Implementation of FOC controls on AC motors

Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The exam can be done in two ways:
oral colloquium;
design and discussion of a control drive, achieving specific performances, in Matlab/Simulink enviroment;
Each student can decide which way prefers to pass the exam.
During the colloquium the student have to demonstrate:
To understand the working principles of the electric drives (DdD1 and DdD2);
To be able to design a control of an electrical machine (DdD2 and DdD3);
To be able to tune regulators to make an electrical drive perform with a desired dynamic (DdD2, DdD3 and DdD5);
To choose the optimal control strategy on the basis of the requirements (dynamic response, efficiency, cost) (DdD3 and DdD5)
During the design and discussion of the control drive the student have to demonstrate:
To understand the specific requirements of an application and to translate it in characteristics of the drive to design (DdD1 and DdD2);
To be able to design a control of an electrical machine (DdD2 and DdD3);
To be able to tune regulators to make an electrical drive perform with a desired dynamic (DdD2, DdD3 and DdD5);
To choose the optimal control strategy on the basis of the requirements (dynamic response, efficiency, cost) (DdD3 and DdD5)

N. Mohan, T.M. Undeland, W.P. Robbins, Elettronica di Potenza: Convertitori e applicazioni,, Editore: Hoepli, Anno edizione: 2005
P.Vas, Electrical Machines and Drives, Editore: Oxford Press, Anno edizione: 1992

The application of industry 4.0 paradigma requires the deep interaction between phisical and digital world so as to create the so called cyber-physical system. A proper use of smart tecnologies permits to achieve good results in terms of costs, energy efficiency, reliability and enviromental impact reduction of a system or a process. At the base of an effective cyber-physical system there is a proper observation of the phisycal part. The rapid evolution of technology contrasts with the natural dynamics of workers and the well-being of societies. This has led to a shift in the development paradigm, with greater attention to worker well-being, resilience and sustainability. The new paradigma, Industry 5.0, places humans at the center, promoting collaboration between workers and advanced technologies.
In this framework, this course aims to provide students with the basic methodologies for the characterization, monitoring and diagnostics of electrical components and systems. Particular attention is paid to the problems and techniques for the development of automatic test and characterization systems for electrical devices. The effects of measurement accuracy in the developemt of data driven models is analysed. The concepts of the modern monitoring/diagnostic approach based on digital twin is also discussed.
The problems of a correct transduction of the physical quantities of interest is faced, so as the problems related to the acquisition and management of measurement data.
The monitorig and characterization of the main energy sources and energy storage systems, at the base of a modern and green electric system, will be analyzed.
The acquired knowledge allows you to understand the scientific literature in the electrical measurement sector by distinguishing innovative aspects from known design solutions, knowing how to contribute to the innovation of the Electrical Engineering sector.

After passing the exam, the student acquires the following skills (DD1, DD2):
she/he will know the terminology of measurement systems;
she/he will know the methodologies for the development of automatic test systems;
she/he will know the methods and main techniques for analyzing measurement data for data driven modelling;
she/he will know the basic tests for the characterization of main electrical energy sources and storages;
she/he will know the operating principles and characteristics of sensors for electrical, magnetic, mechanical and thermal quantities.
After passing the exam, the student (DD3, DD5):
is able to select the sensors necessary for the design of a test bench;
is able to design and implement an automatic measurement system for testing, monitoring and controll of industrial systems;
is able to perform basic tests on main electrical energy sources and storages;
is able to plan a measurement test campaign;
is able to organize and analyze test results with IT tools;
is able to evaluate the quality of the data collected from an automatic measurement system.
During the examination, the student must demonstrate that he has developed an autonomous ability to judge the adequacy of the approach adopted for characterization, monitoring and analysis of electrical systems.
The student will be able to communicate effectively the obtained results (DD4), highlighting the possible criticalities of the used analysis processes and evaluating the robustness of the data.

The course includes theoretical lessons, innovative teaching aproach with blended learning & flipped classroom and experimental laboratories. Laboratory classes are designed to deepen and apply the methodologies addressed during the theoretical lessons. In the last part of the course some case studies will be proposed to students, organized in groups, in order to push the students to find and analyze proper solutions and discuss them in the classroom.
The topics of the course are:

• Industry 4.0 and 5.0 paradigma.
• Automatic systems for measurement and data analysis. Methods and instrumentation for the development of automatic testing benches. The effects of measurement accuracy in data driven modeling approach. Examples developed in Matlab and Labview.
• Energy sources and storages characterization. Electrical characterization and monitoring of batteries, photovoltaic panels and electrical generators for conventional and renewable sources.
• Digital twin approach for smart monitoring.
• Sensors for electrical, magnetic, mechanical and thermal measurements. Smart sensors and sensors for IoT (Internet of Things). Energy harvesting for self-supplied sensors.

Prova orale obbligatoria
The assessment method involves a final oral exam, generally 3/4 questions, which covers all the topics faced during the course.
In particular, the student must, during the exam:
be able to offer solutions for automatic testing/monitoring systems for electrical energy sources and storages
analyze the quality of data collected by a measurement system
plan a measurement system campaign for the development of data driven modelling
demonstrate knowledge of digital twin approach
demonstrate knowledge of terminology
demonstrate knowledge of the characteristics of the measurement transducers covered during the course

Ramón Pallás-Areny, John G. Webster, Sensors and Signal Conditioning, Editore: JOHN WILEY & SONS, INC.
Ferrero A., Faifer M., Handbook of measurement in science and engineering, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 2016, ISBN: 978-111924475-2

The course provides tools for the operation of distribution grids with respect to automation strategies and protection systems. The course deals with the criteria for design and protection systems and automation strategies in order to efficiently locate and select the faults (short-circuits, ground faults, etc.) for LV, MV and HV networks. The course provides the skills for the use of tools for modeling and planning of LV, MV and HV networks.

Lectures and exercise sessions will allow students to (DdD1, DdD3 and DdD4):
understand the protection funtionalities adopted in LV, MV and HV networks
define the architecture of LV, MV and HV networks
analyze the protection automation strategies in LV, MV and HV network
The project laboratory will allow students to (DdD1, DdD2 and DdD4):
write a document in order to understand the protection strategies in MV network
learn all the concepts to use correctly a software for simulating a distribution grid
analyze software code written by others
work in group
summarize and present the results achieved during the final exam

The main argument of the course are in the following:
Neutral earthing in distribution networks: different methods for neutral earthing for MV networks (Unearthed Neutral System, Solid Neutral Earthed System, Resistance Neutral Earthing System), and for LV networks (isolated, grounded).
Protection systems and automation strategies for detecting MV faults: criteria for the selection of circuit breakers or disconnectors, protection functions and the relevant regulation, peripheral equipment.
Protection systems and automation strategies for detecting LV faults: criteria for the selection of circuit breakers, protection functions and the relevant regulation, peripheral equipment.
Automation strategies: procedures for detection and automatic selection of the faults on distribution network elements, both in case of single-phase and poly-phase faults.
Selectivity coordination with the users’ protections: protection systems necessary for the proper management of users’ plant; protections of the users’ plant interface and coordination with the Distribution Operator protection systems.
Tools for the operation and planning of the networks: use and application of dedicated software for modeling electrical networks, and accuracy of the simulation systems.
Power Quality analysis. Reactive power compensation (strategies and power electronic device as STATCOM, etc....).
A project laboratory is integral part of the course. The objective of projects is to help students in applying the approaches and principles tought in class. Projects will be defined through the semester. Project artifact are expected to be released at fixed deadline that will be defined during the course. The evaluation of projects will be based on the produced artifacts (documentation, code, …). The project laboratory will be discussed during the oral exam.

Prova scritta condizionata (a scelta del docente), con prove in itinere
Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The final exam, at the discretion of the teacher, can be carried out in written form (generally consisting of 10 multiple choise questions) plus an oral test (generally consisting of some free-answer questions) or in oral form (generally made up of 3 or 4 free-answer questions). Students must demonstrate full understanding of the subject and use of appropriate techniques (DdDD1, DdDD2, DdDD3 and DdDD4).
Furthermore, the evaluation can be integrated by a project. The project is evaluated during the first exam call.

The course deals with the interconnection to the main grid of renewable energy sources through electronic static converters; these are based on uncontrolled (diodes) and controllable (transistors) switches together with electromagnetic devices.
The main objectives are:
1) the structure, the operation, the performances of some electronic static converters;
2) the analysis of some problems due to the connection to the grid and of some solutions;
3) the design of the rated data of the electronic static converters and the development of the control system.
The course is based on:
a) theoretical lessons and numerical exercises;
b) experimental tests in the laboratory; the students will be divided into groups with at most three people per table;
c) one simulation in Matlab/Simulink of a system previously designed.

After passing the exam, the student:
will know the fundamental principles, the theory and concepts of Power Electronics applied to the network interface (DdD1);
will learn how to apply some concepts, learnt in other courses, to Power Electronics: in detail, reference is made to the thermal aspects, most important in the design of a converter, and to control theory, necessary to make a controlled converter operate (DdD2);
will be able to simulate a converter in Matlab/Simulink and to design its control system, implementing it (DdD2).
Datasheets of common static switches and converters will be provided during the course: the student will learn how to pick up the necessary and useful information (DdD2).
During the exam, the student should show the ability to find out the best way to solve a problem (DdD3, 5) and to describe some aspects of a converter in a sequential and understandable way (DdD4).

1) The components. Diodes and controllable switches (characteristic curves, losses, delays, …). Switching and switching losses.
2) Thermal behaviour of the electronic converters. Systems with one or two time constants, thermal transient impedance, cooling.
3) Line-commutated a.c-d.c. conversion. Three – phase diode rectifier, with an RL load; harmonic analysis.
4) D.c. – d.c. conversion. “buck”, “boost” converters: application to a PV plant. Bi-directional switching power-pole: application to the charge/discharge of a storage battery connected to a grid.
5) D.c. – a.c. conversion. Two–level, single–phase and three–phase VSI converters: schemes, modulation techniques; harmonic analysis; operation as an inverter and as a rectifier. Multilevel inverters: NPC and cascaded configurations.
Analysis of some problems about the grid connection of renewable sources through electronic converters:
6) Current harmonics injected into the grid and design of the filters: evaluation of the harmonics and limitation according to the Standards.
7) Ground current in PV power plants (single-phase, three-phase systems): problem and solutions.
8) Parallel connection of electronic converters: problems and solutions.
9) Synthetic inertia: support to the grid frequency variations by the electronic converters. Criterion for the control of the static converters.
10) Grid interconnection transformer: analysis of the thermal behaviour of a transformer supplied by a PV or wind power plant, when the delivered power varies over the day. Hot spot, loss of life, choice of the ratings.
11) Design of a converter, for a PV energy conversion application, from the electrical, thermal and control viewpoints. Time simulation of its operation.
12) Webinar on particular aspects of network interface, held by some engineers from ENEL Geen Power.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The exam consists in a written test (three hours for RES+NI). As for RES, the oral test is optional for those who wish to improve their mark. As for NI, the oral test is mandatory, unless the teacher decides differently: it will be a discussion of the handed-in reports developed during the semester and on lectures.
The student must:
*) express a reasoning in a linear way: the assumptions, the development and the conclusions (DdD4); a neat written task is required (DdD4);
*) explain the operation of a converter from an analytical view-point, through schemes, formulas and plots (DdD1);
*) solve the numerical exercises, analysing the results critically (DdD1, 2);
*) make correlations between different subjects (DdD2).
Before the exam, students will have to hand in the written reports of the numerical exercises developed during the lectures.
If a student is caught cheating during an exam session, they will not be allowed to take the next exam session.

Mohan-Undeland-Robbins, Power Electronics, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 2003
Notes on some converters on WeBeep

The course provides tools to manage planning and operation activities of distribution networks with high presence of Distributed Generation (DG).
The course covers the network procedure for the effective operation of the grid, both in healthy working condition and after a conticency. The goal is to provide a clear understanding of procedures devoted to foster an efficient use of networks, the optimal use of local resources and, at the same time, the security and quality of service for the distribution networks.
The course covers also the network procedures for the integration of DG in MV and LV networks.
Eventually, modelling of simulation of new advanced equipment, i.e. Battery Energy Storage Systems, will be investigated with the goal to drive the student to a proper understanding and design of such resources.
The contents are relevant to several Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs), particularly the topics investigated in the course, which contribute to enhancing understanding of "Sustainable Cities and Communities" (SDG 11) by elucidating the technical regulations of electric grids required to support energy ecosystems. Additionally, they address "Affordable and Clean Energy" (SDG7) by detailing how distributed generators could be effectively integrated into the national grid, and "Industry, Innovation, and Infrastructure" (SDG9) by explaining how the electric grid is tasked with supporting sustainable mobility.

The goal is to prepare students in order to demonstrate capabilities in understanding the criticalities in the distribution grid planning and operation, both from the steady-state and the dynamic point of view, to discuss in technical and scientific meetings about distribution grid related issues, to read and understand specialistic documents related to planning and operation, to roughly identify problems and solutions.
Similarly, another goal is in understanding the criticalities in the Battery Energy Storage Systme modelling and design.
The students will be able to identify necessary data and to elaborate them to obtain results using simple commercial software and to discuss critically results, providing directions to the solution and obtaining sensitivities on the parameters. Assessment of the proposed solutions is also a part of the knowledge provided by the course.
A final projects is assigned at the end of the course, it will make it possible for the student to experience the mechanisms of team working and will improve abilities related to communication and public presentation skills, thanks to the presentations that some of them will have to make to the rest of the class.
Acquired competencies on DdD 1: Knowledge and Understanding.
Passing of the exam the student:
Acquires knowledge of fundamental principles, generalizations, theories, and concepts related to electric distribution networks.
Understands the operation of the electric grid and the control actions necessary for its operation according to stability requirements.
Understands the main quantities necessary to characterize an energy storage system.
Acquired competencies on DdD 2: Ability to Apply Knowledge and Understanding
Passing of the exam the student:
Is capable of modeling and simulating the operation of an electric distribution network.
Is capable of modeling and simulating the operation of an electrochemical storage system.
Can utilize GIS software for analyzing the geographical context in which an electric distribution network operates.
Acquired competencies on DdD 4 (Communicative Skills)
Passing of the exam the student:
Is capable of developing a bibliographic analysis on the main technical topics related to the decarbonization of the electrical sector.
Can effectively communicate the results of their activities in a clear and convincing manner.
Is capable of working in an international team, fostering constructive dialogue to identify the key elements of the problem under analysis.

Planning, design and operation of distribution networks; connection process; criteria for voltage control and optimal management of the networks (optimal configuration, losses) according to the main technical standards.
Optimization and optimal control techniques and algorithms.
Components of distribution networks (operational centers; primary stations, secondary substations, active users and final customers): architecture, main functions, interface/communication.
Simulation systems for distribution grids (Simulink, DigSilent); systems for the optimal management of distribution networks (Distribution Management System); GIS tools for Electric Grids Planning and Operation (QGIS).
Standardization activities: Technical Committees and associations of interest both at national and international level.
Battery Energy Storage Systems: technologies, modelling, services provision.
Electrification processes in developing coutries.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, individuale, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The exam consists of a written test and a (mandatory) oral test.
As a preliminary condition for the test, students will be asked to prepare a report on topics dealt during the Laboratories. For each report a mark will be provided (the overall evaluation of the Laboratories' reports will impact on 10/30 of the final mark). Moreover, in the oral test, such reports will be discussed with the teacher.
A team project is also proposed to the students: working groups will be arranged, each one with a specific focus (deep analysis in one of the topics discussed in the classes). Each group will have to perform a literature review, to develop a project work and to prepare a report and an oral discussion.
Within the written test students will have to demonstrate to have a good overall knowledge of the topics discussed in the classes. The test is arranged as a set of short questions and numerical exercises (the overall evaluation of the written test will impact on 20/30 of the final mark)
Within the oral test students will have to demonstrate abilities in:

• understanding the planning criteria in a distribution grid;
• understanding the operational criteria in a distribution grid, particularly w.r.t. voltage regulation, electric protection scheme, DG Hosting Capacity evaluation;
• understanding Battery Energy Storage Systems modeling;
• understanding Battery Energy Storage Systems design;
• understanding microgrid architecture as a possible alternative to the main grid (cfr. rural area electrification problems).

Turan Gonen, Electric Power Distribution Engineering, Third Edition, Editore: CRC Press, Anno edizione: 2014, ISBN: 978-1482207002
William H. Kersting, Distribution System Modeling and Analysis, Third Edition, Editore: CRS Press, Anno edizione: 2012, ISBN: 978-1439856222

The Course is meant to provide the basic knowledge related to the conversion of primary energy sources into electricity. In particular, large thermal power stations as well as renewables will be considered during the Course. Dealing with renewables, starting from hydro power stations, we will move to wind generation and solar generation (photovoltaic), also considering storage systems like pumped storage plants.
According to the Dublin descriptors, the Course starts from theoretical basic knowledge to provide the ability to apply such knowledge and use it following a very practical approach and usually finds an obvious conclusion with a couple of technical visits at a thermal and a hydro power station; this will make it possible to become aware of the complexity in designing and operating power stations.
A second goal is to teach the students the notation and terminology used in the field, quite often multidisciplinary (coming from hydraulic, mechanical, energy, etc. engineering) and not related to electricity, necessary to understand muti-physic problems, like those faced in real generation plants, and to understand and make use of technical standards (Communication skills and learning skills).
The Course is divided into theoretical lectures, tutorials and projects. Projects, in particular, will be taught by engineers coming from industry, specialized in the considered fields. Four projects will be proposed to be developed by small groups and a report for each of them will have to be handed in.

Students, at the end of the course, will be able to:
1) to understand the general and different problems typical of power stations;
2) to discuss in technical and scientific meetings with appropriate terminology and scientific approach;
3) to identify approximate solutions for typical power stations issues;
4) to improve the ability to work in team with other students.
Students are expected to spend 5/7 hours a week on average to review class materials and to work on projects.

General information about power stations and statistics on national energy systems. Classification of power stations. Renewables and fossil fuels.
Non-programmable Renewables: wind energy generation, wind turbines, drive trains, converters and electric issues. Photovoltaic generation. PV plants.
Hydro engineering fundamentals, production of hydro plants, hydraulic works (dams, water intakes, forebays, penstocks, channels). Electromechanical and hydraulic machines and devices (turbines, generators, gates). Pumped storage plants.
Fundamentals of thermodynamics and machines. Thermal cycles and efficiency. Combustion reactions. Thermal exchange. Different cycles in a thermal plant.
Combined cycle power stations: gas turbines, compressors, Heat recovery steam generators.
Protection of generators, transformers and requirements for the connection to the grid: Grid codes and typical connection schemes.
Requirements for frequency and voltage control.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
Four projects (hydro power station, electric plant of a hydro power station, thermal sizing of a combined cycle, PV plant design) will be carried out during the term in groups. The projects will be proposed and presented by four engineers from the indutry who will guide students for the development of the project. This will enhance their Applying knowledge and understanding as well as their Making judgements according to the Dublin descriptors.
Projects will have to be carried out in small groups and they will be uploaded on WeBeep for checking from TAs, according to strict deadlines during the lecture period (February-June), for those students who will have to participate to exam calls in June/July. Soft deadlines will be given for students who will apply for the calls in Sept/Jan.
Such projects will be evaluated and a mark will be assigned. The average project mark will contribute, weighted 40%, to the total exam mark.
The remaining 60% will be given during an oral exam on any subject taught during the course.

Slides of the professor https://webeep.polimi.it/login/index.php
Gilbert M. Masters, Renewable and Efficient Electric Power Systems, Editore: Wiley
Neil Packer and Tarik Al Shemmeri, Conventional and alternative power generation, Editore: John Wiley
R.Caldon, F.Bignucolo, Impianti di produzione dell'energia elettrica, Editore: Società Editrice Esculapio, Anno edizione: 2018, ISBN: 978-88-9385-093-3

The course aims at providing students with a comprehensive understanding of the national legislative, policy, and regulatory frameworks governing the development and operation of modern power systems and liberalized electricity markets.
Particular attention is devoted to the evolution of the European energy policy framework, the objectives and instruments supporting the energy transition, and the role of regulation in ensuring the efficient, secure, sustainable, and affordable operation of electricity systems.
The course examines the economic and regulatory principles underpinning the regulation of natural monopolies in electricity transmission and distribution networks, the organization and functioning of ancillary services markets, and the policy mechanisms adopted to promote the deployment of renewable energy sources, energy storage systems, and demand-side resources.
Furthermore, the course addresses the regulatory challenges arising from the increasing penetration of distributed energy resources, electrification, digitalization, and new collective forms of energy production and consumption, such as renewable energy communities and collective self-consumption schemes.
By integrating technical, economic, and regulatory perspectives, the course enables students to understand how legislative and regulatory decisions influence power system planning and operation, market outcomes, investment incentives, and the achievement of energy and climate policy goals.

The students wiil gain knowledge about the policies that govern the energy system in general and the power system and the electricity market in particular, with a specific focus on the European policies for energy transition, on regulation of natural monopolies (electricity networks), on the promotion of the development of Renewable Energy Sources and of new collective schemes of energy production and consumption and on regulatory frameworks to enable the integration of distributed resources.
IN more detail, upon successful completion of the course, students will achieve the following learning outcomes.
Knowledge and understanding (Dublin Descriptor 1)
Students will:
gain advanced knowledge of the policy frameworks governing the energy sector, with particular reference to the electricity sector;
understand the European energy transition policies and their implications for power system development;
understand the economic and regulatory principles underlying the regulation of natural monopolies, with specific reference to electricity transmission and distribution networks;
acquire knowledge of the regulatory instruments supporting the deployment of Renewable Energy Sources (RES), energy communities, and other collective schemes of energy production and consumption;
understand the regulatory frameworks enabling the integration of distributed energy resources into power systems and electricity markets.
Applying knowledge and understanding (Dublin Descriptor 2)
Students will be able to:
interpret and analyze European and national regulatory measures affecting electricity markets and power system operation;
apply regulatory and policy concepts to practical cases concerning network regulation, renewable energy integration, distributed resources, and innovative market arrangements;
analyze the consistency between policy objectives and implemented regulatory instruments.
Making judgements (Dublin Descriptor 3)
Students will be able to:
critically evaluate the effectiveness of alternative regulatory approaches for achieving energy transition goals;
assess the impacts of regulatory decisions on system efficiency, sustainability, security of supply, and market performance;
formulate independent judgments on emerging policy and regulatory developments in the electricity sector.
Communication skills (Dublin Descriptor 4)
Students will be able to:
discuss regulatory and policy issues related to energy systems using appropriate technical, economic, and legal terminology;
present and justify analyses of regulatory frameworks and market designs in a clear and structured manner.
Learning skills (Dublin Descriptor 5)
Students will be able to:
autonomously consult and interpret policy, legislative, and regulatory documents;
independently deepen their knowledge of evolving energy and electricity market regulations;
critically follow future developments in European and national energy policies.

• European Energy Policy
• Microeconomics: demand and supply curve
• Technological definitions of natural monopoly
• Proprieties of the cost function & market equilibrium
• Price regulation by a fully informed regulator
• Cost of service / price cap / Totex regulation
• European directive and regulation on the internal electricity market
• European directive on the promotion of renewable sources
• The Italian National Energy and Climate Plan and its impact on the Italian power system
• Instruments for the promotion of renewable sources
• Collective self-consumption schemes and Energy Communities
• Electricy balancing guideline and European balancing platforms
• Capacity remuneration mechanisms
• Electricity tariff and billing
• Smart meters 2G
• BESS integration in markets

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente) o condizionata (a scelta del docente)
The exams will be based on written tests including both numerical exercises and theory questions. On the basis of the score of the written tests, oral tests might follow; all the examination is aimed at evaluating the achievement of the expected learning outcomes.
Questions addressing the institutional, legislative, and regulatory frameworks of the energy and electricity sectors assess Knowledge and Understanding (Descriptor 1).
Exercises and case studies requiring the interpretation and application of regulatory provisions and policy instruments assess Applying Knowledge and Understanding (Descriptor 2).
Open questions and discussions on policy and regulatory alternatives assess Making Judgements (Descriptor 3).
The ability to present arguments and analyses using appropriate terminology contributes to the assessment of Communication Skills (Descriptor 4).
The ability to connect different regulatory topics and to interpret regulatory documentation autonomously contributes to the assessment of Learning Skills (Descriptor 5).

This course aims to provide students with the theoretical background and practical tools needed to assess the reliability of devices, both electronic and non-electronic, as well as complex systems. In particular, modern and recent techniques for system reliability analysis are discussed, together with methodologies for reliability improvement.
Reliability techniques, which are necessary for implementing monitoring and prognostic strategies, are among the key enabling factors of the Industry 4.0 paradigm. For this reason, this course is considered strategic for the development of smart technologies.
The fundamentals of quality management systems are also addressed. In particular, the course covers analytical and methodological approaches to quality control, rules for the design of experiments, and sampling analysis for acceptance testing.
Innovative Teaching [IT] approaches, such as flipped classroom and blended learning, will be adopted for some course topics. These topics are marked with the acronym IT in the list below.
Note
The 10-credit course Reliability Engineering and Quality Control is offered jointly with the 5-credit course Reliability Design. The difference lies in the course contents: Reliability Design does not include the parts related to quality issues, namely topics 13 to 17.

Lectures and exercise sessions, followed by a final examination, will provide students with a general understanding of reliability topics and their fields of application in two scenarios: power systems and process plants (DdD1).
In particular, students will be able to (DdD2):

• Acquire knowledge of dependability techniques applicable to complex systems. • Apply this knowledge to identify and define the verification and validation activities needed to extract the main metrics of a complex system, such as Mean Time to Failure, Mean Time Between Failures, failure rate, and Remaining Useful Life. • Evaluate the impact of these metrics on system management in terms of maintenance strategies. • Acquire knowledge of quality management. • Apply this knowledge to identify and define the verification and validation activities needed to implement quality control methods in production and service processes. • Analyse case studies from a quantitative perspective and summarize the results in reports.
  The opportunity to develop specific projects during the course, focused on RAMS analysis and the application of brainstorming techniques, will allow students to experience teamwork dynamics and improve their communication and public presentation skills (DdD3 and DdD4).

Topic 1: Definitions of reliability: failure modes, mechanisms, and causes.
Topic 2: Operating conditions - Models of reliability prediction;
Topic 3: Non-parametric models for estimating the survival function;
Topic 4: Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA) and Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) [IT];
Topic 5: Environmental conditions: Testing and reliability assessment;
Topic 6: Markov models;
Topic 7: Maintainability;
Topic 8: Condition Based Maintenance;
Topic 9: Digital signal processing and AI techniques supporting signature analysis [IT];
Topic 10: Availability; availability models for power systems;
Topic 11: Handbooks and standards for reliability;
Topic 12: Reliability of Safety Systems: an introduction to HAZOP (IEC 61882) [IT];
Topic 13: Introduction to Quality;
Topic 14: Data processing;
Topic 15: Methods of Statistical Quality Control;
Topic 16: Sampling and operating characteristic curve;
Topic 17: Control charts.

Prova scritta condizionata (a scelta del docente), senza prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
Valutazione continua facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
During the course, two projects will be assigned to students as homework. Students will work on these activities both at home and during classroom hours.
Homework activities are intended to deepen the topics developed and discussed during classroom hours (DdD1, DdD2). At the same time, they are aimed at encouraging a proactive approach among engaged students who are committed to their learning. These activities enhance teamwork skills, help students develop the ability to make judgements, and improve communication skills (DdD3, DdD4).
One project will focus on the development of a reliability simulation program in Matlab, while the second will focus on the RAMS analysis of a complex system, including FMEA.
The end-of-course examination will be accessible only to students who have completed the FMEA project and presented it to the class. A PowerPoint presentation and a brief written summary are required for the project presented in class. The two projects will be graded in the range of 0–2 marks.
After the end of the course, students may take one of the available final examination sessions.
The final examination consists of a written test; an oral test is optional, except for the September examination session, which is oral only. The written test includes numerical exercises and open-ended questions on theoretical topics. The September examination session will be oral only and will include numerical exercises.
The numerical exercises are aimed at verifying whether students have understood how to apply the methods presented and discussed during the course (DdD1 and DdD2).
The theoretical part generally consists of two questions: one on reliability and one on quality control, covering all the topics addressed during the course. Students are expected to demonstrate full understanding of the subjects and to use appropriate technical language (DdD1 and DdD4).
The oral test generally consists of two or three questions covering all the topics addressed during the course. Students are expected to demonstrate full understanding of the subjects and to use appropriate technical language (DdD1 and DdD4).
Two mid-term tests will be proposed to students during the semester: one on reliability and one on quality control. These two mid-term tests are equivalent to the written test. The final score will be calculated as the sum of the scores obtained in the mid-term tests. If this sum is equal to or higher than 18, the homework evaluation will be added. The maximum score for each mid-term test is 15.
Without taking the oral test, students may obtain 30 cum laude only if the sum of the evaluations is equal to or higher than 32.
Students who obtain a positive evaluation in one of the mid-term tests will take, during the written examination, only the part not covered by the positive mid-term evaluation.
Positive results obtained in the mid-term tests are valid for the whole academic year.
Students may refuse a positive evaluation obtained in the mid-term tests by sending an email to the course coordinator within one week of the publication of the results.

Marvin Rausand, Arnljot Hoyland, System Reliability Theory: Models, Statistical Methods and Applications, Editore: Wiley - Interscience
M. Catelani, L. Cristaldi, M. Lazzaroni, L.Peretto, P. Rinaldi, RELIABILITY ENGINEERING: BASIC CONCEPTS AND APPLICATIONS IN ICT, Editore: Hoepli, ISBN: 9783642209826
Alessandro birolini, Reliability engineering, Editore: springer, ISBN: 9783642149511
Reliability evaluation of engineering systems: concepts and techniques / Roy Billinton and Ronald N. Allan Billinton, Roy; Allan, Ronald Norman, Reliability evaluation of engineering systems: concepts and techniques / Roy Billinton and Ronald N. Allan, Editore: Plenum; London, Anno edizione: 1992, ISBN: 03-06-44063-6
Douglas C. Montgomery, Applied Statistics and Probability for engineers, Editore: John Wiley & Sons
Douglas C. Montgomery,George C. Runger, Norma Faris Hubele; edizione italiana a cura di Alberto Barchielli, Maurizio Verri, Statistica per ingegneria, Editore: EGEA, Anno edizione: 2012, ISBN: 978-88-238-2149-1
Note: E' una traduzione ragionata delle diverse edizioni in lingua inglese del Montgomery
Paolo Citti, Gabriele Arcidiacono, Gianni Campatelli, Fondamenti di affidabilita, Editore: McGraw-Hill, Anno edizione: 2003, ISBN: 88-386-6098-0
Pasquale Erto, Probabilità e statistica per le scienze e l'ingegneria, Editore: McGraw-Hill, Anno edizione: 2008, ISBN: 978-88-386-6413-7

The course aims to illustrate the technologies available for the production of electrical and/or thermal energy from Renewable Energy Sources (RES) and to discuss the present and future role of RES in the worldwide scenario. The course deals with the production of electricity and/or heat/cold from RES by providing the theoretical basis, the principles of operation, the technological solutions, the environmental impact and the application contexts of these power plants. The course covers non-programmable technologies (photovoltaic, wind, hydro) as well as programmable ones (CSP, biomass, biowaste, storage hydro) and base load technologies (geothermal). The course provides the students with the skills to operate in the field of power plants from RES: from decision-making skills required in the design phase, including the evaluation of economical competitiveness, to the technical and operational skills required during the operation phase.

Upon fulfillment of the course, the students will be able to:

• understand the laws of physics which rule the behavior of the various technologies applied in the renewable energy field (DdD1)
• understand the theoretical potential of renewable energy sources for lowering the carbon footprint related to world energy needs (DdD1)
• become familiar with the state-of-the-art of main renewable technologies (DdD2)
• justify the typical performances of renewable energy plants (DdD2,3)
• fulfill preliminary design of renewable energy plants and select the design parameters of main components (DdD3,4)
• learn how to calculate yearly energy balances of renewable energy plants based on source availability (DdD3,4)
• become familiar with economic parameters related to renewable energy plants operation (DdD2)

Introduction and perspectives. The potential of renewable energy sources: present role, near term and long term future. Types of sources and issues related to their use for the production of electrical and thermal energy. Incentives for RES development. Current situation and forecast scenarios. Hybrid solutions, integration with fossil fuels and storage systems. Stand alone and grid connected solutions.
Wind energy. Betz theory and operational laws, types of machines, applications. Sizing criteria, regulation and characteristics. Coupling with the electrical generator and power electronic converters. Characterization of wind site and profitability analysis for a wind turbine field. Environmental impact of wind farms. Off-shore wind farms. Mini-wind turbines.
Geothermal energy. Types of geothermal sources: vapour-dominated or liquid-dominated, hot dry rocks. Drilling and exploration techniques. Plants for the production of electrical energy: direct steam, flash, binary plants. ORC plants. Cogeneration, with district heating/cooling and other low temperature heat users.
Energy from biomass and biowaste. Types of biomass and potential. Conversion systems with grate boilers: steam cycles and ORC. Gasifiers and internal combustion engines. Flue gas treatment plants. Anaerobic digestion systems for the production of biogas.
Solar energy. Solar radiation: potential, solar spectrum, angles. Prediction of available energy on horizontal and tilted surfaces.
Photovoltaic plant: photoelectric effect, silicon photovoltaic cells, electrical characteristic of the cell and manufacturing of solar cells and photovoltaic arrays, inverter and power conditioning systems. First, second and third generation. Design criteria of grid connected plant and stand-alone plant. Thin-film solar photovoltaic cells and multi-junction cells, recent technological developments.
CSP (Concentrated Solar Power) plants: classification of concentrating systems. Cylindrical-parabolic collectors, parabolic dish systems, Fresnel systems, central receiver systems. Working fluids, thermodynamic cycles and thermal storage tanks.
Solar thermal for hot water production.
Hydroelectric energy: types of hydroelectric power plants (Storage, Pumped-storage, Run-of-river). Types of plants and hydraulic machines (Pelton, Francis, Kaplan turbines and Archimedean screw generators). Small-hydro. Potential assessment of hydro resource. Sizing criteria and management. Environmental impact.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
Written test at the end of the course on the entire program.
The test includes open questions related to theoretical topics as well as simple problems inspired to numerical applications discussed during tutorials.
Before examination it is mandatory for students handing in written reports describing the adopted solution and the commented results of the numerical applications.
The examination assesses the student capability of:

• describe the principle of operation and the state-of-the-art of main renewable technologies (DdD1,2,4)
• justify the typical performance of various plants based on renewable energy sources on design as well as on off-design conditions (DdD2,3)
• comment the economic competitiveness of various solutions (DdD3,4)
• draw simplified plant schemes (DdD3,4)

The course deals with the interconnection to the main grid of renewable energy sources through electronic static converters; these are based on uncontrolled (diodes) and controllable (transistors) switches together with electromagnetic devices.
The main objectives are:
1) the structure, the operation, the performances of some electronic static converters;
2) the analysis of some problems due to the connection to the grid and of some solutions;
3) the design of the rated data of the electronic static converters and the development of the control system.
The course is based on:
a) theoretical lessons and numerical exercises;
b) experimental tests in the laboratory; the students will be divided into groups with at most three people per table;
c) one simulation in Matlab/Simulink of a system previously designed.

After passing the exam, the student:
will know the fundamental principles, the theory and concepts of Power Electronics applied to the network interface (DdD1);
will learn how to apply some concepts, learnt in other courses, to Power Electronics: in detail, reference is made to the thermal aspects, most important in the design of a converter, and to control theory, necessary to make a controlled converter operate (DdD2);
will be able to simulate a converter in Matlab/Simulink and to design its control system, implementing it (DdD2).
Datasheets of common static switches and converters will be provided during the course: the student will learn how to pick up the necessary and useful information (DdD2).
During the exam, the student should show the ability to find out the best way to solve a problem (DdD3, 5) and to describe some aspects of a converter in a sequential and understandable way (DdD4).

1) The components. Diodes and controllable switches (characteristic curves, losses, delays, …). Switching and switching losses.
2) Thermal behaviour of the electronic converters. Systems with one or two time constants, thermal transient impedance, cooling.
3) Line-commutated a.c-d.c. conversion. Three – phase diode rectifier, with an RL load; harmonic analysis.
4) D.c. – d.c. conversion. “buck”, “boost” converters: application to a PV plant. Bi-directional switching power-pole: application to the charge/discharge of a storage battery connected to a grid.
5) D.c. – a.c. conversion. Two–level, single–phase and three–phase VSI converters: schemes, modulation techniques; harmonic analysis; operation as an inverter and as a rectifier. Multilevel inverters: NPC and cascaded configurations.
Analysis of some problems about the grid connection of renewable sources through electronic converters:
6) Current harmonics injected into the grid and design of the filters: evaluation of the harmonics and limitation according to the Standards.
7) Ground current in PV power plants (single-phase, three-phase systems): problem and solutions.
8) Parallel connection of electronic converters: problems and solutions.
9) Synthetic inertia: support to the grid frequency variations by the electronic converters. Criterion for the control of the static converters.
10) Grid interconnection transformer: analysis of the thermal behaviour of a transformer supplied by a PV or wind power plant, when the delivered power varies over the day. Hot spot, loss of life, choice of the ratings.
11) Design of a converter, for a PV energy conversion application, from the electrical, thermal and control viewpoints. Time simulation of its operation.
12) Webinar on particular aspects of network interface, held by some engineers from ENEL Geen Power.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The exam consists in a written test (three hours for RES+NI). As for RES, the oral test is optional for those who wish to improve their mark. As for NI, the oral test is mandatory, unless the teacher decides differently: it will be a discussion of the handed-in reports developed during the semester and on lectures.
The student must:
*) express a reasoning in a linear way: the assumptions, the development and the conclusions (DdD4); a neat written task is required (DdD4);
*) explain the operation of a converter from an analytical view-point, through schemes, formulas and plots (DdD1);
*) solve the numerical exercises, analysing the results critically (DdD1, 2);
*) make correlations between different subjects (DdD2).
Before the exam, students will have to hand in the written reports of the numerical exercises developed during the lectures.
If a student is caught cheating during an exam session, they will not be allowed to take the next exam session.

Mohan-Undeland-Robbins, Power Electronics, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 2003
Notes on some converters on WeBeep

The course focuses on the study of the evolution of electricity systems needed to enable a significant supply from renewable energy sources (RESs). In this perspective, we focus on the impact of RESs on the electricity system (market and networks). Market rules should ensure that conventional power stations are suitably operated even in the presence of large contributions from renewable generation; the different role that will be covered from RES generators that have some degree of programmability, as mini-hydro, biomasses and biogas, will also be highlighted. The impact on networks will be covered: transmission system will be mainly impacted by the massive contribution of wind energy; as for distribution networks (DNs), both MV and LV, it will be highlighted as the current structure does not allow the full integration of RESs generation into the system. The evolution of DNs will be addressed in the context of smart grid perspective to which distribution systems are gradually moving. For this topic, some details about technical solutions, about the use of ICT as enabling key will be given. Finally, some case studies and real life implementations will be described, with the relevant costs and benefits.

Lectures and exercise sessions will allow students to:
Analyze and understand the problems deriving from the evolution of distribution grids towards a smart grid paradigm
Identify and define the constraints, the interactions, and the different control techniques related to the introduction of distributed generation into an LV distribution network
Identify and define the problems and the possible solutions related to the installation and usage of energy storage systems
By successfully passing the final test the student is able to:
Apply the acquired knowledge to real-life cases (possibly different from those analyzed during the lectures)
Select and size an energy storage system according to the specific functions requested by DSO or end-user
Define and write the specifications for the connection of renewable energy production plants with or without energy storage systems to LV and MV networks
Autonomously judge and make decisions
Communicate and explain in a clear way the selected solutions.

The national regulatory framework. Italian National Renewable Energy Action Plan. Statistical data on RESs in Italy. RESs generation in Italy: the Green Certificates. Photovoltaic solar generation in Italy: the feed-in premium scheme. Criteria and procedures for granting the support. Legislative/regulatory framework.
Impact of RESs on electricity markets. Impact of RESs on electricity markets. Impacts on Italian Power Exchange (IPEX) (low market liquidity, high price volatility, etc.). Impacts on Italian dispatching services market (MSD) (more adequacy and security problems). Regulatory resolutions and perspective.
Impact of RESs on transmission and distribution network planning and operation. Integration of RES (transmission networks); distributed generation (DG) in the power system (distribution networks): a hosting capacity approach. Limits to DG on Italian MV networks.
Network open access. Technical rules for connection for MV and LV networks (photovoltaic; small CHP); closed distribution systems.
Evolving networks toward smart grids. Active distribution networks: drivers of evolution and main purposes. New operation criteria for distribution networks: DG providing ancillary services; energy storage systems connected to transmission/distribution grids. Networks optimization with advanced metering infrastructure and smart meters. Electric vehicles and recharging infrastructure: characteristics, development, and impact on the network. ICT: shared vs dedicated communication infrastructures, performance requirements. The innovative functions of smart grids: automatic selection of faulty branches, microgrid and islanding operation (innovative Interface Protection with transfer trip, distribution network observability and central plant controller), advanced distribution management systems (DMSs), voltage control (and the contribution of DG to voltage control and network stability), emergency limitation/regulation of active power, monitoring of DG injections, enabling demand-response strategies (second generation smart meter and CHAIN 2 protocol). The new model of distribution network: overall system architecture.
Load forecasting techniques. Definition of the main problems related to load forecasting. Definition of ARIMA-based methodologies.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
The course includes both theoretical and exercise lectures. All the topics taught during these teaching activities are subject to the assessment, which is composed of a written and an oral test.
The written test is made up of 18 multiple-choice (true/false) questions and two open-ended questions.
The oral test, besides verifying and confirming the aforementioned abilities, is aimed also to verify the ability of the students in making judgments.
Grading will be on the following basis:
Type of assessment
Description
Dublin descriptor
Written test
Questions on the course topics that require to have read and carefully studied the slides and the suggested bibliography.
1, 2
Oral test
Questions on the course topics, requiring a personal elaboration of the subjects, and the formulation of critical judgments.
1, 2, 3, 5
The oral test is optional. The maximum grade that can be attained with the written test is 27.

Chen-Ching Liu (Editor-in-Chief), Stephen McArthur (Editor-in-Chief), Seung-Jae Lee (Editor-in-Chief), Smart Grid Handbook, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 2016, ISBN: 978-1-118-75548-8 https://www.wiley.com/en-us/Smart+Grid+Handbook%2C+3+Volume+Set-p-9781118755488
Nikos Hatziargyriou, Microgrids: architectures and control, Editore: Wiley-IEEE Press, Anno edizione: 2014, ISBN: 978-1-118-72068-4 https://www.wiley.com/en-us/Microgrids%3A+Architectures+and+Control-p-9781118720684
David Gao, Energy Storage for Sustainable Microgrid, Editore: Academic Press, Anno edizione: 2015, ISBN: 9780128033746 https://www.elsevier.com/books/energy-storage-for-sustainable-microgrid/gao/978-0-12-803374-6
Turan Gonen, Electric Power Distribution Engineering, Third Edition, Editore: CRC Press, Anno edizione: 2014, ISBN: 9781482207002 https://www.crcpress.com/Electric-Power-Distribution-Engineering-Third-Edition/Gonen/p/book/9781482207002

Graduation thesis and final exam - Master of Science in Electrical Engineering

Goal of this course
The Advanced Circuit Theory course is designed to complement the basic students' knowledge on electrical circuits obtained in the course of the Junior Electrical Engineering degree, with more "in depth" or complementary topics that are typical of a rigourous and scientifical approach to the study of circuits. In particular, the analysis of linear and non - linear circuits, purely resistive or dynamic is formalised using general methods such as modified nodal analysis and state equations. The basic framework of circuit simulators is presented, along with explanations related to possible simulation failures. Finally, network functions of linear dynamic circuits are introduced in order to present some simple examples of one-port synthesis and filter design. In all the topics covered, specific attention is given to the application of general methods.

Knowledge and understanding (Dublin Descriptor 1)
At the end of the course and after successfully passing the exam, the student:

• knows the fundamental principles of graph theory applied to electrical circuits
• has knowledge of the state space representation of nonlinear dynamic circuits, of the linearisation methods and of energy based stability properties of circuits
• knows how to apply the standard modified nodal analysis method for the solution of general circuits (nonlinear, dynamic etc.) including integration methods and nonlinear solvers.
• Understands the basic properties of linear passive one-ports and knows the standard methods for their realization
• Moreover, as a more general and methodological goal, a rigorous, math based approach to circuits.
  Applying knowledge and understanding (Dublin Descriptor 2)
  At the end of the course and after successfully passing the exam, the student:
• is able to write solving equations for general circuits and analyzing their solutions both using numerical methods and using closed form solutions
• is able to write, using standard programming languages, the basic structure of a circuit simulator
• knows how to synthesize a passive linear one port using Cauer or Foster methods

1 Fundamental laws of electrical networks
Topological properties. I mplicit and explicit Kirchhoff's laws. Graph matrices and their relations. Power and energy. I mplicit and explicit Constitutive formulations of one-port and two-port components. Unidirectional ity, ' reciprocity', symmetry and other properties of linear two-ports. Special two-ports: transformer, gyrator and operational amplifiers. Connection of two-ports.
2 Analysis of linear and nonlinear resistive networks
General methods of analysis. Nodal analysis (NA ) and Modified Nodal Analysis (MNA ). Numerical methods for solving linear algebraic systems. Sparsity. Characterization of nonlinear elements and their linearization. Examples: diode, BJT and MOS transistors, OP-AMP. Small-signal analysis. Graphical and numerical methods for solving systems of nonlinear algebraic circuit and their interpretation. Properties of circuits composed of strictly passive non-linear and strictly monotonous non-linear bipoles.
3 D ynamic circuit a nalysis
Formulation of state equations in the time domain. Solution of the state equation of linear dynamic circuits in the time domain: free and forced components of the solution. Natural frequencies and stability. Second-order linear circuits. Qualitative study of simple dynamic nonlinear circuits: oscillators and bistable. MNA formulation for general circuits. Simple numerical methods for the solution of the MNA problem.
4 Network Functions
Analysis of linear dynamic circuit s in sinusoidal steady state. Network functions in the phasor domain. Frequency response. Analysis of linear dynamic circuits using the Laplace transform. State equations and their solution in the Laplace domain. Immittances and general network functions H(s), poles and zeros.
5 Synthesis of one- ports and passive filter design
Properties of immittance functions Z(s ) and Y( s) of RLC passive one-ports. Properties and synthesis of one-ports with only two elements (LC, RC, RL ) according to the canonical forms of Foster and Cauer. Design of a low pass filter. Sensitivity analysis with respect to a parameter of the circuit and method for that network.

Prova scritta condizionata (a scelta del docente), con prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
Valutazione continua facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
The exam is composed of two parts, a first "practical" written test, followed by a second written test related to the theory. The goal of the practical part is assessing the student's capability of application of the main topics of the course with a direct approach to simple problems (Dublin descriptors 1 and 2), the theory part to test the knowledge and understanding of the main methods used in the course aiming at the self-sufficiency in the solution of problems not considered in this course (Dublin descriptor 1).
The date of the practical part is published online on the POLIMI webpage, students can access the theory part either immediately after the practical part (and will be corrected only if the practical part is sufficient), or (in this case only if the practical part is sufficient) in any other following exam session (in this case the student will be temporarily marked as non-passed and will have to enroll to the chosen session).
The practical part lasts 2h15' and consists in the solution of three problems covering the main areas of the course, the students must work autonomously but can have access to a single self produced A4 sheet containing formulas or anything else the student believes can be useful to pass this part of the exam. Clarity in the description of the methods used and in the results obtained and terseness of language will be evaluated positively. The practical part is marked from 0/30 to 30/30; access to the theory part is reserved to students with a mark greater or equal to 16/30. The theory part lasts 30' and consists in two questions that must be answered in written form each question taking no more than one A4 page and where terseness of language and a quantitative approach where possible are encouraged. The theory part, if not sufficient, invalidates the whole exam, if sufficient it can increment or decrement the practical part mark usually in the range -4/+3.
The practical part can be substituted by a project whose contents are discussed and agreed by both parts and must be submitted at most 7 days before the date for the theory part.
When possible a non mandatory midterm, possibly online, will be issued and will give the students a chance to increment the final mark by at most 2 points.
Readability and compliance to the instructions, including requests to fill online forms, is part of the evaluation of all parts.
Communication of results will be via mail using the official POLIMI student mail address.

Leon O. Chua, Charles A. Desoer, Ernest S. Kuh, Linear and Nonlinear Circuits - International Edition, Editore: McGraw (but now in non defined international reprint), Anno edizione: 1987, ISBN: 9780070108981
Advanced Circuit Theory - Lecture Notes https://webeep.polimi.it
Note: Lecture Notes available on the POLIMI webeep platform.

The course aims at providing students knowledge and tools to understand some fundamental concepts regarding agri-food systems, including food supply chains as well as society, environment, and other public and private stakeholders. Agri-food supply chains are introduced and analyzed under a strategic design lens, with focus on supply chain strategies, configurations and main processes.
The course also identify key trends for modern agri-food supply chain referring to sustainability and quality.
Moreover, students will be introduced to examples of real supply chains in different food industrial segments, in which relevant and specific sustainability challenges and transformation will be analyzed from a theoretical as well as from a practical perspective, through seminars by companies' speakers.
Teaching is delivered by a mix of:
Lectures and introduction of theoretical frameworks
Discussion of case studies
Seminars from companies and academic experts in specific domains
Recorded video-lectures to provide bases for in-class discussion

At the end of the course the students will be able to:
Understand the concept of supply chain and supply chain management
Describe the main typologies of food supply chains in terms of industry overview, main actors, key processes, main sustainability challenges and related innovations
Understand, describe and analyze the type of supply chain strategies and the main models for global supply chain configurations (for non-food and food products)
Understand and describe the main trends and challenges connected to sustainable development and the grand challenges connected to the food industry
Understand principles of the circular economy paradigm for the food system, main business models and main enablers of food waste prevention and management
Understand the key principles and challenges connected to food traceability and their implications for the agri-food supply chains
Apply knowledge and analyse paradoxical issues regarding sustainability in food, devoleping and defending arguments while also communicating the main results.

Introduction to the concept of supply chain, supply chain management
Supply chain management processes
Push/pull view of supply chain processes
The SCOR model
The impact of complexity and uncertainty
Strategic network design
Supply chain strategies and strategic fit: Fisher (1997) and Hau Lee (2002) models (discussion of case studies)
Global supply chain: drivers and different global supply chain configurations
Risk and resilience in food supply chains
Sustainability in the agri-food supply chain
Definition of sustainability: grand sustainability challenges for the agri-food industry
The role of the supply chain: threats and opportunities
How to accelerate sustainability transitions in the agri-food supply chain:
Collaborations for sustainable value creation
Short food supply chains (discussion of a case study)
Traceability in the agri-food supply chain
Circular economy principles and business models
The food waste hierarchy framework
Technologies and solutions for food waste reduction and valorization
Supply chain configurations, managerial and sustainability challenges and related innovation for various industrial segments and products.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale

• Mandatory written exam (weighting 70% of the final grade), consisting of multiple-choice and open-ended questions.
• Mandatory debate session (weighting 30% of the final grade). Students work in groups to prepare for and participate in a debate on an assigned topic.
  As part of the debate, each group is required to prepare:
• a PowerPoint presentation;
• a short written summary paper.
  During the debate session, students present and defend their arguments while taking part in the different phases of the debate process.

Samir Dani, Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics - From Farm to Fork, Editore: Kogan Page, Anno edizione: 2015
Sunil Chopra, Supply Chain Management - Strategy, Planning and Operations, Editore: Pearson, Anno edizione: 2019
Note: (Only chapters from 1 to 6 and chapter 17)

The course aims at providing students with the critical and conceptual tools to reflect upon
some of the main ethical and social issues raised by the development of Artificial Intelligence
(AI). The course will be articulated in three modules, deeply interconnected to provide students
with a coherent narrative. The course will start with the analysis of the problems related to the
definition of "AI", starting from the first characterizations of AI dating back to the 1950s and
comparing them with the way AI is typically discussed nowadays. In the second module, the
topic of AI-related risk will be expanded so as to include aspects of uncertainty. In the last
module, the ethical framework of Trustworthy AI will be presented as a way to deal with AIrelated uncertainty. After a general presentation of the Trustworthy AI framework, specific
issues in AI ethics will be discussed, also depending on the students' interests.

Artificial intelligence (AI) is a combination of methods, techniques, and tools, that are revolutionizing today's life. At the core of AI is machine learning, i.e. the elaboration of data that allows systems to learn, recognize properties in data, improve performance, without being explicitly programmed. On the other hand, robotics is a well-established technology that is making a significant shift towards broader application thanks to the use of AI.
The purpose of this course is to familiarize the students with the most common tools of machine learning and expose them to both basic elements of robotics and new trends (like collaborative and humanoid robotics), with special emphasis on the application of AI to robotics.

The expected learning outcomes of the course can be classified according to the Dublin descriptors.
Dd1 (Knowledge and understanding)
Students will understand
-the whole machine learning workflow, including data visualization techniques, features engineering, model training and validation, and interpretability assessment;
-the main machine learning paradigms and their role and applicability in engineering use cases;
-the role of industrial robots in the factory, why and where they should be used in the production systems;
-the new trends in industrial robotics, like collaborative robotics.
Dd2 (Applying knowledge and understanding)
Students will learn how to:
-design and implement a machine learning pipeline tailored to the structure of the available data;
-train and compare different models based on their predictive and interpretability performance;
-use mathematics to describe the motion of a robot, in terms of its kinematics;
-plan a suitable motion for the robot both in the joint and in the operational space.
Dd3 (Making judgement)
Students will be able to decide which machine learning technique to adopt in selected problems (within or outside the robotics domain) and how to apply them.

1. Introduction to Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning
Learning from data.
AI and Machine Learning applications in engineering
2. Machine learning for atomic data
Data quality and quantity.
Univariate and multivariate visualization techniques.
Data normalization and pre-processing.
Features extraction and selection, learning paradigms, performance assessment, interpretability for atomic data.
3. Machine learning for time series
Time series: filtering, detrend, feature extraction and selection.
Learning paradigms, performance assessment, interpretability for time series data.
4. Introduction to robotics
Industrial robots: basic concepts and examples.
Market and trends of industrial robotics.
5. Robot kinematics
Position and orientation of a rigid body.
Direct and inverse kinematics.
Differential kinematics: Jacobian and singularities.
6. Robot planning and control
Robot programming.
Trajectory generation in joint space and in operational space.
Closed loop control (elements).
7. Collaborative and humanoid robotics
Collaborative robotics: motivation and use cases.
Safety standards.
Humanoid robots: a general introduction.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
Students will be evaluated through a written exam with open-ended questions and an optional project work that will be assigned during the semester.
In the written exam the student should be able to:
-describe a complete machine learning workflow and, for each estate, commenting upon strengths and limitations of different techniques (Dd1, Dd2);
-select appropriate machine learning techniques for a given problem, justify methodological choices, interpret model outputs, and critically discuss the presented results (Dd1, Dd2);
-discuss the kinematic model of a robot, including detection of singularities (Dd1, Dd2);
-discuss and evaluate trajectories in joint space or in the operational space (Dd1, Dd2).
In the project work, students will address a simple problem of learning from data, within or outside the robotics domain (Dd1, Dd2, Dd3).

Slides available in the WeBeep channel
Bruno Siciliano, Luigi Villani, Giuseppe Oriolo, Alessandro De Luca, Foundations of Robotics, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2025, ISBN: 978-3-031-85522-1 https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-85523-8

The general goal of the course is to enable students to learn the general method and the basic steps of the design of automatic control systems:

• Definition and discussion of a specific control problem
• Selection and location of sensors and actuators
• Development of a simplified (control-oriented) model of the system, aimed at the development and analysis of control algorithms,
• Identification of the model parameters from measurements on the system, and study of the dynamic characteristics of the model
• Design and analysis of control algorithms
• Implementation of the control algorithm
  This approach will be learnt using a “case study” approach on a set of specific application cases. The application cases illustrated in the course are a set of important control problems in the field of vehicles-dynamics and energy-management.

Dublin Descriptor
Expected Learning Result (Specific to the Course)
Knowledge and understanding
Understand the fundamental problems, methods, and technologies for vehicle-dynamics control, with a specific focus on estimation issues and control strategies.
Applying knowledge and understanding
Design and apply control and estimation algorithms to solve specific sub-problems in vehicles dynamics control, such as vertical dynamics control, longitudinal, and laterla dynamics, control, and energy optimization.
Making judgements
Critically analyze and evaluate trade-offs between different design solutions, control algorithms, and sensing technologies for passenger cars.
Communication skills
Communicate a complex control-design solution for a specific autonomous vehicle application in a synthetic and technically precise way.
Learning skills
Autonomously read, interpret, and understand specialized industrial technical documentation and research papers in the field of vehicle control and estimation.

The course consists of several case studies of real, significant problems related to automation in transport systems and vehicles:

• Control of the vertical, roll and pitch dynamics through “intelligent” electronic suspensions systems (load-levelling, active semi-active suspensions, etc.), with emphasis on electric cars
• Control of the longitudinal dynamics during braking and acceleration (ABS, traction control, Adaptive Cruise Control, Control of longitudinal dynamics), with emphasis on electric and hybrid cars (electric motors are used as actuators in braking and traction control)
• Control of the yaw dynamics (Stability Control Systems; Control of lateral dynamics) with emphasis on electric and hybrid cars (electric motors are used as actuators in braking and traction control
• Hybrid-powertrain architectures, and fundamentals of combined control of longitudinal dynamics and energy-management in "green" hybrid and electric vehicles
• Analysis and discussion of future trends of mobility, towards safer and low-emissions green mobility

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i condizionato (a scelta del docente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The exam will be a written test in one of the official available dates or a project (group or single). The exam consists of questions on the topics presented during the course. The project requires the development of techniques starting from the one seen in class.
Grading will be on the following basis: either 100% final project (group presentations with discussion with instructor) or 100% written test on the course topics.
The instructor reserves the right to hold an oral examination in cases where the written test does is not definitive in assessing the student's knowledge.
Type of assessment
Description
Dublin descriptor
Final project
Students are required to:
show their understanding of the main problems (and the corresponding solutions) in the field of control-systems design in vehicles;
use the knowledge acquired in the course to solve problems that they have not be exposed to in class.
select and describe the most appropriate tools for a given application;
be able to communicate in a oral presentation the solution to a specific application problem (modelling or analysis or control problem).
implement the solution they propose.
1,2, 3, 4, 5
Written test
show their understanding of the main problems (and the corresponding solutions) in the field of control-systems design in vehicles;
use the knowledge acquired in the course to solve problems that they have not be exposed to in class.
select and describe the most appropriate tools for a given application;
be able to communicate in a mixed text, graphical and mathematical way the solution to a specific application problem (modelling or analysis or control problem).
1, 2, 3, 4, 5

Sergio M. Savaresi, Lecture notes
Savaresi S.M., C. Poussot-Vassal, C. Spelta, O. Sename, L. Dugard, SEMI-ACTIVE SUSPENSION CONTROL FOR VEHICLES, Editore: Elsevier (Butterworth-Heinemann), UK
Savaresi S.M., M. Tanelli, ACTIVE BRAKING CONTROL SYSTEM DESIGN FOR VEHICLES. 1st Edition, Editore: Springer-Verlag
Boniolo Ivo, S.M. Savaresi, Estimate of the lean angle of motorcycles, Editore: VDM Verlag, Germany

Systems for the production, distribution and use of energy are becoming more and more complex and articulated. As a result, their level of automation is increasing. This involves virtually any component of such systems, from production plants to transmission, distribution and district networks, down to single units. Also, modern energy systems need to integrate with one another to improve efficiency. And finally, aspects such as comfort, economy and environmental impact, are steadily gaining importance.
The above said, the aim of the course is to address the scenario above by providing the student a system-level view - which is typical of the automation engineer - on the matter, the control problems encountered, the solutions adopted to date, and their possible future developments. The course does not delve into details on the various types of generators, utilisers and so forth, as the said details that can be learnt in specialised courses; for example, power generation processes are addressed in Advanced Process Control.

Knowledge and understanding
The student will understand the basic principles behind the operation, control and management of energy systems, with particular reference – as paradigmatic examples – to electric and thermal networks.
He/she will also master the main control structures, including optimisation-oriented ones where applicable, devoted to the automation of such systems.
Furthermore, the student will acquire knowledge about control-oriented modelling principles, with emphasis on system-level representations based on first-principle approaches.
Applying knowledge and understanding
The student will be able to apply the above principles and methods to

• develop simplified yet physically meaningful models of energy systems for control purposes;
• synthesise and assess control structures suited to such models, using the proper analysis and simulation tools;
• carry out and document small-scale projects involving control-oriented modelling and control design for electric and heat networks.
  Making judgements
  By the end of the course, the student will be capable to
• evaluate the suitability of different control architectures and strategies for specific energy-system scenarios;
• critically assess modelling assumptions and their implications for control performance;
• interpret and discuss the results of simulation studies and laboratory activities, identifying limitations and possible improvements.
  Communication
  The student will learn to present control-oriented studies and designs effectively, through concise technical reports compliant with academic and professional standards.
  He/she will also develop the ability to discuss about automation in energy systems with clarity, using the proper technical terminology.

Introduction. This part quickly provides a high-level view of the matter. It also introduces the basic concepts related to energy systems, generalities, and the corresponding terminology.
Control structures for energy systems. The main control structures used in energy systems are discussed. These include feedforward compensation, cascade control, decoupling, Smith predictor, Internal Model Control, override, and ratio control. The typical uses of such structures in energy systems is discussed. Care is taken to orient their choice and composition based on the characteristics of the encountered dynamic systems rather than (only) on the physical nature of the controlled variables. Most relevant, the logic associated with the addressed structures (interlocks, auto/manual management and the like) is explained.
Actuation schemes for energy systems. The main such schemes (daisy chain, split range, time division output) are treated, with the same approach just outlined for control structures.
Control-oriented modelling principles. The mathematical and modelling principles used in the course are introduced. As the focus is on system-level automation, this part aims at synthetically capturing the relevant dynamics with minimal complexity. To allow for physically interpretable parameters, first-principle modelling is privileged.
Electric systems. After presenting the above general ideas, these are monographically applied to the electric case, by discussing the management of an AC grid. The treatise includes primary and secondary power/frequency control, optimum generation allocation, and the basics of load flow. Care is taken to present the subjects above within an integrated view, and to evidence connections with neighbouring technologies. This means on the one hand relating the presented matter to detailed generator-level control, and on the other hand outlining the variety of forms taken by network-level optimisation when this involves multiple actors, conflicting objectives, bidding, and so forth.
Thermal systems. A second monographic part, with objectives similar to the one above and therefore structured in an analogous manner, is devoted to thermal systems, with specific reference to heat networks.
The concepts and methods learnt are put to work during practice hours with simple exercises, also in a view to preparing for the written test. Case studies of (slightly) higher complexity are addressed using open source control synthesis, analysis and simulation tools, made available to the students and introduced in the laboratory activity.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The assessment consists of two parts.
Project work (approximately 40% of the final mark)
The students will carry out a project using the methods and tools introduced in the course. They will deliver a brief written report, following a provided template, addressing control-oriented modelling and control synthesis for simple electric or heat networks, including simulation-based validation of the designed controllers.
The report will be evaluated for technical correctness, methodological soundness, and clarity of presentation — thus contributing to the assessment of Applying knowledge and understanding, Making judgements, and Communication.
Written test (approximately 60% of the final mark):
The written test covers the entire course content through both numerical exercises and open questions. It primarily assesses Knowledge and understanding and Applying knowledge and understanding.
To pass the exam the combined score must be at least 18/30, but a condition is that the written test alone scores at least 16/30.

Il corso offre una panoramica sul ruolo dell'automazione nel mondo dei trasporti, mostrando come le moderne tecnologie rendano possibile la gestione sicura ed efficiente dei sistemi di mobilità. Attraverso lezioni teoriche, discussioni in aula, incontri con aziende del settore e visite tecniche, gli studenti hanno l'opportunità di entrare in contatto con applicazioni reali e con le sfide dell'ingegneria nell'ambito dei trasporti.
Durante il percorso vengono analizzati i principali sistemi di trasporto: ferroviario, metropolitano, navale, aereo e stradale, evidenziandone le caratteristiche progettuali, costruttive e operative. Il corso fornisce le basi per comprendere il funzionamento dei sistemi di trasporto automatici, approfondendo gli aspetti legati alla gestione, alla sicurezza di esercizio e al rispetto della normativa di settore.
Ogni argomento è accompagnato da esempi applicativi e casi reali, con l'obiettivo di collegare la teoria alla pratica e di sviluppare una visione concreta delle soluzioni tecnologiche oggi impiegate nell'automazione dei trasporti.

Al termine del corso, gli studenti acquisiscono una visione d'insieme dell'automazione applicata al settore dei trasporti, comprendendone sia gli aspetti teorici sia quelli pratici. Le conoscenze acquisite consentono di comprendere le principali tecnologie impiegate nei diversi sistemi di trasporto, di confrontarsi con professionisti del settore durante gli incontri con le aziende e di interpretare documentazione tecnica specialistica. Inoltre, gli studenti sviluppano la capacità di identificare problemi e individuare possibili soluzioni nell'ambito dell'automazione dei trasporti (DdD1 e DdD2).
Dal punto di vista applicativo, il corso prevede lo sviluppo di progetti che permettono di affrontare problemi reali del settore. Attraverso queste attività, gli studenti imparano ad analizzare criticamente una problematica, a valutarne le possibili soluzioni utilizzando metodi consolidati e a scegliere quella più adatta al contesto specifico, definendone anche i criteri di implementazione.
Il lavoro progettuale rappresenta inoltre un'importante occasione per sviluppare competenze trasversali, come il lavoro di squadra, la comunicazione tecnica e la capacità di presentare in modo chiaro ed efficace i risultati ottenuti. Tali competenze vengono consolidate attraverso la presentazione finale del progetto davanti alla classe, durante la quale vengono valutate anche le capacità espositive e la padronanza degli argomenti trattati (DdD4).

Il corso affronta i principali ambiti dell'automazione applicata ai sistemi di trasporto, partendo dai concetti fondamentali fino ad arrivare alle applicazioni nei diversi mezzi di trasporto.
Argomento 1 – Passato, presente e futuro dei trasporti: a che punto siamo? Un'analisi dell'evoluzione dei sistemi di trasporto, dalle prime forme di automazione alle tecnologie più avanzate, per comprendere come sta cambiando il settore e quali sono le prospettive future.
Argomento 2 – Veicoli autonomi: realtà o futuro? Un approfondimento sullo stato dell'arte della guida autonoma, sulle tecnologie che la rendono possibile, sulle sfide ancora aperte e sulle applicazioni già presenti nel mondo reale.
Argomento 3 – Reti di comunicazione nei sistemi di trasporto elettrico: tecnologie di comunicazione che consentono lo scambio di informazioni tra dispositivi e sistemi di controllo.
Argomento 4 – Sistemi SCADA: architettura e funzionamento dei sistemi di supervisione, controllo e acquisizione dati utilizzati per il monitoraggio e la gestione degli impianti.
Argomento 5 – Sistemi automatici di trasporto a guida vincolata: analisi dei sistemi tradizionali e delle soluzioni innovative per il trasporto automatizzato, come metropolitane automatiche e people mover.
Argomento 6 – Sistemi di segnalamento ferroviario: principi e tecnologie impiegati per garantire la sicurezza e la regolazione della circolazione ferroviaria.
Argomento 7 – Veicolo elettrico: architettura, componenti principali e sistemi di controllo dei veicoli elettrici.
Argomento 8 – Automazione a bordo delle navi: sistemi di controllo e automazione impiegati nella gestione degli impianti navali.
Argomento 9 – Automazione a bordo degli aeromobili: principali sistemi automatici che supportano il pilotaggio, il controllo e la gestione delle funzioni di bordo.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
La valutazione del corso si basa:
Presentazione del progetto sviluppato durante il corso.
Approfondimenti relativi agli argomenti trattati durante le lezioni assegnati durante il corso e valutati singolarmente durante il corso.
Durante l'orale, per il progetto sviluppato in gruppo verranno valutati:
la capacità di esporre il progetto in modo chiaro;
la padronanza degli argomenti e la capacità di rispondere alle domande della commissione (DdD1 e DdD2);
la qualità e i contenuti della relazione di progetto (DdD4).

F. Foiadelli, M. Longo, Automazione dei Sistemi Elettrici di Trasporto: Il nuovo presente dei veicoli nel trasporto pubblico e privato, Editore: Edizioni Accademiche Italiane, Anno edizione: 2017, ISBN: 978-3639779011

The course aims to give an application-oriented introduction to the Bayesian statistical learning. Part of the course is devoted to a practical introduction to Monte Carlo techniques, that are fundamental tools in applied Bayesian statistics and in many other fields.
In Bayesian learning prior hypotheses/beliefs on probabilistic models are updated in the light of data, yielding to posterior beliefs. Bayes' Theorem describes this learning process in a coherent probabilistic language. In this framework, the course offers an operative view of Bayesian statistics, through examples and problems solved with the aid of R software. To this aim, a short introduction to R software and to JAGS is provided.

On successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
DUBLIN DESCRIPTORS EXPECTED LEARNING OUTCOMES
DD 1, knowledge and understanding
learn the appropriate terminology, understand the fundamental principles, tools and models of Bayesian Statistics
DD 2, applying knoledge and understanding
apply methods of statistical analysis to specific problems in engineering; extract significant indicators from data; use statistical software
DD 3, making judgements
analyze and understand the goals, the assumptions and requirements associated with a problem and a model, when using Bayesian tools for dealing with statistical problems from the real world
DD 4, communication
write a document, discuss with colleagues during the project.
DD 5, lifelong learning skills
the laboratory project will allow students to communicate clearly and convincingly the design choices made and work effectively as part of a team

Principles of Bayesian learning. Quantifying uncertainty using probabilities. Likelihood, prior and posterior distributions: Bayes ’ Theorem for learning from data. Bayesian estimation and hypothesis testing. Posterior mean and variance, maximum a posteriori (MAP) estimate, posterior intervals, prediction, Bayes factor.
Basic models. Bayesian learning for proportions (Bernoulli model- Beta prior). Inference for mean and variance in normal model (Normal Gamma prior). Inference for count data (Poisson model Gamma prior). Generalizations: conjugate priors.
Statistical Computing. Introduction to R software for Bayesian analysis.
Monte Carlo Methods. Why sampling methods are needed: intractable integrals and sums. Monte Carlo integration. Importance sampling. Monte Carlo Markov Chain. Practical examples and implementation in R and JAGS.
More complex models. A selection among these subjects: mixture of normal distributions and clustering (Expectation Maximization, Gibbs sampling), Bayesian linear regression models, classification (naive Bayes). Basics of Bayesian reliability models. Practical examples using JAGS.
Applications to real data. Electrical load forecasting and electricity demand, Bayesian optimization for efficient uncertainty quantification in complex electrical/electronic systems. Example dealing with climate chainging (SDG12).

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The exam consists in the presentation of a statistical project. As a general rule, the projects will be developed in teams (2/3 persons) and discussed with the teacher during the course. Projects are focused on the statistical analysis of a dataset, using Bayesian tools and models. Data to analyze will be arranged together by the team and the instructor.
Each students’ team must hand over a project report (10-15 pages); the project illustration should be presented using slides on a laptop (about 20 minutes for each team).
The oral presentation of the final project is expected to be around 20/25 minutes. All the students of a group need to present some part of the projects. For the oral presentation slides are encouraged. During and after the presentation the teachers will ask some questions, possibly to a specific student of the group. Questions can be both on the presentation and on some topic of the course.
3 additional points will be given to two calssworks assigned during the course. The homeworks are not demanding to pass the examination.
With reference to Dublin Descriptors (presented above):

• Data analysis and elaboration of the written report ( DD1,DD2,DD3 )
• Oral presentation of the Project ( DD3,DD4,DD5 )
  -Questions during the project presentation ( DD1,DD2 )

Jean-Michel Marin, Christian Robert, Bayesian Core: A Practical Approach to Computational Bayesian Statistics, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2007, ISBN: 978-0-387-38983-7

Questo corso si propone di introdurre gli studenti di ingegneria a questioni filosofiche ed etiche che emergono con l'uso delle tecnologie biomediche. Ad esempio, gli ingegneri spesso si avvalgono di simulazioni informatiche di modelli idealizzati dei loro oggetti di studio. Tuttavia, tali procedure sono affette da incertezze rappresentazionali e computazionali che sono ineliminabili. Si presentano quindi questioni filosofiche circa l'attendibilità delle predizioni risultanti, oltre che questioni etiche riguardanti la responsabilità morale dell'uso delle tecnologie utilizzate. Allo stesso modo, l'inedita abilità a trattare un'enorme quantità di dati apre scenari affascinanti, soprattutto nel campo della medicina di precisione. Eppure, anche qui si devono affrontare domande aperte sulla capacità predittiva degli algoritmi impiegati nel trattamento dei Big Data, oltre che problemi morali concernenti la privacy e il controllo delle informazioni personali.

The aim of the course is to discuss from the perspective of sustainable development the great environmental, economic and social challenges that humanity is facing in the contemporary era. The verb "discuss" is utilized deliberately to emphasize the interactive mode used throughout the course. Each and all of the problems are treated up to a global (planetary) scale and over long (from decennial to secular or even millennial) temporal scales. Particular attention is given to climate change and its consequences along many directions claiming for sustainable solutions, from agricultural and ecological dynamics to human and Earth health. Given the high level of complexity of the proposed issues, no univocal solutions are provided. Rather, the active research performed by the students during individual and group work, based on the most up-to-date literature and under the guidance of instructors, will let them deepen both the knowledge and the understanding about some specific, elective topics.

The specific learning skills acquired by the students are
Knowledge and understanding of the most important global changes that require the design of a sustainable path toward development, with particular and special focus on climate change. These include economic issues (indicators other than GDP, inequalities and poverty, the possibility of development without growth), environmental issues (such as biodiversity conservation, resources availability and urban resilience) and social issues (such as education and health). In particular, the scales of reasoning in students' minds are widened by the large geopolitical and the long temporal scales that are considered in the course. [Dublin Descriptor 1]
Ability of contextualizing and applying the concepts and tools learned to specific problems, going beyond the single-issue simplistic view of sustainable development that is typical of basic courses on the subject. [Dublin Descriptors 2 and 3]
Capacity of autonomously navigating through the pertinent, up-to-date international literature so as to argue pros and cons of potential solutions to specific problems. [Dublin Descriptor 3 and 5]
Group work attitude in preparing a dissertation to be presented to (and defended with) the whole class, as well as a short report to be submitted at the beginning of the exam session (communication skills) [Dublin Descriptor 4].

The course consists of two modules. The first module is specifically focused on Climate change, while the other is mainly devoted to implications of global changes to sustainable development. The two modules are not delivered sequentially, but in parallel because their contents are not separated but intertwined. Climate change is in fact seen here as one of the major global challenges to be faced by humanity in the present era.
Topics of the first module (Climate change) are the following:
Introduction to global environmental change: Understanding environmental change, Historical approaches to environmental change, Current approaches to environmental change, Contemporary patterns of global environmental change
The Earth system - The climate system (radiation and radiative balance- the equilibrium temperature of a planet)
Natural climate change and the ice ages: Milankovich theory. Climate dynamics and the general circulation of the atmosphere
Natural and anthropogenic climate drivers
Deep Decarbonization Pathway Planning and Mid-Century Strategies- The Three Pillars of Decarbonization
GCM scenarios - Downscaling methods for Climate change impacts evaluation
The second module of the course (Sustainable Development) is delivered using the flipped class methodology. Video-lectures are taken from the MOOC (Massive Open Online Course) entitled "The Age of Sustainable Development" by Prof. Jeffrey Sachs (Columbia University), freely available on Coursera. Each week, the students are requested to watch one video and/or study one chapter of the course book, so as to be ready for discussion during the class.
Lectures of the second module (Sustainable development) are
Introduction to sustainable development
An unequal world
A brief history of economic development
Why some countries developed while others stayed poor
Ending extreme poverty
Planetary boundaries
Social inclusion
Education for all
Health for all
Food security
Resilient cities
Saving biodiversity and protecting ecosystem services
Sustainable development goals

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The exam consists of two parts: an oral presentation (talk) with discussion during the course (group work), followed by the submission of a short report at the end of the course, and written tests plus a possible discussion on the paper (individual work). The students will be organized in groups (tentatively of three people). A list of topics of interest, as possibly resulting from discussion during lectures, will emerge during the classes. The group will perform research on the selected topics based on the available literature, will organize a talk (tentatively 15 minutes) and write a short report (Scientific Reports style, around 4000 words). The instructors reserve the right to discuss individually with each student the report they have written in groups, in order to ensure the personal contribution to the original research presented.The quality of the work done and the ability of the group to keep the class discussion vivid and alive, as well as the feedback provided to other groups, are part of the evaluation. The written tests will be performed individually and consist of answering questions and/or solving simple exercises so as to prove the familiarity of the student with the topics of the course. The final grade results from a combination of individual and group work. The individual portion (written tests plus optional oral exam at the teachers’ discretion) and the group portion (oral presentation and short report) each contribute 15 points (out of 32) to the final score, with up to 2 bonus points being given for active participation. The exam will be considered as passed with a final grade >= 18 and individual/group grades >= 8.

MOOC available at Coursera.org https://www.coursera.org/learn/sustainable-development
Jeffrey Sachs, The Age of Sustainable Development, Editore: Columbia University Press, Anno edizione: 2015, ISBN: 978-0-231-53900-5 https://cup.columbia.edu/book/the-age-of-sustainable-development/9780231173155

L'obiettivo del corso è duplice:
1. Rendere gli studenti consapevoli delle complesse dinamiche della comunicazione e della persuasione, con un'enfasi speciale sulla componente personale (mittente/destinatario).
2. Equipaggiare gli studenti con abilità comunicative perché siano in grado di produrre comunicazioni orali, scritte e in forma multimediale che siano chiare e persuasive.
Il corso adotta tre strategie:

• Lezioni frontali
• Modalità "blended" e "flipped" (gli studenti accederanno in maniera autonoma a risorse online quali esempi di discorsi - in forma scritta o di video -, articoli, casi di studio, lezioni in video)
• Tutoring in presenza o in remoto (attraverso collaborazione "cloud") sui compiti da svolgere e sul progetto finale

See the program of the module in the master course

See the program of the module in the master course

L'insegnamento affronta il tema della creatività, in particolare nel campo della scienza e della tecnologia, con l'obiettivo di stimolare negli studenti la consapevolezza del fatto che esistono alcuni fattori chiave per creare ambienti di lavoro e modi di agire e pensare maggiormente creativi. Dopo una base teorica sulla creatività in generale e della creatività negli ambiti della scienza e della tecnologia, con particolare riferimento alle opere di Kuhn e Popper, vengono proposte una serie di metodologie da sperimentare in maniera laboratoriale, ispirate degli studi di Resnick, De Bono, Kelley e altri autori. L'approccio viene validato praticamente attraverso lo svolgimento di progetti di gruppo su temi dati, da affrontare in gruppi interdisciplinari.

Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Valutazione continua obbligatoria
See the program of the module in the master course

The Critical Thinking course aims to provide, in an innovative manner, the methodological tools necessary to reason and argue soundly under conditions of risk and uncertainty in science and technology. The tools used will be those belonging to logic, philosophy, argumentation, and the psychology of thought, as applied to uncertain reasoning. The course content will be presented and discussed interactively with students. The course is intended to give students the opportunity to reflect critically on the cultural, social, and ethical impacts of science and technology

( Knowledge and understanding )
Students will:

• be acquainted with different forms of scientific reasoning
• acquire methodological skills in order to deal with risk and uncertainty
  ( Applying knowledge and understanding )
  Students will:
• foster their ability to solve problems and cope with uncertainty
• apply critical thinking to complex problems
• integrate their technical knowledge with humanistic, cognitive and ethical perspectives on science and technology
  ( Making judgements )
  Students will be able to:
• use methods and imagine scenarios in order to deal with (severe) uncertainty
• enhance creativity in thinking and reasoning
  ( Communication )
  Students will learn how to
• improve their skills in a writing an academic paper
• make academic presentations
• evaluate different forms of (risk) communication
  ( Lifelong learning skills )
  Students will
• be ready to evaluate and take decisions under conditions of uncertainty
• be better prepared to their future professional life in a socially responsible way
• be able to propose innovation solutions to complex and uncertain problems.

The course will cover different topics both from a theoretical and a more practical point of view.
The list of topics includes:

• scientific reasoning: deduction, induction, and abduction
• elements of logic and argumentation
• probabilistic reasoning: biases and paradoxes
• risk theory
• risk perception
• risk communication
• risk and moral argumentation
• decision making under severe uncertainty
• technological innovation and uncertainty
• scenario planning
• sustainability and scientific values

Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
An individual final essay
Students are required to develop an argumentative thesis in an individual essay in which the specific claims are justified by the use of critical thinking and the relevant literature.
Students are required to read and carefully study the suggested bibliography and to apply it to case-studies.
Collective presentations
Students are encouraged to give collective presentations in order to reduce the length of the individual final essay (this option is available only for some study programs). All detailed information and the pdfs of the scientific papers that we will be used will be made available.
The individual final essay will be evaluated considering the following criteria:
1) originality of the main thesis
2) knowledge of the scientific and technological background
3) argumentative skills
4) ability to integrate technical knowledge with critical reflection
5) compliance with academic standards

Damiano Canale, Roberto Ciuni, Aldo Frigerio, Giovanni Tuzet, Critical Thinking. An Introduction, Editore: Bocconi University Press - Egea, Anno edizione: 2021, ISBN: 9788899902858
Daniele Chiffi, Stefano Moroni, Uncertainty, Innovation and the City, Editore: Edward Elgar, Anno edizione: 2025, ISBN: 9781035342662 https://www.e-elgar.com/shop/gbp/uncertainty-innovation-and-the-city-9781035342662.html?srsltid=AfmBOoooZkaZdrxskmSY2ckahsDBQ2HOVkhHF7S-AU-24J5_HcpovGK-
Mattia Andreoletti, Daniele Chiffi, Philosophy of Risk, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2027
Note: If not yet published, an advanced draft of the book will be made available to students.

The course, held substantially in presence in the laboratory-classroom, aims to provide students the basic skills to learn using modern instrumentation for data acquisition by programmable and reconfigurable virtual systems, according to user requirements for different applications. Methods to process and analyze statistically large data sets, and transmit and save them, will also be discussed.
The course includes, in addition to the traditional classroom lectures, tutorials and project workshops (not mandatory) where students will study in deep specific topics, addressing different issues. The verification of the knowledge acquired is based on written tests during the course and on the evidence of recovery. The final evaluation will be based on a final exam where the students need to develop a custom application.

Knowledge and understanding (DdD1)
Students will learn how to:
what is the modern instrumention and the "measurement chain" used to acquire data from environment;
which are the fundamentals rules used to acquire date without losing informations;
the basic structures of a data acquisition programming language;
how to manage data set: elaborate, manipulate and save it in different kind of format.
Applying knowledge and understanding (DdD2)
Given specific project cases, students will be able to:
Detail the corresponding requirements;
To understand the requirements and to design the correct structure to manage the data;
Analize and comment on specific architectural choices;
Develop and test code fulfilling the design specifications.
Lifelong learning skills (DdD3 - DdD5)
Students will learn how to develop a real project collaborating with other students in the development of the project;
Students choosing to work on the research project, will learn how to conduct a research activity on some specific aspect engineering, developing some innovative solution and some empirical experiment.

Introduction to measurement instrumentation. The analog-to-digital conversion; resolution and accuracy limits for numeric values; effective number of bits of the A/D converter and the dithering techniques to increase resolution. Description of the Data AcQuisition systems (DAQ) performances and limits; mode of installation and use of PCI cards for the acquisition channel and the generation of control signals. Introduction to the concepts of data interpolation and fitting. How to count something: the counters.
Virtual instrumentation. The measurement instruments available on the market. The LabVIEW graphical environment. The front panel. The block diagram. Control palette and function palette, constants, indicators, and controls. How to display data. Nodes and lines. Loop structures, case, sequence. Array and cluster. SubVI. Logic functions. Development of example programs. Debugging. Waveform Data. File management. Storing and recalling data into/from a file. Development of an algorithm for the measurement of the signal frequency.
Elements of hardware and software. Data acquisition cards. Specifications. Acquisitions with buffering. Local and global variables. Built-in elements. Practical examples and their implementation.
Design and implementation of Virtual Instruments (VIs). Design and testing of a “digital voltmeter”. The acquisition section. The digital processing section. Indirect measures based on signal processing. Multichannel acquisition. Practical aspects of the multiplexer. Signal Conditioning. Development of some practical applications. Processing of multi-channel data. Testing and calibration of a virtual instrument.
Applications. Output functions. Arbitrary signal generator. AD and DA converters total error evaluation. Use of the counters. Control gate. Acquisitions for long times. Use of virtual instruments through the Internet. Queues and semaphores to administrate data.
Instrumentation programming. Communication interfaces (RS232, GPIB). The driver for stand-alone instrumentation: VISA. Communication with oscilloscopes and function generators via various communication interfaces.
Laboratory activities
Creation of virtual instruments for the acquisition from the field of experimental data: processing, graphical representation, data logging and statistical analysis (average, moving average, variance) of numerical data. Realization of programs for the measurement of analog and digital signals. Generation of analog and digital signals. Development of specific projects for students. Every student of Data Acquisition Systems held 32 hours of laboratory divided into 8 sessions during each session will be carried out individually but always under the guidance of the professor, the implementation of programs progressively more advanced. The details of the evaluation process of the workshop will be presented during the first hours of lesson of the course.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, con prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
Exams assign a score of thirty, from 0 up to the maximum grade of 30 cum laude, extracting it from the results achieved with the work in the classroom and with the project/exam in the presence, and the outcome of a short theory written test. For anyone who wants to further improve the rating will be possible to perform an oral or develop an optional data acquisition project.
In any case, examination procedures will be consistent with the rules adopted by the Politecnico di Milano and the School of Eng. Industrial and Information and the dates of each exam will be communicated well in advance.
Type of assessment
Description
Dublin descriptor
Written test
Theory of acquisition:
· Knowledge of the fundamentals of the theory of acquisition;
· Knowledge of the state of the art of measurement instrumentation;

• Knowledge of fundamentals of interpolation and fitting.
  Solution of acquisition problems
  · Development of the right structure of acquisition;
  · Estimation of the computational costs;
  · Managing data and how to elaborate them;
  · Software testing debugging and analysis exercises.
  Exercises focusing on design aspects
  · Definition of the architecture for a distributed measurement system
  · Organisation of different parallel tasks inside a project.
  1,2
  1, 2, 3, 4, 5
  Assessment of laboratory artifacts (optional)
  Assessment of the design and experimental work of acquisition developed by students individually
  2, 3, 4, 5

C. Svelto, R. Ottoboni, M. Norgia, A. Pesatori, Misure. Dai fondamenti alla strumentazione, Editore: Società Editrice Esculapio - Bologna, Anno edizione: 2022, ISBN: 8893853043
Note: Costo circa 19 Euro. Disponibile presso la Biblioteca di PoliMI.
M. Norgia, A. Pesatori, C. Svelto, "Esercizi di Misure", Editore: Società Editrice Esculapio - Bologna, Anno edizione: 2006, ISBN: 88-7488-150-9
Note: Costo circa 15 Euro. Disponibile presso la Biblioteca di PoliMI.

Data-driven and algorithmic technologies increasingly support or automate decisions in engineering, business, science, public policy and everyday life. Their outcomes, however, are not determined by technical performance alone: they also depend on how data are generated, selected and represented, on the objectives and constraints embedded in algorithms, and on the social contexts in which technological systems are designed and deployed.
The course provides students with an interdisciplinary framework for understanding, analysing and addressing fairness-related issues in data-driven technologies. It combines a sociological perspective on data, datafication and algorithmic processes with technical methods for identifying bias, evaluating different notions of fairness and designing fairness-aware technological and decision-making solutions.
The course is intended for students from different engineering backgrounds. It aims to show that data and algorithmic fairness is not a specialised topic limited to diversity and inclusion, but a central engineering challenge concerning the quality, reliability, legitimacy and societal impact of technological systems.
The sociological module introduces students to the relationship between data and society, considering the production and use of data as both a technological activity and a socio-political process. The technical module focuses on the mechanisms through which unfair outcomes may arise in data, algorithms and decision-making processes, and on methods and frameworks for evaluating and mitigating them.
Through lectures, discussions, case studies, exercises and a group project, students will learn to connect sociological interpretation, technical analysis and engineering design.

Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
Explain and critically interpret how data and algorithmic systems are shaped by social, cultural, political and technological processes, and how their design and deployment may reproduce or transform existing inequalities.
Dublin Descriptor 1 — Knowledge and understanding
Analyse data-driven and algorithmic systems from a fairness perspective, identifying potential sources of bias across the different stages of the technological lifecycle and applying suitable concepts, criteria and methods to assess their outcomes.
Dublin Descriptor 2 — Applying knowledge and understanding
Formulate and justify fairness-aware design or policy choices, critically discussing alternative solutions, conflicting objectives, limitations and trade-offs, and clearly communicating the results of the analysis to audiences with different disciplinary backgrounds.
Dublin Descriptors 3 and 4 — Making judgements and communication skills
Class activities, independent study and project work will also support students in integrating technical and sociological perspectives, using feedback constructively and autonomously extending the course concepts to new application domains.
Dublin Descriptor 5 — Learning skills

The course is organised into two closely integrated modules.
Module A — Data and society: sociological perspectives
2 CFU
The first module introduces a sociological perspective on data and algorithmic processes. Data are considered not only as technical objects, but also as the result of social choices, classifications, institutional practices and power relations.
Topics include:
introduction to sociology and to the relationship between society and technology;
data, society and processes of datafication;
the social construction of data, categories and classifications;
identity, culture and technological systems;
the relationship between technology, power and inequality;
the role of gender, race and ethnicity, age, disability and socioeconomic conditions in the production and use of data;
historical and contemporary case studies concerning data-driven technologies;
data feminism and design justice;
epistemic injustice and its relevance to data production, technological design and decision-making;
the social, cultural and political implications of algorithmic systems in scientific, business, policy, healthcare and everyday-life contexts.
The module combines lectures with in-class discussions, exercises and case-study activities. This reflects the approach proposed for the sociological module, in which data production and application are treated as both technological and socio-political phenomena.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Valutazione continua obbligatoria
The course adopts an interdisciplinary and student-centred approach. Teaching activities combine:
lectures introducing sociological concepts, technical methods and analytical frameworks;
guided discussions on scientific literature, technological applications and controversial cases;
individual and small-group exercises;
analysis of real or realistic case studies;
activities requiring students to compare alternative definitions and approaches to fairness;
supervised development of a group project;
final presentation and discussion of project results.
The group project requires students to select or analyse a data-driven or algorithmic application and examine it from both a sociological and a technical fairness perspective. Depending on the selected case, students may analyse data generation, model assumptions, performance across population groups, decision rules, deployment conditions, affected stakeholders and possible mitigation strategies.
The project is intended to develop the ability to integrate perspectives from different disciplines and to formulate technically informed and socially aware design recommendations.
Indicative teaching mix
Teaching activity
Hours
Didattica trasmissiva/frontale
28
Didattica interattiva/partecipativa
12
Didattica laboratoriale
4
Didattica progettuale
6
Didattica valutativa
0
Total assisted teaching
50
Independent study and project work
75
Assisted teaching hours per CFU
10
This classification is consistent with the current distinction between transmissive teaching, interactive activities, laboratory work and project-based teaching. In particular, discussions, guided exercises and case-study activities fall within interactive teaching, while the supervised development and revision of the group assignment are appropriately classified as project-based teaching.

In the last decade, the notion of data has been associated with several changes, disruptions,
revolutions in various areas of our societies, as well as concerns, risks, and issues. Data
science, machine learning, artificial intelligence and big data have become central to every
aspect of social life. How can these complex and powerful technologies be managed and
governed for the benefit of all members of society now and in the future? In this course we will
address the growing attention to the embedding of data across different settings and the
challenges that such embedding brings for ethics and governance of data. The course equips
students with the knowledge and skills to reason on data governance and ethics. We introduce
key question tools on the use of data and associated technologies, reviewing ethical concerns
around data handling, and examining case studies from data collection, storage, and analysis.
Students are then encouraged to bring this increased awareness back to their own practice,

The course details the fundamental concepts of microgrid and its components, types of microgrids, advantages of microgrid compared to the central conventional grid. Particularly the course describes general concepts and application, control strategies and principle of operation of DC microgrid.

Lectures and exercise sessions will allow students to (DdD1, DdD3 and DdD4):
understand the function of microgrids,
define the architecture microgrids,
analyze the main problems of power converters used in microgrids.
The project laboratory will allow students to (DdD1, DdD2 and DdD4):
write a document to understand and evaluate microgrids problems,
learn all the concepts to use design a DC microgrid,
work in group,
summarize and present the results achieved during the final exam.

The main arguments of the course are: introduction to Microgrids, AC vs DC Microgrids, techno-economic comparison, DC microgrid architectures, concepts of microgrid and its components, types of microgrids, AC/DC and DC/DC power converters in Microgrid application, protection and coordination, control strategies and principle of operation of DC Microgrid, concepts and application.
A project laboratory is integral part of the course. The objective of projects is to help students in applying the approaches and principles taught in class. Projects will be defined through the semester. Projects artifacts are expected to be released at fixed deadline that will be defined during the course. The evaluation of projects will be based on the produced artifacts. The project laboratory will be discussed during the oral exam.

Prova scritta condizionata (a scelta del docente), senza prove in itinere
Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The final exam, at the discretion of the teacher, can be carried out in written form (generally consisting of 10 multiple choice) plus an oral test (generally consisting of some free-answer questions) or in oral form (generally made up of 3 or 4 free-answer questions). Students must demonstrate full understanding of the subject and use of appropriate techniques (DdDD1, DdDD2, DdDD3 and DdDD4).
Furthermore, the evaluation can be integrated by a project. The project is evaluated during the first exam call.

The course aims at providing all of the basic skills and knowledge required to effectively design and construct an electric motor. The objectives are highly interdisciplinary because they deal with a number of different physical and engineering aspects, namely, defining the magnetic circuit and magnetic field sources, defining the mechanical architecture referring to strength, compliance, thermal aspects and basic feasibility. The engineering aspects are made rigorous by deriving the optimal solutions in the Pareto sense. Particular attention is devoted to the design and construction of automotive motors. The course aims at highlighting an ever-occurring paradigm within automotive engineering that a single component requires almost all of the competences that are needed to design the whole vehicle. The course aims also to show to the students the importance of competences pertaining to other specialized courses, either electrical or mechanical, addressing the design and construction of electric motors.

By the end of the course, students will learn contents and practices according to what defined in the leaning objectives.
The students will acquire knowledge and understanding on
-how electric motors are conceived
-how windings and/or magnets are placed into an electric motor
-the importance of an efficient magnetic circuit
-winding a stator
-how performing a preliminary design of an electric motor
-how dealing with strength problems
-how dealing with compliance problems
-how dealing with basic construction engineering problems
-how dealing with thermal problems
-how dealing with noise problems
-how optimizing the whole motor by means of multi-objective programming
Concerning the ability to apply the acquired knowledge and understanding, students will be able to
-choose the proper electric motor as function of the required mission (traction, brake actuation, servo-actuators...)
-complete and analyse the design of an electric motor
-apply multi-objective optimization to find optimal solutions for electric motors with respect to a given mission
Through a real design case study, the students will also acquire the skills to formulate a judgment, meaning to define a technical specification, find autonomously the problem input data, apply proper models, perform a critical analysis of the obtained results and explain them. They will also acquire the ability to discuss in a team the proposed design.
Furthermore, through the assigned case study, students will gain the ability to autonomously
-define models of different complexity, with the objective of obtaining a suitable trade off between the accuracy of the solution and the required computational cost
-evaluate the benefits of the design optimisation and propose new solutions
-critically discuss their project and propose improvements that they assume necessary to limit the effect of the simplifications introduced for didactic constraints
Finally, students will improve their communication skills, being able to write reports presenting the developed projects. In particular, the students are requested to prepare their reports addressing the following issues
define a design specification
describe the theoretical background of the applied methods
explain the assumptions, approximations introduced and their impact on the results
show the relevant results
highlight the impact of the optimisation methods learned in the course on the final design, with respect to a traditional design approach.

The course contents are delivered through lectures and exercises.
The course covers the following topics divided in modules
1 Electric motors
General aspects: sizing equations, magnetic topologies and torque components
Windings for a.c. rotating machines.
PM modelling and design criteria.
Cage rotor induction machines: design criteria and performance evaluation.
Synchronous machines: wound rotor types, surface mounted and interior PM dispositions: performances, field weakening, efficiency.
Optimal design
Basic principles of multi-objective optimisation.
Definition of objective functions and design variables for electric motors design.
Pareto sets in both the design variables and objective functions domains.
Optimisation methods.
Construction phase (basics).
Optimal design and construction of automotive electric motors
Design for strength: materials and related mechanical properties for structural health, Design for compliance: FEM models of stator and rotor, effects of rotation, Design for thermal efficiency, basic applications, Design for noise emission, basic schemes for airborne and structure-borne harshness.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Students will pass the course after successfully take an oral exam on theoretical questions which includes the discussion of the submitted report describing the solution of the case study.
Number of questions
3 questions (1 on electric motors, 1 on mechanical design of electric motors, 1 on the case study)
Duration
half hour
Final Grading
To pass the course, students must successfully pass the oral test and complete the report which describes their results.
The final mark is the non-weighted mean of the marks obtained answering the questions.
Specific knowledge and skills that are checked during the exam
Knowledge on the basics of electric and magnetic circuits. Motor types. Mechanical modeling of electric motors (strength, compliance, thermal, noise problems).
Always the teacher tries to
-check whether the project has been made by the student, asking detailed questions that are easily answered if a direct involvement has occurred
-check whether the student has simply learned or understood the topics of the course
The skills that are assessed are
-ability to choose the type of an electric motor for automotive applications
-ability to design an electric motor considering at the same time electrical and mechanical issues
-ability to make judgement, referring to the performance of an electric motor
-ability to learn by combining practical and theoretical experiences

Course notes and slides https://beep.metid.polimi.it/
F. Correggiari, A. Di Gerlando, G.M. Foglia, Construction and Design of Electrical Machines (Lectures notes)
Mastinu, G., Gobbi, M., Miano, C., Optimal Design of Mechanical Systems, with application to automotive engineering, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2006, ISBN: 978-3-540-34355-4 https://link.springer.com/content/pdf/10.1007%2F978-3-540-34355-4.pdf

Digital Business is the transformation of a company business generated by the Information and Communication Technology (ICT) and, more in general, by Digital Innovation. It can involve the internal processes, (e.g. the supply chain management, market relationship management, etc.), people and organization (e.g. digital capabilities, digital and agile organization, HR transformation), but also the entire business model. Digital Business means also the transformation of entire industries and supply chains, the creation of new sectors (e.g. those of Apps, eCommerce, etc.) and of completely new companies (i.e. Startups).
The objective of this course is twofold.
a) Understand context, functions, p rocesses and performance with refernce to the application digital innovation projects/solutions
b) Identify trends, technologies and key methodologies in the domain of digital innovation

a) With reference to objective a), in particular, s tudents will: 1) Understand and interpret the strategic role of digital innovation, the current competitive digital business environment and its evolution; 2) Learn and critically understand – form a strategic point of view - the most important “digital trends” affecting the business, the competitive environment and the industries, such as cloud, big data, Internet of Things, Artificial Intelligence, blockchain, digital marketing etc; 3) Know the main steps and methodologies to be exploited when launching a digital business (start up) or renewing a traditional business. In this light, a specific emphiasis will be given on the following methodologies: lean start up approach, business planning, business process reengineering, investment evaluation etc; 4) Know the main steps and methodologies to be exploited when supporting and innovating an existing business leveraging on digital innovation.
b) with reference to objective b), in particular, students will: 1) Identify and apply the appropriate tools and methodologies for digital business innovation; 2) Discern and select the appropriate strategic approaches and technology trends related to a digital business; 3) Identify the appropriate strategic methodologies and tools to launch a new digital business or renew an existing traditional business.

Strategic analysis applied to digital business. SWOT analysis, Value Chain, competitive advantage and competitive forces, strategic innovation and creativity (e.g. resource-based view and blue ocean strategy), business model design, digital disruption
Models, methodologies and tools enabling the launch of a new business and to compete in high tech contexts. Business model design through the business model canvas, the lean start-up approach, the start-up financing, resource gathering and allocation.
Digital-Driven analysis and Business Process reengineering. Methodologies, techniques, and tools to analyse and re-design processes, when launching digital projects in existing companies
Value Assessment models. How to develop a model to assess the value and impacts generated by Digital Innovation projects. Application of the methodology to real examples and case studies.
Digital Markets & New Business Models. A deep dive into the most important digital trends enabling the development of new markets. Digital Commerce, Mobile Content & Apps, Digital Payments, Mobile Enterprise, Social Networks, Cloud and ICT-as-a-service, Big Data, Internet of Things, Artificial Intelligence, etc.
Digital marketing. Advanced market research (how to use big data and data tracking to better understand the customer behaviour), Customer experience design (methodologies and tools to design multichannel customer experiences), Tool supporting marketing planning (methodologies and techniques to target customers and to develop customized marketing plans), KPI of a multichannel marketing plan (tools and techniques supporting customer accountability, development of scorecards to measure a multichannel marketing plan).
Digital Operations. eSupply Chain (automation and integration of the supply chain operative processes, e.g. logistics, sales, administration, etc.), Supply Chain Collaborative Planning (integrated and collaborative supply chain management, e.g. co-design, collaborative planning, etc.), Supply Chain Visibility (Internet of Things, tracing and visibility along the supply chain, anti-counterfeiting).
People and Organization. Digital capabilities assessment and strategy, digital and agile organization, smart working and new ways of working, employer branding, HR process transformation

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
ASSESSMENT (5 CFU)
The assessment will be based on a written exam at the end of the course.
Specifically, t he written exam will consist of questions covering all course content. Questions could refer to both theoretical concepts and short business cases (other than those discussed in class). Written exam grades range from 0 to 30 points. 18 is considered as the minimum threshold to pass the written exam. Students with a grade lower than 18 shall retake the written exam in any future call.

Ries, E. (2011). The lean startup: How today's entrepreneurs use continuous innovation to create radically successful businesses. Crown Books.
Downes, L., & Nunes, P. (2013). Big bang disruption.

The primary objective of the course is to prepare students to address the challenges associated with the development of state-of-the-art digital electronic systems.
To this end, the course provides not only theoretical and methodological knowledge, but also advanced practical skills in the implementation of digital processing architectures, with particular emphasis on programmable hardware devices such as Field-Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs).
Building upon the knowledge of digital electronics acquired in introductory courses, students will develop advanced competencies and acquire the methodologies and techniques required for the design of high-speed, high-performance digital systems, as well as architectures dedicated to digital signal processing.

Dublin Descriptor 1: Knowledge and understanding
Expected learning outcomes:
· Understand the principles of configurable computing.
· Understand the architecture and implementation issues of FPGAs.
· Explain the complete implementation flow of a digital design on an FPGA.
· Demonstrate knowledge of the fundamental Digital Signal Processing (DSP) algorithms suitable for FPGA implementation.
· Understand the principles of pipelined and parallel processing.
· Explain pipelined and parallel implementation techniques for fundamental DSP structures (e.g., FIR and IIR filters).
· Understand timing analysis and timing constraints in FPGA-based designs.
Dublin Descriptor 2: Applying knowledge and understanding
Expected learning outcomes:
· Analyze system requirements and design a corresponding digital architecture.
· Evaluate alternative architectural solutions according to design specifications.
· Apply digital design methodologies to assess the feasibility of a processing architecture.
· Design, implement, and validate digital architectures on FPGA devices that satisfy a given set of specifications.
Dublin Descriptor 3: Making judgements
Expected learning outcomes:
· Select the processing techniques and architectural solutions best suited to specific application requirements.
· Evaluate the correctness of a digital design by defining appropriate verification and validation strategies.
· Compare alternative implementations in terms of performance, resource utilization, and implementation cost, identifying potential risks and appropriate mitigation strategies.
Dublin Descriptor 4: Communication
Expected learning outcomes:
· Present and effectively communicate the design process, implementation results, and technical outcomes.
· Justify and discuss design choices, architectural decisions, and implementation trade-offs with peers and instructors using appropriate technical terminology.
Dublin Descriptor 5: Lifelong learning skills
Expected learning outcomes:
· Develop and manage a realistic FPGA-based design project.
· Independently acquire and apply new digital signal processing techniques and FPGA design methodologies.
· Transfer the acquired knowledge and skills to the solution of real-world digital signal processing problems.

The course is based on the use of a personal laptop computer and of an Evaluation Board ("Basys 3 Artix-7 FPGA Trainer Board") whose supplying by the student is mandatory. Students enrolled in the course will be given precise indications for supplying the Evaluation Board.
Contents
Review of Digital Electronics Fundamentals
· Logic levels and noise margins.
· Contamination and propagation delays.
· Power dissipation.
· Area utilization.
Programmable Logic Devices
· Principles of operation.
· Spatial vs. Temporal Computing.
· Overview of major programmable architectures: CPLDs, FPGAs, SoCs, and ACAPs.
FPGA Architectures
· Logic blocks.
· I/O blocks.
· Clock distribution networks.
· Power distribution and management.
· FPGA configuration technologies.
Pipeline and Parallel Processing
· Principles of pipelined architectures.
· Parallel processing techniques.
· Design trade-offs for high-performance digital systems.
· Optimization for area, timing, and power.
Timing Issues in Digital Design
· Metastability and timing hazards.
· Setup and hold requirements.
· Static timing analysis for single-clock designs.
· Clock Domain Crossing (CDC).
FPGA Development Using the Xilinx Vivado Design Suite
· Hardware description using VHDL.
· FPGA design flow: simulation, synthesis, implementation, and debugging.
· Design constraints and timing closure.
· Memory resources (RAMs and FIFOs).
· Communication protocols (AXI4-Stream).
Design and Implementation Activities
· Laboratory exercises, in-class design assignments, and individual homework assignments focused on the design, implementation, and optimization of FPGA-based digital systems, including DSP applications and hardware accelerators.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
The final assessment is graded on a 31-point scale and consists of a written examination divided into two parts: a theoretical part (maximum 16 points) and a practical part (maximum 15 points).
Both parts of the examination must be passed in order to obtain the final grade. The final mark is calculated as the sum of the scores achieved in the theoretical and practical parts. Honors ( lode ) are awarded to students achieving a final score of at least 30.5/31.
· The theoretical part consists of a traditional written examination completed on paper (or equivalent methods). It includes exercises, theoretical questions, waveform analysis, and VHDL code analysis. A minimum score of 9 out of 16 is required to pass this part.
· The practical part consists of the design and implementation of a VHDL project and is intended to assess the practical and design skills acquired during the course. A minimum score of 9 out of 15 is required to pass this part.
The practical assessment may be completed in one of two ways: i) during the laboratory activities scheduled within the course or, ii) during one of the official examination sessions held after the end of the lectures.
i) Laboratory option: during the semester, laboratory sessions are organized in which VHDL projects are assigned for development and implementation on the evaluation board. Students may participate by forming their own working groups. Each group is assigned a project to be completed by a specified deadline and assessed before the first official examination session. All members of the same group receive the same score. Students are required to use their own laptop computer and evaluation board. Any additional hardware required (e.g., joysticks or audio modules) will be provided during the laboratory sessions.
ii) Examination-session option: during the official examination sessions, the practical assessment consists of developing and implementing a VHDL project on the evaluation board. Students must use only their own laptop computer, with no Internet access, and their own evaluation board. If required, additional hardware (e.g., joysticks or audio modules) will be provided during the examination. No groups are allowed. Each student works independently and receives an individual evaluation.
Only the practical assessment score may be retained ( "frozen" ), subject to the following conditions:
· Students who obtain a laboratory score (laboratory option) of at least 9/15 and subsequently choose to retake the practical assessment during an official examination session permanently forfeit their laboratory score.
· The practical assessment score, whether obtained through the laboratory activities or during an official examination session, remains valid untill the fifth exam section.
· If the student retakes the practical assessment, the previously retained score is automatically forfeited.
· Neither the theoretical assessment score nor the overall final examination grade may be retained.
The instructor reserves the right to require an additional oral examination in the following cases:
· students who completed the practical assessment as laboratory option, when clarification is needed following the evaluation of the laboratory assignment
· students whose performance shows a significant discrepancy between the theoretical and practical parts of the examination.

Volnei A. Pedroni, Circuit Design and Simulation With VHDL, Editore: The MIT Press, Anno edizione: 2010, ISBN: 0262014335
Note: Second Edition
Peter J. Ashenden, The Designer's Guide to VHDL, Editore: Morgan Kaufmann, Anno edizione: 2006, ISBN: 0120887851
Note: Third Edition
David Harris, Sarah Harris, Digital Design and Computer Architecture, Editore: Morgan Kaufmann, Anno edizione: 2012, ISBN: 9789382291527
Note: Second Edition

Aim of the course is to provide students with the quantitative instruments for rationally managing animal and plant populations and ecosystems.

According to the Dublin Descriptors 1 (Knowledge and understanding), 2 (Applying knowledge and understanding), 3 (Making judgements), and 5 (Learning skills), the students attending the course will get

• Knowledge and understanding of advanced ecological approaches that extend the basic ecological notions to (a) the spatial distribution of organisms, (b) the effect of uncertainties, disturbances and in general stochasticities, (c) the impact of humans on ecosystems and its rational management, (d) the interaction between ecosystem management and human health.
• Application of these quantitative approaches to several problems that concern ecosystems conservation and management. In particular: (a) evaluate the likelihood of population decline and extinction (risk analysis); (b) estimate the chance of success for the reintroduction of species that are locally extinct; (c) calculate the speed of invasion of alien species; (d) estimate the impact of habitat erosion and destruction on population and community viability; (e) estimate the impact of human harvesting on populations viability and assess optimal harvesting regulations; (f) assess the likelihood of establishment of diseases caused by parasites, both micro and macro, that live in our common environment.
• Autonomous problem solving abilities, which allow the students to make judgements and answer more complex questions that are often a blend of the above cited simpler problems.
• Autonomous learning abilities, based on the training received during course attendance, which allow the students to acquire the notions necessary to solve applied ecological problems that are not explicitly illustrated in the present course.

1. Species and populations threatened by extinction:

• The causes of extinction: review. Local extinction, global extinction, extinction in the wild.
• Analysis of the main extinction mechanisms and quantitative approaches for evaluating the extinction risk. Allee effect and depensation. Genetic deterioration. Fundamentals of population genetics. Hardy-Weinberg law. Genetic drift and the Sewall Wright model. Extinction thresholds.
• Demographic and environmental stochasticity. Extinction probability in small populations. Stochastic models of populations driven by environmental variability. Quasi-extinction thresholds. Extinction vortices. Population viability analysis (PVA). Review of the main PVA software tools.
  2. Populations in spatially explicit landscapes:
• The importance of space in ecology. Habitat loss and fragmentation as important mechanisms of extinction. The problem of alien species invasion.
• Dispersal in animals and plants. Diffusion as a way to describe dispersal. Diffusion equation in limited and unlimited habitat. Adding demography to diffusion: the reaction-diffusion equation. Speed of colonization and invasion. Critical reserve dimension.
• Habitat fragmentation and the metapopulation concept. Various metapopulation models. The Levins boolean model. Incorporating habitat loss and environmental catastrophes. Persistence boundaries in metapopulations. Spatially explicit metapopulation models. Ecological corridors.
  3. Sustainabilty of biomass harvesting and its management:
• The overexploitation and depletion of biological renewable resources. Examples from forestry and fisheries. The tragedy of the commons. Open access and the consequences of not regulating the exploitation of renewable resources. Different management goals.
• The dynamics of harvested populations. The concept and measure of harvesting effort. Different regulation policies: exclusive, nonexclusive, economic. Production curves. Maximum sustainable yield. Schaefer's model.
• Principles of bioeconomics. Gordon's analysis. Bionomic equilibrium and the effect of the opportunity cost. Socioeconomic impacts of various regulation policies. The bioeconomic optimum.
• The management of age-structured populations. The optimal rotation period in forest management. The effect of the discount rate. Fish populations with constant recruitment. The problem of optimal effort and mesh size. Beverton and Holt's analysis. The eumetric mesh size and eumetric production curves. Bioeconomic considerations.
  4. Parasite and disease ecology:
• Ecology and public health. Emerging and reemerging diseases. Zoonoses. Parasitism and its importance for population regulation. Microparasites and macroparasites. Parasitoids.
• Dynamics of diseases caused by microparasites. Various transmission mechanisms: direct, water and airborne, environmental, vertical. Susceptible, exposed, infected and recovered individuals. Incidence and prevalence. Diseases with permanent and temporary immunity. SI and SIR models. The regulation of Malthusian populations. The basic reproduction number of a microparasitic disease. Vector-borne diseases. Ross-MacDonald model. Water-borne diseases. SIB models. Vaccination and culling policies.
• Dynamics of diseases caused by macroparasites. Anderson and May's model for the dynamics of hosts and parasites. Distribution of parasite burden inside a host and the clumping parameter. The basic reproduction number of a macroparasitic disease.
• Parasitoids and hosts. Nicholson and Bailey's model. Biological control of alien and noxious organisms.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
The exams will take place during the regular sessions and will consist of two written tests. More precisely:
Phase 1 (Conceptual questions)
The questions will concern the whole course (the basic concepts). Questions will be provided to students on a paper form they must fill in. No books or notes can be used in this phase. Students must answer the questions before time expires and give back the filled in sheet to the teacher.
Phase 2 (Exercises)
The text of the exercises will be provided to students on a few paper sheets. Students can use books and notes, but cannot use computers, only calculators. They can use their paper sheets for a scratch copy. There will be 4 exercises, one for each of the 4 parts of the course. Each student, however, has the right to discard one exercise and solve only 3 exercises. The student must declare which exercise s/he does not want to solve. Once the 3 exercises are solved, students must copy the solution to the provided paper sheets. Before time expires they will give back the filled in sheets to the teacher. No scratch paper can be attached to the provided sheets.
The evaluation criteria are based on the verification of the correctness of the answers to the questions and the correct and justified solution of each of the 3 exercises chosen by the student. The grade will be the sum of the scores obtained in Phase 1 and Phase 2. Each exercise has the same maximum score. The grade "30 cum laude" will be given to students whose total score is larger than or equal to 32.

M. Gatto, R. Casagrandi, Ecosystem conservation and management: Models and Application, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2022, ISBN: 978-3-031-09479-8 https://link.springer.com/book/10.1007/978-3-031-09480-4
Note: The text is freely downloadable by the Politecnico di Milano students
R. Casagrandi, G. A. De Leo and M. Gatto (2002), 101 problemi di ecologia., Editore: McGraw Hill, Anno edizione: 2002, ISBN: 883866041-7
Note: This is optional

This course allows electrical engineering students to learn and understand the operating principles, the design techniques and the application criteria of electrical switching devices, i.e.. devices designed to make or break the current in electric circuits. Operating principles and design techniques are based on an understanding of electrical transients caused by switching, while application criteria make reference to power system design practice and standards.

After attending this course, students master the fundamental concepts of transients in electric circuits (DdD1).
They are also able to apply their knowledge of electrical switching devices to the design of equipment and systems, for diversified application areas, including networks/systems for power transmission and distribution, marine and railway transportation systems, industrial applications (DdD2).
Design abilities include the basic skills to select the appropriate switching device for an application, keeping the different technical trade-offs into account (DdD3), and the communication skills required to explain the technical reasons behind such selection (DdD4).
The acquired knowledge also allows students to keep their technical expertise up-to-date in the future, by understanding technical and scientific literature dealing with electrical switching devices, and distinguishing innovative aspects from established design solutions, with the purpose to contribute to technological innovation of the electrical engineering sector (DdD2 and DdD3).

1) Current making and breaking. Ideal circuit breaker. Opening and closing transients in circuits.
2) Real world circuit breakers and other electromechanical apparatus: technical data, definitions and testing.
3) Processes associated with breaking of currents: electric arc, interrupting means, contact operation; typical circuit breaker designs.
4) Electrical switching devices employed in low voltage power distribution: short circuit protection, ground fault protection, selectivity and coordination.
5) Some typical applications of electrical switching devices (e.g., high voltage substation architectures, medium voltage power distribution, low voltage motor protection) and the engineering rationale involved in design and operation.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
Exam includes a written test and an oral session.
During the course, students may work to the solution of an exercise or small project proposed by the lecturer. The exercise/project has the purpose ot test the student's ability to apply the knowledge acquired during the course to a specific case, choosing the proper mathematical tools to describe the electrical system under consideration (Dd2, Dd3).
The written test includes multiple-answer questions and/or numerical exercises: it aims to test the knowledge and understanding of topics taught in the course (Dd1, Dd2).
The oral session includes:

• theoretical questions about the course topics, aimed at testing acquired knowledge (Dd1, Dd2) and communications skills (Dd4)
• discussion on the exercise/project, if applicable, where student is expected to explain the reasoning which led to the proposed solution
• questions requiring the students to establish connections of course topics between them and with topics of other courses, with the purpose of additionally probing ability to apply knowledge (Dd1), judgement skills (Dd2, Dd3) and ability to effectively communicate reasons for technical choices (Dd4)

Arieh L. Shenkman, Transient Analysis of Electric Power Circuits Handbook, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2005, ISBN: 978-0-387-28797-3
Note: particularly chapters 1 and 2
Allan Greenwood, Electrical Transients in Power Systems, Editore: Wiley-Interscience, Anno edizione: 1991, ISBN: 0-471-62058-0
Note: Chapters 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Lou van Der Sluis, Transients in Power Systems, Editore: John Wiley and Sons, Anno edizione: 2001, ISBN: 0-471-48639-6
Note: chapters 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, and 10
Franco Pardini, Apparecchi Elettrici: Teoria, costruzione, applicazione, Editore: Pitagora Editrice, Anno edizione: 2007
Note: Textbook in Italian

The course provides tools to understand electro-heating devices. The course deals with the criteria for connection of different furnace topologies into LV, MV and HV networks.

Lectures and exercise sessions will allow students to (DdD1, DdD3 and DdD4):
understand the function of electro-heating devices,
define the architecture electro-heating devices,
analyze the main working problem of electro-heating devices.
The project laboratory will allow students to (DdD1, DdD2 and DdD4):
write a document in order to understand the electro-heating devices,
learn all the concepts to use design an electro-heating device,
work in group,
summarize and present the results achieved during the final exam.

The main argument of the course are: General considerations of the Electro-heating devices classification. Technical Comparison. Arc furnaces. Characteristics of Electric Arc. Representative Models. Electric Circuit Model of Furnace. Continuous Mode of Operation. Fundamental Relations. Typical problems due to arc-furnace connection to the power network. Reactive power compensation in arc-furnace. Induction furnaces, resistance furnaces, and dielectric heating. Microwave Owen. Typical problems due to furnace connection to the power network.
A project laboratory is integral part of the course. The objective of projects is to help students in applying the approaches and principles tought in class. Projects will be defined through the semester. Project artifact are expected to be released at fixed deadline that will be defined during the course. The evaluation of projects will be based on the produced artifacts. The project laboratory will be discussed during the oral exam.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, con prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
The final exam, at the discretion of the teacher, can be carried out in written form (generally consisting of 20 true or false questions and 3 open questions) plus, if necessary, an oral test (generally consisting of some free-answer questions) or in oral form (generally made up of 3 free-answer questions). Students must demonstrate full understanding of the subject and use of appropriate techniques (DdDD1, DdDD2, DdDD3 and DdDD4).
Furthermore, the evaluation can be integrated by a project. The project is evaluated during the first exam call.

Il corso affronta le principali questioni teoriche relative all'innovazione socio-tecnica (quali i concetti di base dell'innovazione tecnologica, le dinamiche di diffusione delle innovazioni, i limiti del determinismo tecnologico, l'agency degli oggetti tecnologici, la flessibilità interpretativa della tecnologia, genere e tecnologia) e analizza esempi rilevanti di tecnologie d'avanguardia che hanno un impatto sulla società e sulla vita umana, come l'Internet delle cose, la fabbricazione digitale, la realtà aumentata e l'intelligenza artificiale. Anziché focalizzarsi sul loro funzionamento, le prestazioni e i problemi tecnici, il corso affronterà le questioni etiche che esse sollevano e gli impatti sociali che producono.

The main objective of the course is to study the climate change challenge using quantitative, numerical tools. Specifically, the aim is to learn the basic elements of the global energy and climate problems, evaluate the solutions with a focus on the energy sector, and use optimization and simulation models to evaluate the emission reduction and adaptation strategies.
To do so, a discussion of the fundamentals of the global economy, energy, land and climate systems will be complemented by development and applications of mathematical models integrating these key components. The course will also involve programming languages used in energy-climate planning, such as AMPL and python, among others.
The course uses innovative teaching methods, in particular, it is a flipped classroom course: students will form groups of 4-5 and work on projects to improve one or more numerical models to deal with climate change solutions, either on mitigation or adaptation.
Students based in Leonardo (e.g., Mathematical Engineers) may attend part of the course virtually.

At the end of course, students will be able to:

• Explain the foundations of climate science / climate change and how climate change affects energy and economic systems
• Describe the main historical landmarks of climate- energy policy (IPCC)
• Explain the link between climate change and energy systems
• Discuss advantages and limitations of the different mitigation and adaptation strategies
• Describe the different components of an energy system
• Distinguish between major modeling paradigms (IAMs, bottom-up and top-down energy models, etc.) and choose the appropriate type of model for a given question
• Answer specific questions using optimization models and critically interpret / analyse results
• Translate a real-world problem into an optimization formulation
• Write a mathematical model in a specific programming language
• Identify the main sources of uncertainty and calculate their impact on model outcomes
• Present a project in class, and thus create a presentation and be able to communicate it properly

The specific list of topics is as follows
Topic 1: Introduction to the climate change challenge: physics and causes of climate change, consequences and impacts.
Topic 2: Global energy and climate policies and agreements
Topic 3: The role of technology in climate change mitigation
Topic 4: Fundamentals of continuous and discrete optimization
Topic 5: Mathematical modeling and optimization using AMPL
Topic 6: Fundamentals of climate economics
Topic 7: Introducing the tools of Integrated Assessment Models
Topic 8: The simplest integrated energy-economy-climate model: the DICE model
Topic 9: Introduction to energy systems
Topic 10: Energy models: EnergyScope and PyPSA
Topic 11: Climate risks, adaptation and climate engineering
Topic 12: Accounting for risks and uncertainty: sensitivity and uncertainty analysis methods, stochastic and robust optimization

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Final grade will be based on two main components. A group project which involves model development and presentation during the course lectures. An additional written exam which will be done during the standard exams timeline.
1) Model development and group presentation (2/3): This will be done in class during the course, and we will evaluate both the modeling work as well as the communication skills. In particular, the teacher will assess the relevance of the chosen project, the validity of the software development (also looking at the code) as well as the presentation and oral skills.
2) Written exam (1/3): This will test knowledge of programming and of the theoretical concepts. The theoretical questions will cover the topics examined in class.

Global Energy Assessment - Toward a Sustainable Future, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2012 http://www.globalenergyassessment.org/
IPCC 6th assessment report, Anno edizione: 2023 https://www.ipcc.ch/assessment-report/ar6/
DICE 2013 http://www.econ.yale.edu/~nordhaus/homepage/documents/DICE_Manual_100413r1.pdf
The AMPL Book https://ampl.com/resources/books/ampl-book/

In an era of transformation of the energy sectors, this course describe the functioning of energy markets and the economic principles that have guided their design. Through a blend of economic theorethical models, pracitical evidence, and academic research, students gain comprehensive understanding of the dynamics, principles, and motivaitions shaping global energy markets.
Key topics include the theorethical frameworks, models, and the practical tools essential for understanding energy markets. Emphasis is placed on elucidating the rationale behind public intervention in the market, navigating competitive wholesale markets, and analyzing the impact of environmental externalities on market dynamics.
Real-world case studies and guest speakers enrich the learning experience, fostering critical thinking and application of theoretical constructs to practical scenarios.

Describe the functioning of energy markets.
Identify natural monopolies (e.g., transmission/distribution) and explain why regulation is needed to improve welfare.
Explain the motivations for public intervention in energy markets (efficiency, security of supply, externalities).
Describe competitive wholesale electricity markets and the main design challenges.
Explain how environmental externalities affect energy markets and evaluate major regulatory instruments (ETS, taxes, standards).
Apply energy economics tools to real-world cases and policy/market design problems.

Topics:
Market structure, economic principles and models: Competition, Monopololy, Deadweight Loss, and Natural Monopoly
Regulation of Natural Monopolies: Models with perfect information, Models with information asymmetries, Regulation of Natural Monopoly in practice
Energy and the Enviorment: Negative Externalities, Technological adoption, NIMBY, Policy solution in the energy markets
Energy Sources: Cartels, Dominant-producer model, Hold-up problems and Long Term Contracts
Electricity Markets
Natural Gas Market
Topics will be discussed through: Lecture sessions: they aim at illustrating, sharing and discussing models, conceptual frameworks, tools and empirical evidence In-class case study discussions: they aim at making students apply the insights from theory and empirics to real world situations. Students have to read case study materials in advance of the class sections.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
The final exam aims at testing student's:
Level of understanding of the theories and empirics presented in class
Ability to apply the theories and empirics presented in class to real cases
Ability to interpret correctly the regulatory intervention as well as the choices of the players in the energy markets in light of the theory and empirics presented in class
Ability to calculate a market equilibrium
Exam format
Written exam
The exam consists of 31 multiple-choice questions, each worth 1 point. For each incorrect answer, 1 point will be deducted (malus). Unanswered questions receive 0 points (no penalty).
The exam will be administered on paper. Students must clearly mark their answers on the official answer sheet, which is the only document that will be evaluated. Any ambiguous or multiple markings will be considered incorrect.
Oral Exam
Students whose final written score is higher than 26 are required to take a mandatory oral examination. The purpose of the oral examination is to confirm and, where appropriate, adjust the final grade, which may therefore be either increased or decreased.
Students may choose not to attend the oral examination. In this case, a final grade of 26 will be automatically recorded.
For all other scores, the result of the written examination is considered final. Students are not entitled to request an oral examination.

The interest of the international community in the multiple interconnections among energy, environment, and society is fully recognised, as is the close link between energy and development. The 2030 Agenda and the 17 Sustainable Development Goals confirm that the world is increasingly interconnected and that social challenges are becoming more and more complex and unpredictable. With regard to energy, Goal 7 identifies energy availability as a necessary precondition for human and social development, as well as a key enabler in the fight against poverty, in line with the broad concept of “development as freedom” defined by Amartya Sen. Nevertheless, access to sufficient, affordable, efficient, reliable, safe, and clean energy is not yet available to everyone. In developing countries, the problem is critical, but increasing challenges have also emerged in emerging countries and, more recently, even in developed countries. Innovative solutions and strategies to match economic growth with the multidimensional targets of sustainability, including environmental preservation and social inclusion, need to be developed. The many geopolitical tensions of recent years have hampered efforts to address the complexity of the energy challenge, putting the concept of justice in the energy transition under threat, particularly with reference to vulnerable groups and regions.
By widening the multidisciplinary vision of students and by evaluating the many implications that sustainable energy may have on development at the global and local levels, the course aims to provide a general overview of the various aspects of cooperation and development, analysed from a project-oriented perspective, with the goal of designing solutions that meet local needs and developing policy recommendations stemming from the engineering planning process. To achieve these multifaceted goals, after recalling the main models of cooperation and development, science diplomacy will also be introduced, with a particular focus on how evidence-based policymaking can be informed.
Project Cycle Management (PCM) will then be introduced as a tool for the appropriate design of cooperation actions, particularly with regard to the logic of cause-and-effect relationships. Given that the energy sector represents the main field of application, after detailing the multidimensional nexus between Energy and Development, a planning methodology to guide engineering design towards meeting local needs and making the best use of local resources will be introduced. The peer-reviewed methodology, Comprehensive Energy Solution Planning (CESP), addresses this challenge by combining a cyclic approach consisting of: (i) a set of traditional engineering-oriented phases (the current standard for energy solution planning), and (ii) complementary social science-based phases that integrate holistic aspects into project planning. Some of the course topics will be delivered through a blended learning approach, making use of MOOCs, web resources, and role-playing simulation debates. The project work is primarily based on the application of the flipped classroom approach.

The learning outcomes may be aggregated into five areas of knowledge
1 The students will learn the foundation and the evolution of the main development models from the Marshal plan to the new paradigm of Sustainable Development; they will learn the trends of the energy situation in emerging countries with special reference to the African continent. The will learn the principles of energy planning and solution design by deepening the main renewable or hybrid technological solutions and will understand the basic principle of Decision support Systems. Students will also understand the main implication among energy and development, energy and human right as well as their policy implication at national and regional scale.
2. The student will be able to apply the Project Cycle Management and the methodological approach to define appropriate energy solutions for rural and off grid areas by defining load curves and selecting technologies. They will be also able to draft business models and to adopt strategy for long term sustainability of the given solution. They will also be able to evaluate the expected impact of the energy solution onto the socio economic asset of the target community.
3. the students will learn how to make choice and provide judgement, given a number of energy strategies for the same problem, they will be autonomous in identifying and defining a set of priority by adopting appropriate Decision support tools and deducting from scientific result, policy recommendation in the form of policy brief
4. t he students will learn how to prepare a project proposal according to standard methods (like PCM) and how to present it, given a certain time and audience, including policy makers
5. the students will learn by doing and will take profit of work group.

Topic 1 — History of Development Cooperation, Development Models, and Science Diplomacy
From conflict to cooperation. The evolution of development cooperation from the 1950s to the present. Colonialism and neo-colonialism. The theoretical foundations of international cooperation and the evolution of development models. The role of scientists in development processes. The growing importance of Science Diplomacy: Diplomacy for Science, Science for Diplomacy, and Science in Diplomacy. Providing scientific advice to policymakers. Decision-making processes: principles, assessment methods, and tools. The policy brief: purpose, structure, and drafting guidelines.
Topic 2 — The Energy–Development Nexus: Affordable and clean Energy for Africa
The global energy landscape: historical trends and projections based on World Bank and International Energy Agency data. OECD countries, emerging economies, and countries facing critical energy challenges. The relationship between energy and development. Energy and human rights: the Energy Justice framework. Africa’s energy landscape and the continent’s main challenges. Africa’s strategic relevance in the global energy transition.
Topic 3 — Project Cycle Management: Planning the Intervention
The European Commission’s Project Cycle Management framework as a tool for development cooperation. The identification and analysis phase: problem analysis, objective analysis, stakeholder analysis, and strategy analysis. The formulation and planning phase: the Logical Framework Approach, Gantt charts, and budgeting. Output, outcome, and impact indicators. SMART indicators and Objectively Verifiable Indicators (OVIs). The relationship between Project Cycle Management and the Theory of Change.
Topic 4 — Comprehensive Energy Solution Planning: Designing the Energy Solution
The Comprehensive Energy Solution Planning methodology will be presented through the six interconnected and interdisciplinary steps embedding counterfactual analysis. Context Analysis: assessment of the regulatory, institutional, socioeconomic, and local energy context. Resource and Demand Assessment: analysis of available energy resources and current and projected energy demand. Technical Solution Design: identification, sizing, and, where possible, optimisation of appropriate technical solutions. A Python-based tool will also be introduced to design hybrid minigrdi for access to energy. Business Model Design: development of a coherent business model to ensure the long-term economic and operational sustainability of the selected energy solution. Complementary Activities: identification of supporting measures required to create an effective enabling environment. Impact Analysis: assessment of the solution’s expected social, economic, environmental, and developmental impacts.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Lectures are a mix of ex-cathedra, blended/flipped where a participatory approach is envisaged via open discussion. Part of the course is devoted to a methodological project work about: project cycle management, application of the comprehensive energy solution planning. One project work will be carried out in team and it will be about “Rural electrification in Sub-Saharan Africa”. The project work including an executive summary for policy maker as policy brief is highly recommended and will allow the assessment of the following learning outcomes
The student will apply knowledge since the students will apply the CESP methodology to a real case, they will be able to define load curves, select appropriate technologies, propose business models and evaluate the expected impact of the energy solution on the local community.
The students will be able to make judgements since they will select strategies base on a set of given information and using appropriate decision support mathematics.
The students will be able to communicate their achievements since they will work in team and will prepare a written proposal for the solution of the project work and will finally present the achievement via an oral presentation.
The project work provides a rating (0-10) and consist of a team and individual evaluation. It will be added to the evaluation of the written text. The written test (0-23) will assess individually the following learning outcomes
an improved knowledge and understanding of the subject since the students will have to respond to a set of theoretical questions
a further assessment of their capacity to apply knowledge and understanding since the students will have to solve quantitative exercises
The written exam work will assess:
Knowledge and understanding since the students will have to respond to a set of theoretical questions
Applying knowledge and understanding since the students will have to solve some exercises
The oral will be applied for international students (incoming or outgoing) that will attend the exam on line due to their abroad period or in case any use the Professo may wish to check any non authorised used of AI.

Colombo, S. Bologna, D. Masera, Renewable Energy for Unleashing, Sustainable Development,, Editore: Springer International Publishing Switzerland, Anno edizione: 2014
Note: DOI:10.1007/978-3-319-00284-2_1
Monique Kremer, Peter van Lieshout and Robert Went,, Doing Good or Doing Better development policies in a globalizing world,, Editore: Amsterdam University Press, Anno edizione: 2009
Note: Chapter 1,2,3,5
EU commission, Project Cycle Management, Anno edizione: 2004 http://ec.europa.eu/europeaid/multimedia/publications/publications/manuals-tools/t101_en.htm
TRANSFORMING OUR WORLD: THE 2030 AGENDA FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT, Editore: Nazioni Unite, Anno edizione: 2015
Directorate-General for Research and Innovation, Open Innovation, Open Science, Open to the World - a vision for Europe, Editore: European Commission B-1049 Brussels, Anno edizione: 2016 https://digital-strategy.ec.europa.eu/en/library/open-innovation-open-science-open-world#:~:text=The%20Three%20Os%20%E2%80%93%20Open%20Innovation%2C%20Open%20Science%2C,science%20and%20innovation%20more%20open%2C%20collaborative%20and%20global.

Technical issues have been playing a relevant role in forensic practice and represent an important aid to those who administer Justice. The typical engineering methods represent a large part of the forensic sciences, and technical experts' role has steadily gained importance in the last decades.
Justice has always sought certain means to assess the factual truth to render fair verdicts. To the investigators and triers of facts, science and techniques appear like the optimal tools to provide a certain representation of facts, based on scientific and irrefutable data.
Unfortunately, science and technique have their own limitations and they can only provide limited information on the events they model. This means that every decision taken based on a scientific judgment of facts has an intrinsic risk of being not fully correct, and it is important, from both the technical and ethical points of view, to consider such limitations.
The objective of this course is to frame the role of the technical experts inside the judicial proceedings and explain how the implicit doubts in the result of every piece of evidence collected through scientific and technical activities shall be quantified and presented to the triers of facts to explain them the risk of a wrong decision.
In this respect, forensic metrology is the branch of forensic science capable of providing a pondered answer to these issues not hiding the important, implicit limits of every technical assessment of the facts to the triers of facts, thus avoiding ethical and penal implications and will be covered by this course.
According to the topics covered by this course, it appears to be in line with UN SDG 16.

After attending this course, students are expected to gain basic knowledge of the legal proceedings, and in particular that required to serve as technical experts, both those appointed by the judge and those appointed by the parties.
They will also build competencies on how to report the results of their technical activities, so that they can be fully understood by the legal counterpart (judges, prosecutors, lawyers, jurors), including the implications related to the limited validity. This part will be covered from a theoretical perspective, providing the technical tools needed to identify the sources of uncertainty and quantify their effects on the validity of the provided expertise as well as the risk of issuing a wrong decision based on such expertise. Practical cases will be then presented and the students will be involved in simulating possible cases in team works.
The Dubliner descriptors associated with this course are DD1, DD2, DD3, and DD4.

The following main topics will be covered:
An overview of the legal systems and legal proceedings
The role of the technical experts inside the legal proceedings
The validation of the results returned by the scientific investigations (in the case of crimes) or scientific analysis of the issues that triggered the legal proceeding (n the case of litigations)
The concept of uncertainty in the expression of experimental results
Methods to evaluate the risk of wrong decision when the decision is based on experimental results
The method for ensuring scientific validity to forensic-science methods
All the above points will be covered also by referring to real cases that will be extensively discussed during classes, showing how a more correct evaluation of the scientific evidence might have avoided cases of miscarriage of justice.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The evaluation consists of a final oral test, during which the students will be asked to present and discuss the topics covered during the course and show their ability to apply them to a hypothetical case study (DD1, DD2, DD3, and DD4).
If the students wish to prepare a written report on a case of their knowledge, analyzing and discussing how the scientific evidence contributed to the solution of the case, the discussion of such a report will be part of the exam and will replace one of the questions asked. The report can be prepared and submitted prior to the exam, but its submission is not mandatory. There is no penalty for not submitting such a report.
In general, the student should prove its ability to discuss the requirements scientific evidence must satisfy, the capability of identifying the origin of uncertainty contributions in the different steps in which scientific evidence is formed, evaluating them and presenting them to the trier of fact, in order to present and quantify a possible doubt about the validity of the collected evidence.

Alessandro Ferrero, Veronica Scotti, Forensic Metrology: An Introduction to the Fundamentals of Metrology for Judges, Lawyers and Forensic Scientists, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2022, ISBN: 978-3-031-14618-3 https://link.springer.com/book/10.1007/978-3-031-14619-0

This teaching course aims at providing insight on the thermal processes involved in the conversion of solar radiation into useful thermal energy in order to characterize the efficiency of solar thermal collectors and assess the performance of solar thermal systems.
The main subjects covered are: estimation of solar radiation availability, optical and thermal characteristics of solar collectors, systems and applications of solar thermal energy, solar thermal systems design and thermo-economic optimization methods.

The student:

• knows the fundamentals of heat transfer and solar radiation, and understands the processes involved in the conversion of solar radiation into useful heat;
• knows the principles of sorption cooling, and is able to describe in both mathematical and graphical terms the operation of sorption cooling cycles;
• knows the hydraulic layout of various solar thermal systems, and understands their operating principles;
• knows the design methods that are used for the thermo-economic optimization of solar thermal systems.
  The student is able to apply the acquired knowledge to:
• develop the thermal efficiency model of different solar thermal collector types;
• define the specifications of the different system components involved in solar thermal plants, including thermal storages, heat exchangers, safety devices, and heating and cooling appliances;
• design solar thermal systems and verify their correct functioning with the help of a computer modelling and simulation tool;
• assess the energy and economic performances of solar thermal systems.
  After passing the exam, the student is able to:
• approach the design of thermal systems complemented by different renewable energy technologies;
• make design decisions independently;
• critically evaluate the impact of design decisions on system performances and costs;
• use technical standards and norms for the energy performance evaluation of solar thermal plants.

FUNDAMENTALS
1. Solar radiation
Characteristics of extra-terrestrial solar radiation and solar radiation at ground level, solar geometry, sky models, instruments and methods for solar radiation measurement. Availability and utilizability of solar radiation.
2. Transmission and absorption of solar radiation
Selected heat transfer topics. Optical properties of covers and mirrors. Transmittance-absorptance product: directional and spectral dependence. Absorbed solar radiation.
3. Flat plate collectors
Energy balance equations for a simple flat-plate collector. Overall heat loss coefficient. Temperature distribution on the collector plate. Fin efficiency, collector efficiency and collector heat removal factors. Liquid and air collectors.
4. Concentrating solar collectors
Energy balance equations for the concentrating collector: concentration ratio. Concentrating systems: fixed, single axis tracking, double axis. Direct normal irradiance (DNI); Intercept factor; Global thermal efficiency; Optical and thermal performances. Characteristics of Sun tracking systems.
5. Performance of solar collectors
Definition of efficiency curve. Test methods for solar collectors: American and European standards.
6. Thermal energy storage
Requirements of thermal energy storage in solar thermal systems. Water storage: thermal stratification. Solid-liquid phase change storage. Seasonal thermal storage. Dimensioning of the storage system: calculation of energy performance and financial aspects. High temperature storages: technologies (molten salts, phase change material, thermocline, concrete), challenges and costs.
SYSTEMS AND APPLICATIONS
7. Active solar thermal systems
Solar water heaters for sanitary hot water production: small-scale systems and multi-family house systems. Solar combi-systems: space heating and domestic hot water production. Solar thermal systems for space cooling. Large scale applications of solar thermal heat: low-carbon and solar district heating.
8. Solar thermal systems design
The solar loop: low-flow and high-flow systems. Collector fields: hydraulic balancing, orientation, series and parallel connection, shadowing. Modified collector efficiency; piping heat losses. Heating loads calculation. Solar fraction.
9. Financial evaluation of solar thermal projects
Key performance indicators in financial evaluations: boundary conditions and uncertainty. Thermo-economic optimization.
10. Simplified design method: F-Chart
Origin of the F-Chart methods. The F-Chart methods for solar water heaters and combi systems.
11. Modelling and simulation tools
Transient simulation of solar thermal systems for hot water production with MATLAB. Worked-out examples of solar system simulations: dimensioning, control strategy implementation, operation optimization.
12. Solar cooling and refrigeration
Thermally driven cooling technologies: absorption and adsorption chillers, desiccant evaporative cooling systems. Solar driven cooling and refrigeration systems.
13. Medium and High temperature applications
Fundamentals of medium and high temperature solar collectors: design of solar concentrators.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The examination consists of a written exam covering the theoretical aspects, and an oral exam covering the system design aspects.
The written exam consists of two to three problems and aims at verifying: i) the knowledge of the fundamentals of solar radiation, optics and heat transfer mechanisms involved in solar thermal energy conversion; ii) the ability to approach the efficiency model of different solar collector types; iii) the knowledge of the operating principles of sorption cooling processes. Clarity of exposition and precision in mathematical formulations are of key importance.
The oral exam consists in the discussion of a project assignment and aims at verifying: i) the knowledge of the operating principles of solar thermal collectors; ii) the knowledge of the methods used in the dimensioning of solar thermal plants; iii) the ability to make suitable design decisions based on specific system boundary conditions and/or operational requirements; iv) the critical evaluation of the project results.
Students carry out the project assignment in groups of two or three, and submit the project report before the date of the written exam.

John A. Duffie & William A. Beckman, SOLAR ENGINEERING OF THERMAL PROCESSES, Editore: John Wiley & Sons, Anno edizione: 1992, ISBN: 0471510564
Keith E. Herold, Reinhard Radermacher, Sanford A. Klein, ABSORPTION CHILLERS AND HEAT PUMPS, Editore: CRC Press, Anno edizione: 2016, ISBN: 149871434X

This course deals with the application of ethical theories to problems created, aggravated or transformed by technology. This course aims at showing how the decision to develop a technology (meant at large), the processes of its design, development, management, control, and production are inherently moral. It is intended to give students a chance to reflect on the ethical, social, and cultural impact of technological applications (in particular AI).
The course includes lectures by the instructor and invited lecturers; class participation will be expected, and students should apply what they learn through reading, lectures, and class discussions by looking at current events through an ethical lens.

Dublin Descriptors
Expected learning outcomes
Knowledge and understanding
Students will:
Acquire a broad perspective on the ethical and social impacts and implications of science and technology;
Be acquainted with normative ethics and normative argumentation;
Learn how to recognize and analyze ethical and social aspects and issues inherent in some technological applications;
Be able to understand how technical problems are inherently connected to a social dimension within a socio-technical perspective.
Applying knowledge and understanding
Students will:
Be able to use critical skills in clarifying and ethically analyzing case-studies involving technology;
Be able to apply ethical theories to problems created, aggravated or transformed by current technologies;
Be able to explore and assess possibilities for solving or diminishing existing and emerging ethical and social problems.
Making judgements
Students will be able:
To autonomously analyze the ethical issues of a technology and to develop a critical analysis on that;
To evaluate and select the appropriate knowledge in the effort of elaborating and justifying a philosophical argument on a topic autonomously selected.
Communication
Students will learn to:
Exercise and improve their skills in a critical writing;
Present in an effective way the results of their research, being able to justify their choices.
Lifelong learning skills
Students will:
Be better prepared to their future professional life in an ethically and socially responsible way;
Be able to analyze problems through an ethical lens.

The course will cover different topics both from a theoretical and a more practical point of view. We will start with a broad analysis of the concept of responsibility, in particular in an engineering perspective, and of normative ethics and its tools. We will discuss ethical questions in the design of technology with a focus on Design Ethics and its Social Ethics paradigm. Then ethics in IT-configured societies will be discussed and technology as the instrumentation of human action will be presented. Topics will include, for instance, the novel framework of Responsible Research and Innovation, Value-Sensitive design, the ethical aspects of technicolgical risks, the relationship among sustainability, ethics and technology, information flow, privacy, and values and uncertainty
Students will be supervised in class sessions in the development of the individual final essay in order to meet the standards required by scientific publications.

Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Type of assessment
Description
Dublin descriptor
Collective presentations
Students are encouraged to:
Develop an argument in which the presented claims are justified by the use of ethical argumentation and the relevant literature;
To present this argument in an oral presentation in class in front of the instructor and their student colleagues.
1, 3
4, 5
Individual written essay
The individual final essay must show that the student has the capacity to read and carefully study the suggested bibliography and the ability to apply it to case-studies;
The individual final essay will be about the ethical issues associated to technologies that require to have developed critical skills in analyzing technical problems with the tools provided by ethical theories and argumentation.
1, 2
3, 4, 5

Ibo van de Poel, Lambèr Royakkers, Ethics, Technology, and Engineering: An Introduction (second edition), Editore: Wiley-Blackwell, Anno edizione: 2023, ISBN: 978-1-119-87943-5
Mattia Andreoletti, Daniele Chiffi, Philosophy of Risk, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2027
Note: If not yet published, an advanced draft of the book will be made available to students.
Behnam Taebi, Ethics and Engineering. An Introduction, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2021, ISBN: 9781316628409

Operations Research, is the discipline concerning the use of the scientific method in decision-making processes. It is of central importance in the treatment of complex systems with quantitative methods. The typical feature of its approach is the analysis and modeling of decision-making systems and the development of efficient algorithms for the purpose of predicting their evolution and identifying choices that will make them evolve toward desired goals.
The teaching will address some of the optimization problems that arise in the industrial and IT fields by drawing inspiration to introduce some of the main methodologies of Operations Research (RO), with emphasis on the modeling and algorithmic aspects.
Methodological learning objectives: Dealing with optimization problems arising in the professional field; abstraction of problems and construction of mathematical models of optimization; application of optimization algorithms to simple examples. Development of solution algorithms; use of optimization software tools.
Secondary learning objectives: Problem analysis skills, group project work, technical presentation. Introduction to "problem solving."

Knowledge and understanding (DdD 1)
Students will learn:

• The mathematical language of optimization models and some classes of models
• The pricipal properties and algorithms (inlcuding worst-case complexity evaluation) for following classes of optimization problems on graph: minimum cost covering tree, minimum path, maximum flow, minimum cost flow, assignment
• The critical path method for project planning
• The algebraic and geometric aspects of linear programming and a solution algorithm
• The main properties of duality, such as strong and weak duality and the conditions of complementary slackness
• The economic interpretation of duality
• The main features of integer linear programming problems
• The method of cutting planes and Gomory cuts
• The Branch and Bound method for integer linear programming problems and other combinatorial optimization problems
• The basic defiiitions of computational complexity
• The structure of heuristic algorithms of the Greedy and Local Search type
• some nonlinear optimization applications.
  Application of knowledge and understanding (DdD 2)
  Students will be able to:
• build mathematical models of optimization from the description of decision problems
• solve the models with optimization software and interpret the results
• identify appropriate optimization algiorithms on graph to address particular optimization problems
• apply optimization algorithms on graph to small examples
• apply the linear programming algorithm to simple examples
• construct the dual and complementary slackness equations of linear programming problems in both numerical and parametric forms
• apply the studied integer linear programming methods (Branch-and-Bound, Gomory cuts) to small examples
• construct heuristic algorithms of the Greedy and Local Search type
  Learning skills (DdD 3, DdD 4, DdD 5)
  Students will actively learn how to tackle complex decision problems with a mathematical and algorithmic approach, which can be adapted and extended to real problems.

1. Introduction to Operations Research
Introduction to optimization: overview of problems with an optimization perspective. Introduction to optimization problems and their formulation. Variables, Constraints and Objective Functions, multi-objective problems. Introduction to Python MIP modeling language and optimization software.
2. Optimization over networks
Graphs and trees; visiting algorithms. The minimum path tree problem. The maximum flow problem. The minimum cost flow problem. The assignment problem. Solution algorithms. Project planning, vehicle scheduling and timetable design problems.
3. Linear Programming
Mathematical theory of duality; pairs of dual problems; theorems of duality and complementary slackness; the primal-dual simpllex method; geometric and economic interpretations. Hints of nonlinear programming. Production mix problems, investment problems, multi-period problems.
4. Integer and combinatorial programming
Discrete linear optimization problems; integer and decision variables. Methods of cutting plans. Decision tree; default and excess evaluations; the Branch&Bound method. Heuristic algorithms: greedy and local search.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
Valutazione continua facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
The assessment mode consists of a written test and an optional laboratory test.
The examination will consist of a first part, a second part and a laboratory examination. The written examination, consisting of the first part and the second part, must be taken on the same day. In case of failure, the overall written exam must be retaken.
The first part is conducted with closed books, with four questions designed to assess the level of knowledge and (applied) understanding of the main concepts, models, results and methods covered in the course, as specified in the expected learning outcomes. Ii particular, it is intended to test the ability to apply the basic optimization algorithms on graphs and networks, linear programming and integer programming seen during teaching, and how to exploit the main properties of problems to derive solutions (DdD1, DdD2).
The first part is worth 17 points. Typical duration is about 1 hour.
In the second part, which is open-book, the student will be asked to answer more creative questions on modeling and algorithm design. The purpose is to test the student's interpretive and modeling skills and autonomy of vision (DdD2, DdD3, DdD4, DdD5).
The second part is worth 10 points. Typical duration is about 1 hour.
Laboratory test
The laboratory test is optional. The lab test will be held remotely only, and there will be a separate date for each session. In the lab test you will be asked to code a part of a model with the language used during the course, run it, and interpret the results. The lab test is open book and worth 4 points. Typical duration is about 1/2 hour. The lab test can be taken asynchronously to the written exam and, for organizational reasons, cannot be repeated (DdD2).
As an alternative to the lab test, a mini lab project will be proposed.
During the course, a realistic optimization problem related to SDGs will be proposed to be solved with the tool used in the lab. A deadline will be set. Those who present the solution correctly will be evaluated and may decide to skip the lab exam. The mini lab project is worth 4 points. The mini lab project can be done in groups of up to 3 students. Typical workload is about 1/2 day. (DdD3, DdD4, DdD5).
Sufficient grade
The exam is passed if the sum of the grades of part 1, part 2 and the lab test is greater than or equal to 17.5.

appunti del docente http://home.dei.polimi.it/malucell/didattica/appunti/materiale.html
F. S. Hillier, G. J. Lieberman, Introduction to operations research, Editore: McGraw-Hill, Anno edizione: 2021, ISBN: 9781260579376

The course focuses on developing students' knowledge of geographic data analysis concepts, methods, and tools. The course aims to provide an exhaustive frame of geographic information: from acquisition to validation, processing and web publishing. Authoritative data, as well as geo-crowdsourced data, are both parts of the course. The Geospatial Web and Spatial Data Infrastructures are also taught. An introduction to Digital Twin Earth and Geospatial Artificial Intelligence, including Geospatial Foundation Models, will be provided. Students are asked to learn the most used desktop and web, proprietary and free open-source software packages (QGIS, ArcGIS, PostresSQL, PostGIS, GeoServer, OpenLayers, OSGEOLive).

Students will learn how to:
Design and develop a Geographic Information System, taking into account the different components
Explore geospatial data and create corresponding thematic maps by using GIS software
Manage geospatial data with advanced GIS functionalities
Design and develop a WebGIS
Given specific project cases, students will be able to:
Detail the corresponding requirements
Manage the geospatial data in proprietary and open source GIS applications
Develop the related webGIS for showing the results of their work
Given a relatively complex problem, students will be able to:
Analyze and understand the goals, assumptions, and requirements associated with that problem and model them
Define the data and architecture for fulfilling the problem
Develop partially or totally the GIS solution
Students will learn to:
Write a document with the specifications of their project
Present their work
Publish their result through a webGIS
Students will learn how to develop a realistic project in the GIS domain.

Introduction to GIS;
Reference and coordinate systems; their transformations.
Map projections: distortions; conformal and equal area maps.
Geographic data models and structures.
Fields: exploring data, spatial statistics, geostatistics
Introduction to Geospatial Artificial Intelligence
GIS and the Internet
WebGIS
Meta information, interoperability
Web Geo Services
The Geospatial Web
Spatial Data Infrastructures and the Digital Twin Earth
Participatory web GIS: citizen science, VGI, geo-crowdsourcing
Applications of GIS in various domains, especially connected with SDGs (webinars also involving external experts, like Heads of GIS Centers of different UN Agencies)
Exercise sessions and a project laboratory are integral parts of the course.
A project will be assigned during the Laboratory hours at the end of the practice. It will be developed by students, under the supervision of academic tutors in small teams of 2-3 members. Project artifacts (requirement analysis, design document, test report, code) are expected to be released at the exam. The evaluation of projects will be based on the produced artifacts and a presentation.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Written examination covering the theoretical part of the course. Oral/practical examination covering Desktop and WebGIS parts of the course, along with a discussion of the laboratory project.
During the exam, students will be evaluated on their understanding of theory, practical skills, and the laboratory project. Scores from these three components will be weighted and averaged to calculate the final score. Theory will account for 1/2, practical skills for 1/3 (Desktop and WebGIS), and the laboratory project for 1/6 of total score. Each part of the exam can be taken separately during different exam sessions. A grade of "30 cum laude" will be awarded if the total score is 31 or higher.

Slides of the course https://webeep.polimi.it/
Note: Geographic Information Systems (GIS)
Pandey, Jatin, Energy and Resources Institute Content Provider, and Darshana Pathak, Geographic Information System, Editore: New Delhi, India: The Energy and Resources Institute, Anno edizione: 2014

Learning Objectives. The course fits into the concentration in Supply Chain (SC) Management of the overall curriculum in Management Engineering, and it contributes to some general learning goals. The course focuses on developing the following capabilities. To identify trends, technologies and key methodologies in the realm of SC Planning. To design approaches, tools and methodologies grounded on a scientific and engineering-based approach (analysis, learning, reasoning, and modeling skills coming from a solid and rigorous multidisciplinary background) to face SC planning problems and opportunities in service-related and industrial environments.
To interact in a professional, responsible, effective and constructive way in a working environment, motivating also team members.

Expected Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this course, the students are expected to demonstrate ability: To identify trends, by assessing the impact of planning activities over SC decisions, in the light of the increasingly growing need to deliver bold SC plans to react to a continuously changing competitive scenario; To design and develop effective global SC plans aligned to corporate strategic plans and critical success factors of the addressed business area. The students will be able to contribute to the main SC decisions ranging from SC configuration to short-term delivery plans for the different SC partners. To successfully interact with professionals from different disciplines and various backgrounds, by identifying the main planning issues and outlining the cause-effect relationships that drive SC performance.

Topics Covered
Amazon, Apple, McDonald's, Procter and Gamble (P&G), Unilever. What do they have in common?
Most of them share outstanding places in Fortune 500 ranking, and all of them – according to Gartner [1] – represent the Masters category, which recognizes sustained SC excellence. The Masters continue to demonstrate advanced lessons for the SC community, and they highlight the accomplishments and capabilities of long-term SC leadership. While the wave of Covid pandemic was sweeping the world, SC disruptions and resilience gained attention in daily news. However, behind resilience and agility – to navigate turmoil effectively and successfully – SC Masters have been restructuring their organizations, transforming business models and redefining markets by blending well-established capabilities with emerging innovations. In the end, SC masters have succeeded in reshaping their own SCs through tremendously effective planning initiatives.
How should we care about SC planning?
In a search for competitive differential advantage, many managers of world–class organizations around the globe have come to realize that differentiating on processes is more sustainable than differentiating on products. Indeed, SC planning is the forward-looking process of coordinating assets to optimize the delivery of goods, services and information from supplier to customer, balancing supply and demand [2]. SC planning looks after current processes – including the ones originated in pure service industries – and determine methods for orchestrating the execution flow, the information flow and the financial flow in SCs.
Who are SC planners?
SC planners have the ability to look at the whole SC from upstream to downstream with both short- and long-term mindset. They also troubleshoot breakdowns along the SC and respond fluidly to unexpected events. We now live in the age of the digital SC, which makes it easier than ever before to understand the intricacies of SCs. SC planners are tech-savvy and they feel comfortable working alongside the world of “machines”: they combine technical and business knowledge (for example the ability to handle forecasting and logistics) with collaboration and communication skills in writing and verbal conversation with a wide range of characters from dock workers to high-level executives and business owners. SC planners do not work in a silo and they do not wait for someone else to do what needs to be done. They are proactive, and they bring out the same drive in others. In the end, SC planners are leaders in the seminal meaning of people who cause others to want to travel with them [3]: they show the way to themselves, to others and to teams.
How should we train the SC planners of the future?
When it comes to SC planning, CEOs typically feel in the dark and they take a back seat, thus overlooking that if an organization really nails its SC planning, it can react to disruptions before they even happen, and quickly transform strategy into execution. We must train SC planners in such a way that they are able to steer their organizations to respond more quickly to market development, and they can lead their organizations on a journey toward prolonged success by forging a greater synergy with their CEOs.
There are at least three major topics SC planners should make their CEOs aware of, before dipping their toes into SC planning: (i) whether company’s SC has been consciously established and improved through a decision-making process, or it has merely evolved, which reveals that probably SC configuration has not received enough attention and your logistics managers do not know why warehouses are located where they are; (ii) whether business and SC strategies are misaligned, as SC plans have much more to do with customers and service than suppliers and cost, which means that a growth business strategy and an aggressive cost-cutting SC strategy do not match; (iii) whether some customers are over-serviced – and then less profitable – as service levels are based on perceived customer needs, but you failed to check whether the reality matches that perception.
What SC planners should bring in their toolboxes?
Some widespread gossip whispers that SC planners are ideal positions for analytical nerds who spend their idle time at work playing Tetris and who would rather solve a Rubik’s cube at the weekend than do anything else. On the other hand, the SC planners of the future are outgoing leaders with outstanding ability to steer effective SC designs: they keep SC plans aligned to business plans, and they improve service levels while reducing costs at once. Hence, a typical SC planning toolbox include: Sales and Operations Planning (S&OP), Collaborative Planning Forecasting and Replenishment (CPFR), Vendor–Managed Inventory (VMI), Direct Delivery Systems (DDS), Available and Capable to Promise (ATP/CTP), multi-plant capacity planning, demand and inventory planning and factory planning.
Syllabus
To properly match the requirements of both Management Engineering (ME) and Management of Built Environment (MBE) courses of study, classes have been arranged into 14 main sessions with a typical format of 3 – 4 hours in a row once a week (typically on Monday morning). The course syllabus has been built around the best path we should set out to properly train the SC planners of the future.
Students will be confronted with various real-life, real-time dilemmas that require cross-functional understanding, collaboration, and leadership.
Sessions L1 to L11 are related to lectures and each of them matches with several case studies, to be practiced in the corresponding session in a flipped mode fashion. Case-studies play a pivotal role in achieving a relevant portion of learning objectives [1], and they will be corroborated by some guest speeches of industrial directors and planners.
The introductory session (L1) is devoted to SCs and SC planning and the presentation of SCOR model (Source, Make, Deliver and Return), while Sessions L2-L4 refer to sustainable, strategic and global SC configuration. L5 refers to the evolution of S&OP through IBP. Then, Session L6 is related to emerging trends and recent advances in make vs. buy SC strategy and the role of SC finance supporting decisions of corporate strategy.
Session L7 is releted to risk mitigation strategies aimed at making SCs resilient to economic and geopolitical disruptions. Session L8 and L9 focus on the impact of customer service and marketing strategies on SC planning process. Session L10 addresses the role of “x”-shoring strategies (like re-, back-, near-) as a response to economic and geopolitical risks.Session L11 outlines the impact of product design on SCs and the interactions between NPD process ad SC management process.
Finally, sessions T1 and T2 include additional practice respectively on sessions L1-L6 and L7-L11, and (upon request) they can be graded as Mid-term exam and Early-bird exam.
The course in a nutshell
L1 Execution, information and financial planning. SCOR model
L2 Strategic SC planning in action: Fisher & Hau Lee Models
L3 Using AI for SC planning
L4 Integrating SC planning and marketing
L5 Global SC planning & distribution networks
L6 SC planning via IBP
L7 S&OP Game
L8 Upsteam SC planning & SC finance
L9 Sustainabile SC planning for circular economy
L10 Mitigating SC risks and creating resilience
L11 Aligning SC planning and NPD process
[1] To see how a typical case-based session should look like, try: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=p7iwXvBnbIE.
The instructor’s standpoint is well highlighted here: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eA5R41F7d9Q&t=44s.
[1] https://www.gartner.com/en/supply-chain/research/supply-chain-top-25
[2] https://www.gartner.com/en/information-technology/glossary/scp-supply-chain-planning
[3] The leadership role is more about the destination, vision, engagement, emotion. To capture a glimpse of leadership, try: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pxBQLFLei70 (2014 commencement speech at UT Austin). A footage is available also with subtitles (and ads): https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TBuIGBCF9jc.
[4] To see how a typical case-based session should look like, try: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=p7iwXvBnbIE.
The instructor’s standpoint is well highlighted here: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eA5R41F7d9Q&t=44s.

Prova scritta facoltativa (a scelta dello studente), con prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
Valutazione continua facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
Grading
All assignments are due by 11:59 PM CET on the due date, usually the day before the corresponding session. For example, when a session is scheduled on Friday, assignments are due by Wednesday at midnight. When a session is scheduled on Monday, assignments are due by Thursday at midnight To accomplish our learning objectives, we use a variety of techniques: readings, written assignments, videos, and discussion. We will often refer to and apply the tools and frameworks from the class when analyzing cases, discussing issues, and treating SC planning problems. One of the real benefits of the course is that you can enhance your learning through productive discussion with peers in the classroom. Contributions are evaluated on the basis on your willingness to constructively challenge and discuss the concepts of SC planning through presentations, case assignments and in-class exercises.
Case discussions are useful as you are supposed to put yourself in the shoes of the executives and take a position on what you would do. Questions have been provided that lead you through important issues to examine. For every question, always consider the pros and cons of each answer, as there are no easy solutions in SC planning. Considering both sides will push you to reconsider the assumptions that often are embedded in each problem setting. Another important part of case analysis is to look at any numerical information provided. The numbers can and should guide you towards both the successes and failures of the company. This portion of the class may involve breakout sessions for teams to generate strategies and tactics from individual analysis for class discussion. Whenever you provide an assessment, try to frame your thinking about the criteria of interest. My experience taught me that disagreements arise since the basis for the decision was predicated on different criteria and therefore agreement became impossible. Being articulate about criteria allows you to speak with each other rather than past each other.
Class participation is scored as a function of the quality of your contributions (i.e. does your comment move the class discussion forward) rather than the quantity of comments. Students are encouraged to refrain from prolonged or misdirected monologues, statements of common knowledge, and confrontations that are not directed at the issue at hand.
The table below summarizes all assignments along with the corresponding grade points. Any item missing will be treated via an oral test taken after the end of the course, by absorbing the corresponding weight.
Item Type Weight Mode
Mid-term Exam Individual 30% Computer aided test
Early bird Exam Individual 30% Computer aided test
Alternatively,
One-shot final exam Individual 60% Comprehensive oral exam (*)
Participation and In teams 40% Content 25%
case discussions Presentations 15%
(*) 100% for students who did not embark into developing their own case and/or did not participate in the sessions devoted to case discussions
Bibliography
Main textbooks
Jacobs, F.R., Chase, R. B., 2018, “Operations and SC Management”, McGraw-Hill.
Cigolini, R., Franceschetto, S., 2021, “Cases in SC Management”, Mondadori
Additional textbooks (in alphabetical order)
Christopher, M., 2016, “Logistics and SC management”, Pearson Education.
Correa, H.G., 2014, “Global SC management”, Atlas
Gattorna, J., Ellis, D., 2019, “Transforming supply chains: realign your business to better serve customers in a disruptive world”, FT Series
Harrison, A., Van Hoek, R., 2014, “Logistics management and strategy: competing through the SC”, Pearson
Ivanov, D., Tsipoulanidis, A., Schoenberger, J., 2019, “Global SC and operations management”, Springer
Johnsen, T., Howard, M., Miemczyk, J., 2014, “Purchasing and SC management. A sustainability perspective”, Routledge.
Mangan J., Lalwani, C., 2016, “Logistics and SC integration”, Wiley
Rushton, A., Oxley, J., Croucher, P., 2017, “Handbook of logistics and distribution management: understanding the SC”, Kogan
I., 2007, “Logistics and SC integration”, Sage
Shah, J., 2016, “SC management: text and cases”, Pearson
Shapiro, J.F., 2007, “Modelling the SC”, Brooks/Cole, Cengage Learning.
Stadtler, H., Kilger, C., 2005, “SC management and advanced planning”, Springer
Waters, D., Rinsler, S., 2014, “Global logistics: new directions in SC management”, Kogan
Videos
The next few videos may represent a thoughtful introduction to some key topics of the course:
SC Planning @ Starbucks: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ElYNhGbOTOQ
SC planning via SCOR model: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=VrX2Qf0OT2M
SC planning via SCOR again: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=sL0vKtpwWP0
What supply planning is: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4iI6La7-U2o
Integrated SC Planning: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fM4xKfLZhFI
A digital SC for the future: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HKnpiDiCe2s
Then, just for the sake of warming you up before starting, you might as well take a glance here.
A look around the notion of SCs & SC Management:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Mi1QBxVjZAw&t=11s
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lZPO5RclZEo&t=2s
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4-QU7WiVxh8
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ZuQ200JAViA&list=PLCD3E338A3E58E906&index=7
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YbM_LydRlnM
SC strategies & the service sector: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mPkgkwb08GU
SC transformation @Intel: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3bE4bHBVB6k
SC-related positions, jobs, roles etc.:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Mh8KCRcQtRM
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HN5dDOGgKVA
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7qGAIaKqAuE
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bQKE5Uu5TNo
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=O6ry5U9pHqE
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kkbc2PUxpY0
Some meaningful examples:
Amazon (old) SC: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Y-lBvI6u_hw
IKEA (unique) Supply Chain: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=DBrl356VhqQ
Walmart SC: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yZC4neLax5o
Relevant journals for further readings (in alphabetical order)
IJLDM: https://www.emerald.com/insight/publication/issn/0960-0035
IJOPM: https://www.emeraldgrouppublishing.com/journal/ijopm
IJPE: https://www.journals.elsevier.com/international-journal-of-production-economics
IJPR: https://www.tandfonline.com/toc/tprs20/current
JOM: https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/journal/18731317
JPSM: https://www.journals.elsevier.com/journal-of-purchasing-and-supply-management
JSCM: https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/journal/1745493x
PP&C: https://www.tandfonline.com/loi/tppc20
SCM: https://www.emerald.com/insight/publication/issn/1359-8546
Related Institutions other than Universities
APICS: http://www.apics.org/
CIPS: https://www.cips.org/

The course aims to provide advanced knowledge and adequate tools for the analysis of the thermal and energy performance of buildings in the context of a global sustainability. This course will introduce the building sustainability concept, shortly labelled “Green Buildings”, and its standardised assessment procedure. Physical modelling and mathematical formulation for achievement and maintenance of thermo-hygrometric well-being and building envelope and HVAC system energy optimization will be also covered, together with a review of transient heat transfer methods needed to analyse the building envelope behavior and assess the thermal energy balance. In particular, the course will focus on the holistic optimization of both the envelope and the systems from a sustainability point of view, together with the achievement of a significant Indoor Environmental Quality. Finally, the student will be introduced to the concepts of sustainability and energy performance of buildings, treating the main aspects of the current technical regulations and legislation in this regard.
The teaching is organized in lessons and in an application part. The latter consists in the building energy simulation laboratory, where the students will develop and analyse by means of a BES tool the case study of a high performance building.

Knowledge:
Knowledge of basic theory on sustainability and its application to buildings and their energy systems
Knowledge of basic theory and practical principles of buildings operational energy performance assessment
Knowledge of the main strategies and technologies for building energy performance optimisation
Knowledge of current technical regulation and legislation on buildings energy performance, Indoor Environmental Quality, and sustainability
Skills:
Understand and assess buildings sustainability
Assess the building energy performance according to quasi-steady state and dynamic approaches
Basic design of technologies and strategies for building energy performance optimisation
General competence:
Critical analysis of buildings energy performance and sustainability
Understanding the physical base and capability to adopt new theory that will be needed in the future.

A) LESSONS PROGRAM
Introduction: definitions of final energy, primary energy content, Global Warming Potential; energy use and environmental impact of the building sector at global, and European levels; energy uses in buildings; operative phase and life-cycle approaches, embodied versus operational energy and emissions; sustainability dimensions, indicators for sustainability in buildings.
Building physics and building energy analysis:
Outdoor environment: weather and climate, meteorological quantities relevant for building energy analysis, measuring instrumentation; solar radiation: extraterrestrial irradiance, scattering and absorption by the atmosphere, solar spectrum at the earth surface, beam and diffuse radiation, availability, declination, solar time, solar coordinates, solar irradiance on a tilted and oriented surface; sky radiation modelling.
Indoor environment:
thermal comfort: definition, human body energy balance, conditions for thermal comfort in the classical theory of comfort, PMV-PPD, local discomfort, adaptive model, measurement of the mean radiant temperature, prescriptive and performative approaches to comfort in standards;
visual comfort: definition, photometric quantities, daylighting, comfort indicators;
indoor air quality: definition, air contaminants typologies and metrics, contaminant mass balance: perfect mixing hypothesis, contaminant removal effectiveness and extended balance; ventilation efficiency, age of the air, room time constant, air flow distribution methods; IAQ assessment methods: pollutants concentration, Perceived IAQ, IAQ design in standards;
acoustic comfort: definition, physical characteristics and quantities, human ear sensitivity and loudness curves; room acoustics: absorption mechanisms, reverberation and reverberation time; noise: sources, transmission ways, façade and partitions insulation indices, noise protection indices and requirements, noise rating and noise criterion curves;
indoor environmental quality: definition, comfort versus health, dimensions and approaches to combine different dimensions into a unique indicator.
Steady state heat transfer across building components: recap of the concept of thermal transmittance or U-value, solar gain through opaque components, solar gain through semi-transparent component, g-value for multiple glazing.
Methods for one-dimensional transient conduction:
finite difference approach: approximations of the first and second derivatives, explicit and implicit schemes, 3 rd kind boundary condition approximation;
finite volumes approach: conditions for lumped parameters validity, energy balance for an internal volume and for a surface node, the EN 52106 Italian National Annex modelling of the walls;
Conduction Transfer Functions approach: Laplace transform and properties, application to the slab with time-dependent boundary condition on one side, response functions in the transform domain, convolution theorem and inverse transform, discrete inputs and Z-transform, CTF coefficients and example;
differences and similarities, pros and cons of the three methods.
Energy balance of the indoor environment:
indoor moist air volume: energy conservation, dry air mass conservation, water mass conservation, sensible and latent energy balances;
indoor enclosure radiative balance, total sensible energy balance for the indoor environment, coupling with transient heat conduction problems in the building envelope, applications: system sizing, time evolution.
building seasonal heating and cooling needs (net useful thermal needs): dynamic hourly methods e.g. building energy simulation approach, monthly method i.e. quasi-steady state approach.
From primary energy use to net useful thermal needs: the energy supply chain, energy carriers, primary energy sources, renewable and non-renewable sources according to EU, primary energy factors: definition according to different conventions and examples, HVAC system decomposition into sub-components, typologies of generators: converters and transformers, sub-components and overall efficiency.
Sustainable or green buildings:
EU legislation concerning Energy Performance of Buildings (EPBDs) and related technical standards: main requirements, energy and environmental performance indicators, methodological framework; Nearly Zero Energy Building, possible definitions for Zero Energy Building (Non- Renewable Zero, Net Zero), Zero Emission Building; Italian legislation on Energy Performance of Building: reference building concept, indicators, requirements, NZEB;
Green building design: holistic approach and fundamental tiers: site design: site analysis, building shape and orientation; building design: efficient technologies for the opaque and transparent envelope; passive strategies and technologies: ventilation cooling: natural drivers and enhancing devices, evaporative cooling, radiative cooling, earth heating and cooling; efficient HVAC systems: a focus on heat pumps, vapor compression and absorption cycles, performances, comparison with gas boilers, ground source heat pump systems; on site RES: a focus on solar energy systems, PV modules, principle of operation, typologies and efficiency, PV systems and Performance Ratio, Solar Thermal Collectors, principle of operation, typologies and efficiency, Solar Thermal systems configurations for DHW, heating and cooling.
B) LABORATORY PROGRAM:
Building energy simulation of a case study: case study characteristics, weather file input, building envelope modelling, building use modelling, peak loads and energy demand calculation, free-floating simulation, HVAC system modelling, energy consumption calculation

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
Final written and oral examination on the main course topics. In the written examination the student has to answer to three/four open questions aiming to assess the ability of:
understanding and analysing building energy performance.
proposing solutions for making the buildings as much as possible sustainable in the proposed contest
and his knowledge of:
basic principles building physics;
buildings sustainability;
sustainable buildings energy systems.
Correction and discussion on the written answers constitute part of the oral examination. The students are also asked to provide a report on the building simulation case study developed during the simulation laboratory.
Based on 100 points, the first part (written+oral) allows to reach a maximum of 75 points, while the second part (report on building energy simuation) 25 points.

Clarke J A, Energy Simulation in Building Design, Editore: Butterworth-Heinemann, Anno edizione: 2001, ISBN: 0750650826
L.D. Danny Harvey, A Handbook on Low-Energy Buildings and District-Energy Systems: Fundamentals, Techniques and Examples, Editore: Routledge, Anno edizione: 2006, ISBN: 9781138965508
ASHRAE, ASHRAE Handbook - 2017 Fundamentals, Editore: ASHRAE, Anno edizione: 2017, ISBN: 978-1939200594

In questo insegnamento, il processo di apprendimento è basato sull'esperienza: gli studenti acquisiscono modelli e strumenti per sviluppare il proprio business partendo da modelli teorici e applicandoli sfruttando l'esperienza e l'attività di mentoring di professionisti, quali imprenditori, venture capitalist, business angels, responsabili di incubatori e acceleratori di impresa, con cui è stato progettato l'insegnamento. In questo primo modulo, gli studenti si concentreranno sullo sviluppo di un'idea imprenditoriale originale e sulla progettazione del modello di business che trasformi l'idea imprenditoriale in una startup e che sarà validato attraverso l'approccio Lean Startup. L'output finale consisterà in un documento scritto che illustri il modello di business e la sua validazione, e in un "elevator pitch" da presentare a un comitato composto da professionisti.

Scopo del corso è di offrire una lettura storica del percorso evolutivo dell'impresa europea nei suoi snodi fondamentali, con particolare riguardo all'innovazione tecnologica. In questa prospettiva sarà collocata anche la storia dell'impresa italiana riferita alle esperienze sia delle maggiori imprese private (Fiat, Olivetti, Pirelli) sia dell'impresa pubblica (Iri), soffermandosi infine sulle ragioni della caduta delle imprese di grandi dimensioni e sull'affermazioni di forme di capitalismo "intermedio". Nella sua parte finale il corso insisterà sulla continuità dei caratteri dell'impresa europea, domandandosi se, all'interno di uno scenario post- globale come l'attuale, essa abbia la possibilità di continuare il percorso lungo il proprio asse o se invece emerga l'opportunità di una contaminazione con altre esperienze modulate da differenti contesti storici.

The goal of the course is to provide students with knowledge to tackle the challenges and to assess the benefits of integrating renewable energy sources with nuclear to effectively support the transition towards a carbon-neutral power grid.
The aim of this module is to provide a general overview of the role of nuclear energy in carbon neutral scenario, highlighting the benefit and challenges of the presence of the nuclear option in the energy mix. The module will focus on the technical aspects of the integration among advanced nuclear plants, renewable energy sources, storage solutions, enhanced grid networks, load-shifting, and flexible backup options.
This module will focus on the use of Modelica code for the modelling and the technical evaluation of the integrated energy systems for the project work.

The students will know and comprehend:
The challenges of the transitions towards a carbon-neutral world and the implications on the power grid
The features of the integration among the different low carbon energy sources
The characteristics of the nuclear reactor concepts for hybrid systems (e.g., Small Modular Reactors and Generation-IV reactors) and the technical challenges from a control and safety point of view
The students will be able to:
Analyze needs and address the challenges of power generation planning and dispatchment in the green energy transition
Use and develop models for the study of low carbon energy sources
Perform a simplified techno-economic analysis of systems characterized by the presence of advanced nuclear reactors, renewables power plant, storage and other components
Exhibit fluency in technical communications with use of accurate scientific terminology.

Introduction to nuclear technology for integrated systems: basic principles of nuclear power plant production with a particular focus to the most promising concepts to be used in the integration with renewables (e.g., Small Modular Reactors and Generation-IV reactors), key plant components involved in the integration with other energy sources and their interface with the electrical grid.
Role of nuclear energy in the energy mix: base load, load-following and frequency control, GHG emissions, environmental footprint and grid stability. Non electrical applications: hydrogen production, district heating, thermal storage, desalination.
Nuclear technical challenges for the integration: principles and goals of nuclear safety, impact of the integration on safety, analysis of the daily regulation on the main power plant parameters, control issues coming from the integration with non-programmable renewable energy sources.
Fundamentals of electricity market: forward/short term market, formation of market price, wholesale market models, zonal vs nodal market, ancillary service & balancing market, capacity market.
Seminar from experts coming from industry, research center and intergovernmental agencies (OECD/NEA, IAEA, …): outlook on the current worldwide situation toward the decarbonization and role of the nuclear/renewable integration.
Techno-economic analysis of a real-world case: use of Modelica language to analyze feasibility and impact of the low-carbon sources integration.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The evaluation consists in an oral examination aimed at verifying the knowledge of the course topics. In particular, the ability to explain the current challenges of the transition towards a carbon-neutral power grid, the ability in analyzing the problem with the proper tools – both from the technical and economic point of view - and the capacity to understand and comment the outcomes of the models are tested and evaluated. In addition, the examination requires also the preparation and the discussion of a scientific report regarding the real-world study case analyzed in the project work. The report should be prepared in advance and sent at least one week before the oral examination.

SELECT UP TO MAXIMUM 3 GOALS AMONG THE FOLLOWING 5, DELETING THOSE NOT PRIOR FOR THIS SPECIFIC COURSE
The course fits into the overall program curriculum pursuing some of the defined general learning goals. In particular, the course contributes to the development of the following capabilities:
Understand context, functions, processes in a business and industrial environment and the impact of those factors on business performance
Design solutions applying a scientific and engineering approach (Analysis, Learning, Reasoning, and Modeling capability deriving from a solid and rigorous multidisciplinary background) to face problems and opportunities in a business and industrial environment
Interact in a professional, responsible, effective and constructive way in a working environment, also motivating group members

The course will allow students to:
1) understand the functioning of some of the main European institutions;
2) know how European decision making and policy is formed;
3) develop policy proposals impacting European firms and citizens;
4) discuss issues and solutions in international teams.

The course will introduce students to the European economic integration, the European instititutions, and various economic policies at the European level. In particular, it will cover a basic framework for the economics of European integration, discussing scale effects, market size, preferential liberalization, growth effects, while providing examples of specific related EU policies.

Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Valutazione continua facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
The final evaluation will be in two parts:
a) Maximum 22 points out of 30: Final written team project which will be a mock European Commission proposal. These proposals will be discussed during some of the practice sessions, allowing students to receive feedback before submitting the final version. This will be graded on a 0-24 scale. There is no possibility to resubmit this project (unless the mark is a fail).
b) Maximum 8 points out of 30: After lectures students will have to undertake an online test on WeBeep (five tests will have to be done). The tests are taken during the beginning of the following lecture, and cannot be taken at a different time. The aim of this is to ensure continous learning during the course. The online test will be open book (without use of internet or AI). All tests will be marked, contributing with 8 marks to the final grade (the average mark of the five tests will be used). You can pass the course without taking these tests.

R. Baldwin and C. Wyplosz, The economics of European integration, Editore: McGraw-Hill, Anno edizione: 2022
Addition readings from the EU website and from websites of other international institutions https://europa.eu/european-union/about-eu_en

At the end of the course the students will be able to:
-anlyze and design complex telecommunication systems based on Internet of Things
-understand and apply complex communication technologies at the very heart of IoT systems
-design communication networks of tiny and constrained devices to enable IoT applications and services
-design IoT systems interconnected with the Internet

1 - Knowledge and understanding
Students will learn how to:
-Analyze complex communication technologies for IoT systems
-Analyze application layer protocols for the IoT
-Analyze management platforms for the IoT
-Identify IoT system components and their relations
-Use operative systems for the IoT
-Use prototyping platforms for the IoT
2 - Applying knowledge and understanding
Students will be able to:
-Dimension and optimize the energy consumption of sensor nodes
-Evaluate the performance of communication technologies for the IoT
-Evaluate the performance of application layer protocols for the IoT
-Evaluate the performance of management platforms for the IoT
-Develop simple applications based on IoT
3 - Making judgements
Students will learn to:
-Understand the fundamental tradeoffs that govern the energy management of battery-operated sensor nodes
-Identify how the fundamental system limitations impact the design of the IoT systems
-Recognize the design space and its degrees of freedom that can be exploited to define communication technologies for the IoT
4 - Communication
Students will learn to:
-describe complex network technologies at different levels of detail

The course will provide the basics on the four major building blocks of the Internet of Things: the reference hardware, the communication technologies, the management platforms and the data storage/processing solutions. The course will start off by overviewing the most common hardware components of sensor nodes, and will then move to addressing the challenges which have to be faced to interconnect and manage such tiny devices. In this field, low power short rannge and long range communication technologies will be reviewd. Finally, the course will describe the main features and requirements of management platform commonly used to orchestrate IoT systems.
Program at a Glance
1-Introduction: the vision of ambient intelligence, application examples, enabling Technologies (Sensor Networks, RFID), networking Building Blocks and Abstractions
2-Hardware Components & Abstractions: sensor node hardware architectures, basics of ADC, energy consumption models for sensor nodes
3-Application layer protocols for the IoT: networking basics, the Constrained Application Layer Protocol (COAP), the Message Queuing Telemetry (MQTT)
4-Communication technologies for the Internet of Things long range solutions: evolution of the mobile radio network to support IoT traffic (LTE-CatM, NB-IoT), examples of Low Power Wide Area Networks (LoraWAN),
5-Communication technologies for the Internet of Things - short range solutions: introduction to capillary network infrastructures, the ZigBee protocol stack (IEEE 802.15.4 PHY/MAC layer, ZigBee Network layer, ZigBee application layer and profiles), Bluetooth and BLE, overview of THREAD and MATTER
6-Radio Frequency Identification: application Scenarios, the Physical Layers of RFID (operation band, transmission fundamentals), Collision Arbitration Standards and Solutions (Tree-based arbitration, frame-aloha based arbitration, the Q-Algorithm, performance evaluation of arbitration protocols)
7-Hands-On Activities: management and prototyping platforms (ThingSpeak, NodeRed, WokWi), analysis of IoT traffic via Wireshark

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
The students will be evaluated through two mutually exclusive ways:
(i) in-course challenges
or
(ii) a final written exam on the topics of the course
The students can decide which type of evaluation is the most appropriate for them,
The written exam includes three exercises and a set of questions on the topics of the course. The students may refer to the course web site to check for templates and sample exams from past year's editions of the course.
The in-course challenges consist in developing mini-projects with fixed delivery deadlines throughout the course. The mini-projects will be organized as follows: one written homework with quantitative/qualitative exercises (similar to those discussed during exercises sessions), three practical mini-projects on the development of IoT applications by leveraging the software tools presented during lectures and lab sessions.
The final grade is
-the grade obtained in the final exam, for those students attending the final exam
-the average gade of the 4 in-course challenges, for those students clearing the course with the challenges. In this case, a short final written exam up to 3 additional points can be given to increase the final grade
The mini-projects can be developed by groups of up 2 students.
The written homework must be done singularly
The students will have to prove in the written exam and in the in-course challenges:
-to have clearly understood and acquired to the topics of the course
-to be able to qualitatively assess all the building blocks of a IoT system (hardware, communication technologies, management platforms and data storage/processing)
-to be able to assess the energy consumption of IoT devices
-to be able to dimension and optimize IEEE 802.15.4 networks
-to be able to evaluate the performances of RFID arbitration systems based on Frame ALOHA and binary trees
-to have acquired and understood the working details of short range (ZigBee, Bluetooth/BLE) and long range (LoraWAN, NB-IoT) communication technologies for the IoT
-to have acquired and understood the working details of IoT application layer protocols (COAP, MQTT)
-to be able to manage the reference software (Node-Red, Thingspeak)
-to be able to analyze IoT traffic
-to be able to build up working IoT application or networking solutions leveraging the aforementioned software
-to be able to produce clear and comprehensive documentaion describing the developed project

Green Chemistry (also known as Chemistry for Sustainability) and Green Engineering are a set of knowledge useful in designing the construction of products, materials, and plants in a manner that has minimal impact on human health and the environment. The course introduce the principles of of these disciplines, providing the tools necessary to quantitatively evaluate different synthetic procedures (chemical and biochemical), industrial risk, and toxicity. Examples from industry, including reaction conditions, alternative solvents, feedstock and intermediates selection, optimization of performance materials, will be discussed as well as emerging trends in bioprocesses and catalysis.
Upon completion of this course you will be able to:
recognize and discuss the major issues related to sustainability
understand the basics of green chemistry/green engineering and recognize green chemical processes and products
understand fundamental considerations on alternative energy sources
understand the nature, reactivity, and environmental fates of toxic organic chemicals
undestand the biochemical basis of biological organisms and the importance of biomass as source of chemicals and energy
undestand the recent trends in industry issues related to sustainability and safety with enphasis on national and international regulations.
understand the societal implications of some environmental problems and the green chemistry proposed solutions

The course is intended to provide students in Engineering Chemistry, Environmental Engineering, Safety Engineering and Material Engineering with an overview of the fundamentals of pollution prevention, green chemistry and green engineering. Students should gain a greater appreciation of how improvements and modifications are being made in both research and manufacturing to maintain and even enhance environmental quality, preventing risks connected with the production and use of harmful or toxic chemicals. It may also assist students and laureates in choosing a professional career in chemical industries and in the environmental-safety sectors. The course includes recent trends in the fundamental re-engineering of chemical process, i.e. process intensification, use of catalysis and non-traditional media and energy sources, green metrics and LCA criteria to evaluate alternative processes and products, etc.. A section is devoted to the role of biomasses as renewable sources that are capable to "green up" the chemical industry and to support sustainable development of the human society, satisfying the demand in energy and materials.At the end of the course, students will have the knowledge to address green and sustainability issues described in the objectives.
In terms of knowledge and understanding (Dublin Descriptor 1), students will be able to:
recognize and discuss the major issues related to sustainability
understand the basics of green chemistry/green engineering and recognize green chemical processes and products
understand fundamental considerations on alternative energy sources
understand the nature, reactivity, and environmental fates of toxic organic chemicals
undestand the biochemical basis of biological organisms and the importance of biomass as source of chemicals and energy
undestand the recent trends in industry issues related to sustainability and safety with enphasis on national and international regulations.
understand the societal implications of some environmental problems and the green chemistry proposed solutions
Regarding the application of the knowledge and understanding acquired (Dulino Descriptor 2), students will be able to:
perform simple green metric calculations on simple chemical reactions
have a broad vision about the issues related to a chemical process and how to move in a more green and sustainable direction
have a broad vision about the issues related to the use of natural resources (fossil and sustainable) and how yo reduce the environmental impact related to their use
Through classroom exercises, students will acquire the ability to make independent judgments (Dublin Descriptor 3), and in particular to:
determine the mass balance and the related green metrics through stoichiometric calculations
formulate hypotheses on how to improve a process or how to choos the best on depending on the effect of experimental variables such as temperature, pressure, solvents, reaction times
evaluate the reasonableness of the result of numerical calculations, based on estimates of the orders of magnitude involved.
Furthermore, students will have improved their communication skills (Dublin 4 Descriptor), using correct technical-scientific terminology to describe green and sustainable materials, their transformations, and energy production.
Finally, students will be able to independently rework, select and summarize (Dublin 5 Descriptor) the concepts relating to the information contained in basic and advanced textbooks, scientific and technical literarure in the field of chemical technologies, in particular in green and sustainable chemistry.

The course is organized in several sections:
1) Sustainability and Principles of Green Chemistry
2) Control of Environmental impact of chemical processes and products,
3) Toxicity,
4) Green metrics,
5) Biopolymers and Natural products,
6) Biotransformation and Biotechnology,
7) Energy Efficiency and Emerging Technologies,
8) Process Intensification,
9) Solvent and feedstock selection,
10) Catalysis for Sustainable Chemistry,
11) Product and Process Alternatives
Description of topics
1) Sustainability of raw materials and energy sources: renewable and not renewable resources – survey of main concerns – 12 Principles of Green Chemistry and Green Engineering – tools and methodologies for the assessment of chemical, toxicological and environmental risk – life cycle analysis of products and processes, indicators – green design of chemicals, polymers, and materials.
2) Toxicology – hazard and exposure – toxicity risk assessment
3) Improvement of environmental performance of existing industrial processes – green metrics – greener production of chemical commodities, materials, and fine chemicals from industry
4) Energy – sources, efficiency, safety: fuel types and their environmental impact – hydrogen economy – unconventional energy sources: microwave, ultrasounds, photochemistry and electrochemistry.
5) Biomasses and Cn building blocks – biopolymers and composites.
6) Bio-refinery: transformation of conventional raw materials into commodities – biocatalysis – energy crops – biofuels – solvents and molecular specialties – biotechnological applications.
7) Catalysis in green chemistry: heterogeneous catalysis (acid, metal, micellar, phase transfer) – supported reagents – homogeneous catalysis – biocatalysis.
8) Alternative solvents for Green Chemistry: VOC – supercritical fluids – ionic/eutectic liquids – gas expanded liquids – polymeric liquids.
9) Mechanical, thermal and chemical recycling: effluent and waste minimization and control – durability of products and materials – recycle of plastics.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, con prove in itinere
Exams consist in the evaluation of how the topics discussed during the course are approached by the student, and includes exercises on green metrics, question about the organic chemistry concepts important in green chemistry, and open questions. There is an intermediate exam in november (written) regarding the first part of the course and the second part (written), together with the full exam (written) in january. The students that pass the first part can do the second part, the other students they will do the full exam. It is a choice of the student, to refuse the first part even if positive (>= 18) an do the full exam. All the other written exames will cover the full program of the course. The student that pass the first part in november can take the second part in january, or february, or june, or july, or september; to pass the whole exam, aslo the grade of the second part has to be >=18, if it is lower, the student has to repeat the full exam.

P.T. Anastas, J.C. Warner, Green Chemistry: Theory and Practice, Editore: Oxford Un. Press, Anno edizione: 2000
Note: Testo Introsuttivo
L. Constable, D. Constable,, Green Chemistry Metrics: Measuring and Monitoring Sustainable Processes, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 2009
Note: testo generale
M. Doble, A.Kumar, Green Chemistry and Engineering, Editore: Academic Press, Anno edizione: 2007, ISBN: 0123725321
Handbook of Green Chemistry, Editore: Wiley VCH, Weinheim, Anno edizione: 2013, ISBN: 978-3-527-33710-1
Note: Set I: Green Catalysis, (Vol. 1: Homogeneous - 2: Heterogeneous - 3: Biocatalysis);
II: Green Solvents (- Vol. 4: Supercritical Solvents -: Reactions in Water - 6: Ionic Liquids);
III: Green Processes (Vol. 7: Green Synthesis - 8: Green Nanoscience - 9: Designing Safer Chemicals)

This soft-skills course aims to introduce foreign students to the fundamentals of Italian culture within the broader context of European history and culture. The course is divided in two units.
In Unit 1 (3 credits) students will learn about the main events in the history of Europe and Italy and about their socio-cultural implications, with special attention to contemporary issues. Students will also learn about key artistic and literary movements within this broad historical context.
In Unit 2 (2 credits), the focus will be on Italian contemporary literature, focusing on the potential intersection of literary research with pressing contemporary issues, such as ecology, mental health, and human and civil rights.
The goal of the course is to provide students with a deeper understanding of the social and cultural context in which they are studying and living and in which they might work in the future. Given the variety of topics and subjects, which will span art, literature and cinema, lectures will make considerable use of multimodal resources.

At the end of the course students will have developed an understanding of Europe's and Italy's cultural past and present, and will be able to use these competences to interpret current socio-cultural issues. A special focus on Italian history of the 19th-20th centuries will enable students to understand Italy’s cultural landscape and the basic structure of Italian society. They will also be able to understand and appreciate cultural artefacts in a culturally competent manner.
In Unit 2, the course will explore Italian contemporary literature, using debates and literary objects as a way to face pressing contemporary issues, such as ecology, mental health, and human and civil rights.
During the course, team-work will be frequently used to improve students' communication skills, especially in relation to topics they are not familiar with, from both a disciplinary and cultural viewpoint. Most lectures include an analysis of a specific cultural object: students will learn to apply analytical techniques to a variety of artefacts, and will eventually be able to use them autonomously. At the end of the course, students will be able to discuss in detail a single cultural object, discussing and assessing its main historical and formal features.

Unit 1 (3 credits)
A first series of lectures will focus on European history, from Ancient Grece up to the 19 th century; by learning about the foundations of European civilisation, focusing especially on its early times, international students will gain a better understanding of the contemporary western world. This historical background is a prerequisite for approaching the study of culture: the course will deal with the fundamentals of western literature, religion, art and cultural imaginaries. Moreover, the historical part will provide an overview of contemporary Europe both as an institution and a cultural entity.
The second part of this Unit is mainly dedicated to Modern Italy. Lectures will mainly deal with the history of Italy from unification (1861) to the present day. Students will have an opportunity to discuss crucial cultural problems, spanning politics, literature, cinema and local customs. Special attention will be paid to social imaginaries and narratives, which will be used as an entry point for a critical approach to the investigation of identities and cultural trends.
Unit 2 (2 credits)
In the second part, the course will explore Italian literature—with forays into cinema and the arts—focusing particularly on the thematic aspects of the reflections of major authors: Calvino’s ecological anxieties, Primo Levi’s unique blend of science and literary inquiry, and the distinct ways Ginzburg and Morante retell History. In short, the second part of the course will provide an opportunity to delve deeper into events and themes highlighted in the first part, using different approaches and languages.

Prova scritta facoltativa (a scelta dello studente), senza prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
The examination for 5-credit students is composed of three parts: a group presentation, a written test about unit 1 and an interview about the contents of the whole syllabus.
3-credit students will give the group presentation and sit the written test about unit 1 or, alternatively, an oral interview about the sylllabus of the same unit.
Attending students will study the content of the lectures based on the power point presentations and other materials uploaded on Beep, as well as on the compulsory references books (see references section). In gr
Non-attending students will study the recordings of the lectures, the power point presentations, the compulsory reference books and the other materials uploaded on Beep. Additionally, they are required to read the book Modern Italy. A Very Short Introduction by Anna Cento Bull (see references section).

Ernst Hans Gombrich, A Little History of the World, Editore: Yale University Press, Anno edizione: 2008, ISBN: 978-0-300-14332-4
Christopher Duggan, A Coincise History of Italy, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2014, ISBN: 978-0-521-74743-1
Note: Second Edition
Anna Cento Bull, Modern Italy. A Very Short Introduction, Editore: Oxford University Press, Anno edizione: 2016, ISBN: 978-0-19-872651-7
Jeremy Black, A Brief History of Italy, Editore: Robinson, Anno edizione: 2018, ISBN: 978-1-47214-088-3
John Foot, Modern Italy, Editore: Palgrave Macmillan, Anno edizione: 2003, ISBN: 978-0-333-66905-1
Zygmunt G. Baranski, Rebecca J. West, The Cambridge Companion to Modern Italian Culture, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2001, ISBN: 9780521559829

Lithium-ion batteries (LIBs), first released to power camcorders, have revolutionized the society leading to cell phones market penetration in the 90’s (then laptops, smartphone connected werables etc…) and finally to the connected society we are living in today. Thanks to recent development in LIBs technology, EV cars with ranges above 500 kms are expected and battery production in the EU is expected to reach a 250 Billion€ market within the current decade. The paramount importance of LIBs in modern society was established by the 2019 Nobel Prize awarding in Chemistry to LIBs inventors. LIBs are leading the forthcoming energy transition but new energy storage technologies are quickly raising.
The course will bring students to the understanding and knowledge of the key electrochemical energy storage technologies able to drive the energy transition, focusing on the state of art as well as the new coming challenges. The first part of the course (module 1) is focused on LIBs technology: from the concept of insertion electrodes to the materials used to their designs and manufacturing process, including sustainability aspects of production. In the second part (module 2), safety and critical aspects related to battery materials supply chain and recycling are considered. Moreover, new generation lithium batteries, beyond Li-ion, are explored. In particular, non-Li chemistries such as Zn-based batteries, supercapacitors and technologies for long duration storage, e.g. redox flow batteries, are introduced and discussed within the framework of the energy transition and resilience.

In the framework of course and exam preparation and evaluation, students will:

• learn the working principles of LIBs and post-LIBs technologies (DdD1);
• understand the principle of battery design, for a specific target e.g. high energy or high power (DdD1);
• understand the challenges and opportunities in the forthcoming energy transition in relation to the development of LIBs and next-generation batteries (DdD1);
• critically analyze the energy technologies' strengths and weaknesses in relation to the various application fields (DdD2);
• be able to do an autonomous literature review and communicate the results of their activity with clarity and proper language (DdD2).

Li-ion batteries: the key feature of LIBs technologies.
History
Electrochemical working principles
Materials (active and inactive materials)
Safety
Post LIBs: working principles and materials
Li-metal batteries (LMBs)
Lithium-Sulfur batteries (LSBs)
Design rules for LMBs and LSBs
The European scenario and EU objectives:
Supply chain
Recycling
Beyond Li chemistries: working principles, materials and challenges for non-Li based chemistries.
Panorama of the non-Li batteries (Na-ion, K-ion, Zn-ion, etc.)
Supercapacitors
Long-duration energy storage (LDES)
Redox flow batteries
Design rules for LDES
The course will be inclusive of laboratory demonstration and activities related to LIBs materials, electrode preparation, battery assembly and testing.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Students are requested to prepare a.ppt presentation on a specific topic in the framework of the course. The topic must be approved by the teachers and presentation will be followed by Q&A session.

Location has become a crucial information for a wide range of services, many of which fall in the area of transportation. Modern transportation systems, often referred to as smart mobility or intelligent transportation systems (ITS), rely on information and communication technologies (ICT) to improve safety, sustainability and quality of mobility. Fundamental is the knowledge of position/velocity of vehicles, people and assets, either single entities or aggregates (i.e., traffic flows). Global navigation satellite system (GNSS) is the dominant technology in open sky, but severe propagation conditions (indoor, urban canyons) or critical performance requirements (accuracy, latency reliability) call for the integration with augmentation technologies, based on wireless networks, radar, and inertial systems.
The goal of this course is to teach students the fundamentals of localization, navigation and communication technologies for connected mobility. Specific objective are i) to provide a basic understanding of wireless technologies and processing methodologies for radio localization, including satellite navigation and wireless positioning based on cellular or short-range networks; ii) to investigate location-based services and technologies for smart mobility, focusing on communication systems for road safety and traffic efficiency, traffic monitoring systems, models and processing methodologies for traffic analytics, vehicular networks for cooperative intelligent transportation systems.
Lessons are integrated with seminars by experts from academia and industry. The course includes interactive activities and exercises carried out in Matlab environment with students organized in groups, aimed at the simulation and assessment of localization/mobility systems in practical use-cases. Laboratory activities will be carried out on use-cases and data defined in collaboration with companies of the sector.

Dublin Descriptors
Expected learning outcomes
1. Knowledge and understanding
Students will be able to:

• understand architectures, elements and signal processing methodologies of wireless positioning systems;
• understand sensing, processing and communication technologies for ITS;
• define mathematical models for formulation and analysis of a navigation problem;
• learn dynamic models and tracking filters for mobile scenarios.
  2. Applying knowledge and understanding
  Student will be able to:
• apply the mathematical models to design positioning algorithms and assess the related performance;
• apply dynamic models and tracking filters to practical scenarios of smart mobility.
  3. Making judgements
  Students will be able to:
• identify suited positioning technologies for different application scenarios;
• identify how the network deployment and measurement limitations impact on the system performance.
  4. Communication
  Students will be able to:
• describe the learned technologies, at different levels of details, also comparing them with respect to specific aspects;
• present a project consisting in the simulation of a localization/mobility problem, implementation of a selected methodology and evaluation of the performance (non mandatory);
• interact with other colleagues during laboratories and project discussion.
  5. Lifelong learning skills
  Students will be able to:
• learn the operating principles and potential of new emerging communication technologies for localization and connected mobility;
• learn how to develop a software prototype, assess the performance and validate it by numerical simulations.

Part I - Fundamentals of localization and navigation
Location-based services, location measurements (TOA, TDOA, AOA, RSS), infrastructures and protocols, spatial-temporal reference systems, positioning methods (multi-lateration/angulation, proximity sensing, fingerprinting, dead reckoning, hybrid approaches), navigation equations and algorithms, accuracy and geometric dilution of precision, dynamic models and filters for mobile positioning (Kalman, grid-based and particle filters).
Part II - Wireless technologies for indoor/outdoor applications
Positioning systems based on cellular and short-range networks (cellular, LPWAN, WiFi, Bluetooth, ZigBee, UWB, RF-ID), satellite navigation (GPS, Galileo, GNSS, Beidou) and augmentation systems, hybrid and advanced technologies (passive radio imaging, cooperative and distributed systems for multi-agent localization/tracking), examples and applications.
Part III - Smart mobility systems
Introduction to ITS, fundamentals of traffic modelling and control, technologies for traffic monitoring, processing methods for traffic analytics, communication systems for road safety and traffic efficiency, cooperative ITS (C-ITS), vehicle-to-anything (V2X) communication for assisted/automated driving, examples and applications.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The exam consists of a written test (2-3 numerical exercises and questions on the course contents). Students can integrate the written test result with either a project on a topic assigned by the teacher and her collaboratos, or an oral test on the course contents. In case of no project/oral, the final mark is the one obtained in the written test clipped to maximum 27/30. The project can add up to 4 points, the oral can add up to 2 points. Live question sessions (optional) are organized during the lessons, to facilitate self-assessment, contributing to up to 4 extra points; quizzes can be done only in presence.
The instructor reserves the right to require an oral examination.
Details on examination phases and modalities are in the table below.
Type of assessment
Description
Dublin descriptor
Written test (mandatory)
Numerical exercises.
Open-ended questions.
Close form question (true/false).
1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Project (optional)
The project consists in the development of a software prototype of a localization/mobility system in Matlab and assessment by simulations. The topic is assigned during the lab lessons and remains valid for the whole academic year (till Jan-Feb session included). It can be developed individually or in group.
Few days before the discussion of the projects with the teachers, students are required to submit their presentation file and source codes.
Software tools for project development will be acquired during the laboratory hands-on activities: students will have the opportunity to work on practical use-cases, practicing with real data acquired during experimental tests and/or projects in collaboration with companies of the sector.
2, 3, 4, 5
Quiz (optional)
Live question sessions are organized during the term for self-assessment. Quiz tests can be done only in presence.
1, 2
Oral test (optional)
Oral test on course contents.
3, 4, 5

Course website on the webeep platform of Politecnico di Milano: lecture notes; laboratory notes and codes; seminars by experts on positioning, navigation and smart mobility, from university/industry (approx. 2-3 seminars per year, since 2010-2011); projects by former students; examination papers; further material and information. www.polimi.it
A. Küpper, Location-based Services. Fundamentals and Operation, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 2005
Note: Part 1 of the course - Fundamentals of localization and navigation
A. Bensky, Wireless Positioning Technologies and Applications, Editore: Artech House, Anno edizione: 2008
Note: Part 2 of the course - Terrestrial radio positioning
A. C. García, S. Maier, A. Phillips, Location-Based Services in Cellular Networks from GSM to 5G NR, Editore: Artech House, Anno edizione: 2020
Note: Part 2 of the course - Terrestrial radio positioning
R. Prasad e M. Ruggieri, Applied Satellite Navigation Using GPS, GALILEO, and Augmentation Systems, Editore: Artech House, Anno edizione: 2005
Note: Part 2 of the course - Satellite radio positioning
P. D. Groves, Principles of GNSS, Inertial, and Multisensor Integrated Navigation Systems, Editore: Artech House, Anno edizione: 2007
Note: Part 2 of the course - Satellite radio positioning
E. D. Kaplan e C. Hegarty, Understanding GPS: Principles and Applications, Editore: Artech House, Anno edizione: 2005
Note: Part 2 of the course - Satellite radio positioning
B. Dalla Chiara, ITS nei trasporti stradali, Editore: EGAF, Anno edizione: 2013
Note: Part 3 of the course - Intelligent transportation systems
C. F. Daganzo, Fundamentals of Transportation and Traffic Operations, Editore: Pergamon-Elsevier, Anno edizione: 1997
Note: Part 3 of the course - Intelligent transportation systems
Claudia Campolo, Antonella Molinaro, Riccardo Scopigno, Vehicular ad hoc Networks - Standards, Solutions, and Research, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2015, ISBN: 978-3-319-15497-8
Note: Part 3 of the course - Cooperative ITS
Markus Dillinger, Mikael Fallgren, Toktam Mahmoodi, Tommy Svensson, Cellular V2X for Connected Automated Driving, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 2021, ISBN: 978-1119692645
Note: Part 3 of the course - Cooperative ITS

Machine learning deals with the problem of building programs that learn from experience. While artificial intelligence focuses on the representation of knowledge and the algorithms for reasoning about such knowledge, machine learning deals with the problem of extracting knowledge from experience gathered solving problems to be used to solve unseen instances of similar problems.
This course provides the theoretical and methodological foundation of machine learning methods and algorithms that are used in several application areas, including, Data Mining, Robotics, Autonomous Agents, Bioinformatics, Recommender Systems, Social Networks, etc.

Dublin Descriptors
Expected learning outcomes
Knowledge and understanding
Students will learn how to:
Model supervised learning and reinforcement learning problems
Train their models
Select the model complexity
Evaluate the performance of their models
Applying knowledge and understanding
Given specific project cases, students will be able to:
Model the learning problem
Select the most appropriate learning technique
Tune the hyperparameters of the studied techniques
Assess the performance of the learned model.
Making judgements
At the end of this course, students will be able to:
Correctly assess the performance of the proposed solutions
Be aware of fairness issues involved in the training of machine learning methods
Lifelong learning skills
Students will learn the trade-off between bias and variance and hot to manage it by selecting the proper complexity of the learning model
Students will learn to develop algorithms to solve relevant learning problems.

Introduction (1 class)
Basic concepts.
Learning theory. (4 classes)
Bias/variance tradeoff. Union and Chernoff/Hoeffding bounds.
VC dimension. Worst case (online) learning.
Practical advice on how to use learning algorithms.
Supervised learning. (8 classes)
Supervised learning setup. LMS.
Logistic regression. Perceptron. Exponential family.
Kernel methods: Radial Basis Networks, Gaussian Processes, and Support Vector Machines.
Model selection and feature selection.
Ensemble methods: Bagging, boosting.
Evaluating and debugging learning algorithms.
Reinforcement learning and control. (6 classes)
MDPs. Bellman equations.
Value iteration and policy iteration.
TD, SARSA, Q-learning.
Value function approximation.
Policy search. Reinforce. POMDPs.
Multi-Armed Bandit.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
The assessment will be based on a written exam at the end of the course, where both theoretical competence and modeling skills will be tested.
Type of assessment
Description
Dublin descriptor
Written test
Solution of numerical problems: exercises on supervised learning and reinforcement learning problems
Solution of modeling problems: exercises where the student needs to properly model the machine learning problem and choosing the most appropriate solution technique
Theoretical questions with open answers.
1,2
1,2,3,5
1,2,5

Christopher M. Bishop, Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning, Editore: Springer-Verlag Berlin, Heidelberg, Anno edizione: 2006, ISBN: 0387310738 https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/research/people/cmbishop/prml-book/
Richard S. Sutton and Andrew G. Barto, Reinforcement Learning: An Introduction, Editore: MIT Press, Cambridge, MA, Anno edizione: 2018, ISBN: 0262039249 http://incompleteideas.net/book/the-book-2nd.html
Murphy, K. P., Probabilistic Machine Learning: An introduction, Editore: MIT Press, Anno edizione: 2022 https://probml.github.io/pml-book/book1.html
Deisenroth, A. Aldo Faisal, and Cheng Soon Ong, Mathematics for Machine Learning, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2020 https://mml-book.com/

This course is designed to equip students with the concepts and tools of sustainability and impact management in a world increasingly shaped by complex and interdependent challenges. In this evolving context, economic actors are rethinking their strategies, operations, and impact in response to sustainability imperatives that can no longer be addressed through traditional approaches alone. Students will develop radical management mindset and capabilities to engage with the enabling infrastructures, such as regulatory frameworks, measurement systems, technology, and finance mechanisms, that support and guide sustainable transformations. The course provides an updated lens to reinterpret core managerial concepts, including strategy, technology management, finance, and performance measurement, within the context of impact-driven business models and emerging economic paradigms. The course explores evolving market dynamics, corporate models, and entrepreneurial approaches explicitly designed to tackle societal issues while generating positive impact. Through a combination of theoretical insights, case studies, and practical tools, students will learn how strategy, innovation, finance, and impact management systems can be reshaped to serve both social purpose ventures and mainstream organizations committed to sustainability.
By the end of the course, students will be able to interpret the complex and systemic interrelations among societal challenges, technological innovation, market disruptions, and purpose-driven corporate and entrepreneurial models. In particular, the course contributes to the development of the following capabilities:
Understanding the concept of impact and sustainability management and the foundations of purpose-driven corporate and entrepreneurial models. The distinguishing feature of such models is the proactive pursuit of solutions to societal problems along with economic sustainability and profit.
Designing innovative solutions through the application of scientific approaches (Analysis, Learning, Reasoning, and Modeling capability deriving from a solid and rigorous multidisciplinary background) to face societal challenges and seizing related opportunities, developing system-changing ideas, scaling solutions and translating them into long-term oriented, sustainable business models;
Interpreting real-world situations and learning from case studies;
Interacting in a professional, responsible, effective and constructive way in a working environment, also motivating group members.

On completion of the course, students will be able to:
Understand the concept of impact and sustainability management, and how purpose-driven corporate and entrepreneurial models respond to emerging societal challenges and opportunities within the impact economy.
Grasp the foundations and real-world applications of impact and sustainability management as a key driver of systemic transformation.
Reinterpret core managerial notions, such as strategy, technology, performance measurement, and finance, through the lens of purpose, sustainability and impact.
Design innovative, impact-oriented business models for ventures addressing societal challenges, and develop coherent management strategies.
Apply managerial tools and develop competencies to face the specific challenges that characterize organizations committed to tackling societal issues.
Understand the role of technology as an enabler of systemic change and as a strategic asset in sustainability-driven transformation.
Use frameworks and tools to measure and manage organizational performance in relation to societal impacts.
Analyze and compare financial instruments and approaches that aim to generate measurable societal impact alongside financial returns.
Learn how to scale ventures oriented toward societal impact by leveraging ESG criteria, impact finance, and hybrid growth strategies.
Communicate ideas and concepts effectively in both oral and written form, through case study discussions, presentations, and assessments.

I – THE EMERGENCE OF THE IMPACT ECONOMY
Societal challenges and the pursuit of a new form of capitalism
The evolution of management theory and practice through successive waves of capitalism
Emerging infrastructures enabling innovation and management: purpose, sustainability, and impact
Fundamental principles of the impact economy
II – CORPORATE AND ENTREPRENEURIAL APPROACHES TO SUSTAINABILITY AND IMPACT
The role of companies in the transition to an impact economy
Redefining corporate purpose: aligning business with societal value
Legal and organizational frameworks for impact-oriented enterprises
Sustainable and impact-driven business models
Strategies for scaling purpose-driven companies
Technology and innovation as enablers of impact
Impact measurement and management in the corporate context
III – FINANCE FOR SUSTAINABILITY AND IMPACT
The emergence of novel purpose-driven financial approaches
Disintermediation, ethics, and values: alternative finance models
Applying ESG criteria for long-term risk protection: responsible finance
Value-based financial approaches and instruments: sustainable finance
Investing in solutions: microfinance and impact finance
IV – ECOSYSTEMS AND POLICIES FOR SUSTAINABILITY AND IMPACT
The emerging role of the Entrepreneurial State
New forms of Public-Private Partnerships for impact
Social Innovation Ecosystems as enabler of impact

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
Altro
The final test will be:
a MANDATORY written exam for ALL students and it covers the slides, primer, case studies (including testimonials) discussed in class
an OPTIONAL oral exam where students are asked to critically discuss the theoretical concepts and show an original interpretation of the additional readings provided by the Professor.
The assessment is based on the knowledge of the theories and on the student’s ability to prove their understanding of their application in real-world situations.

A Primer in Management for Sustainability and Impact
Note: During the course, a Primer will be provided as well as additional readings and case studies.

The course aims at providing knowledge, skills and tools needed for analyzing, understanding, and assessing strategic decisions about energy management. The course provides students with methods and tools to analyse the context, understand the main trends and phenomena affecting the energy industry, assess the different alternatives a company has in the management of energy, in the light of the ongoing decarbonization path.
The course starts by providing a global framework of the current scenarios characterizing the energy sector and the main evolutionary trends enabling its decarbonization. Then, it focuses on the market and industry dynamics related to “traditional” sources ( oil&gas and electricity sectors ), as well as renewable energy sources (such as photovoltaic and wind energy ). Energy efficiency and the emerging paradigms (also enabled by the spread of digital technologies ) such as smart buildings, energy communities, and smart mobility are further investigated. Finally, two of the most promising emerging options to decarbonize the energy sector are addressed, i.e. energy storage systems and hydrogen. Across the different topics mentioned above, the role of technological innovation and regulatory framework is assessed, as well as the current and emerging market opportunities for companies, to provide students with a comprehensive view and understanding of the phenomena.
The discussion of business cases, together with guest lectures held by executives and managers, will encourage students to examine and get familiar with the abovementioned topics as well as their strategic and practical implications for companies.
The course fits into the overall program curriculum pursuing some of the defined general learning goals. In particular, the course contributes to the development of the following capabilities:

• Understand context, global framework, market and industry dynamics in the energy field and their mutual effects on business, economy, environment and society
• Identify trends, technologies, key methodologies and stakeholders needs in the energy domain

EXPECTED LEARNING OUTCOMES
Dublin Descriptors
MsC Learning goals – Management Engineering
Expected learning outcomes
DdD 1: Knowledge and understanding
Understand context, global framework, market and industry dynamics in the energy field and their mutual effects on business, economy, environment and society
Students will:
Understand and interpret the role of energy management in the current competitive environment and its evolution
Understand the market and industry dynamics in the energy industry
Understand the impact of the technological innovation and of the regulatory framework in the energy field
DdD 2: Applying knowledge and understanding
Identify trends, technologies, key methodologies and stakeholders needs in the energy domain
Students will:
Apply the appropriate tools to analyze the competitive environment in the energy industry
Identify the critical decisions in the management of energy by firms
Discern and select the appropriate strategic approaches to energy management
Identify the main opportunities to launch new businesses in energy domain

Basics of energy & sustainability. The current scenarios characterizing the energy sector.Energy sources and uses at global level; Top Countries in production and use of energy; Evolutionary trends enabling its decarbonization; Emission Trading Scheme (ETS) and other enabling mechanisms.
Market and industry dynamics in the electricity sector. Electricity industry value chain; Electricity markets overview; Power generation technologies: technical and economic performance.
Market and industry dynamics in the Oil&Gas sector. Global Market dynamics; Technologies & Business Models (Revenues, Margins, Organization) in the oil&gas industry; Analysis of top players at global and European level; Decarbonization trends in the Oil&Gas industry.
Market and industry dynamics in the renewable energy sector. Global Market dynamics; Renewable energy technologies overview (e.g., PV, Wind, Hydropower); The evolution of the regulatory framework in Europe related to energy production from renewable energy sources and its impact on industry dynamics; Existing and emerging Business Models (Revenues, Margins, Organization) in the renewable energy industry (e.g., Power Purchase Agreement, Power-to-gas).
Market and industry dynamics in the energy efficiency sector. Global Market dynamics; Energy efficiency technologies overview (e.g.,electric engines, VSDs, building insulation) for buildings and industrial processes. The evolution of the regulatory framework in Europe related to energy consumption and energy efficiency (incentives, obligations, certifications) and its impact on industry dynamics; Existing and emerging Business Models (Revenues, Margins, Organization) in the energy efficiency industry (e.g., Energy Performance Contracts).
Smart Ecosystems. The role of digital technologies in the energy domain; Integrating new technologies for producing, using and storing energy in local environments (energy communities) as well as in buildings (smart buildings). Business cases and examples of energy communities and smart buildings.
E-mobility. Emerging trends (e.g., electrification, sharing, autonomous driving) that are reshaping "traditional" mobility towards "smart mobility"; e-mobility enabling technologies overview (e.g., e-cars, charging infrastructure); the evolution of the regulatory framework in Europe related to electric vehicles and its impact on industry dynamics; Existing and emerging Business Models (Revenues, Margins, Organization) in the electric vehicles charging services (e.g., Charging Point Operators, Mobility Service Providers).
Cross-sectoral decarbonization enablers. Hydrogen and energy storage systems: global market dynamics; technologies and production processes overview (e.g., blue hydrogen via CCUS, green hydrogen via electrolizer); the evolution of the regulatory framework in Europe related to hydrogen and its impact on industry dynamics; existing and emerging business models.
The course leverages the following teaching methodologies:
Traditional lessons, providing theoretical background
Seminars with company guest speakers
Group work on a company problem (project work)

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The final course evaluation is based on:
Oral exam: it is based on the topics of the course and is intended to evaluate a student’s ability to discuss and link different topics.
Project work: The project should take the form of a systematic analysis of one of the topic covered in the course (or close to the ones covered in the course), by making use of the methods and tools introduced and discussed in class; it is to be implemented in a group of 4-5 students. The project is intended to evaluate a student’s ability to critically analyse a novel problem and discuss possible alternative solutions, by integrating different perspectives and contributions emerging within the team. The project work output is evaluated at the end of the semester (no intermediate evaluations).
Composition of the final grade: Oral exam = 100%; Project work report and presentation (optional) from -2 to +2 on the grade of the oral exam.

Statica di sistemi isostatici di travi: reazioni vincolari ed azioni interne nei sistemi piani.
Stato di sforzo e deformazione nel continuo: sforzi e deformazioni principali, circonferenza di Mohr, stati piani di sforzo e deformazione
Legame elastico lineare. Costanti elastiche e loro determinazione. Energia di deformazione.
Problema di Saint Venant: azione assiale, azione flettente, torsione nei cilindri e nei profili sottili chiusi ed aperti, flessione composta con taglio: trattazione approssimata.
Analisi di sistemi deformabili con il metodo della linea elastica ed il principio dei lavori virtuali.

Obiettivo dell’insegnamento è permettere agli studenti di acquisire competenze di progettazione di sistemi elettronici basati su microcontrollori, sia per quanto riguarda la progettazione hardware di schede che per lo sviluppo del firmware (in Assembly) e del software di più alto livello (in linguaggio C). L’insegnamento presenta le architetture interne dei microcontrollori ad 8 bit di Microchip e di STMicroelectronics.
Oltre alle lezioni teoriche su architetture, memorie e periferiche interne (12 ore in aula), l’insegnamento verterà su esercitazioni pratiche svolte in modalità laboratorio informatico (14 ore) per lo sviluppo di firmware e routine e su laboratori sperimentali pratici di tipo “hands-on” (24 ore), in cui ogni singolo studente utilizzerà una scheda di sviluppo a microcontrollore, ambiente CAD di sviluppo, e linguaggi di programmazione (assembler e C). In particolare verranno impiegate schede di sviluppo di MikroElektronika, basate su microcontrollori PIC della Microchip.
Nei laboratori pratici, gli studenti saranno divisi in sezioni di circa 30 studenti; ogni sezione frequenterà un laboratorio di 2 ore e mezza consecutive a settimana (a scelta tra i giorni previsti nel calendario), per circa 2 mesi, ovvero un totale di 10 laboratori di 2:30 ore ciascuno, per un totale di 24 ore di laboratorio sperimentale pratico, per ciascuno studente.
Dei 5 CFU dell’insegnamento, 3 CFU saranno erogati in modalità Didattica Innovativa di tipo “Blended Learning” e “Flipped Classroom”, in cui lo studente sarà coinvolto attivamente nelle esercitazioni e nelle attività pratiche di laboratorio sperimentale, mentre l’esercitatore ed i responsabili di laboratorio supervisioneranno lo studente durante lo svolgimento degli esercizi di programmazione Assembly ad esercitazione e di linguaggio C in laboratorio.

Conoscenza e Comprensione (Descrittore di Dublino #1)
Al termine del corso e dopo aver superato l’esame, lo studente:
saprà illustrare le architetture ed il funzionamento delle periferiche dei microcontrollori, comprenderà come programmarle e saprà confrontare le prestazioni tra microcontrollori diversi;
saprà scegliere gli strumenti più adeguati (sistemi di sviluppo, IDE, linguaggi di programmazione) per progettare un sistema elettronico basato su microcontrollore;
saprà selezionare il microcontrollore adatto al sistema elettronico da sviluppare, consultando il data-sheet di diverse famiglie di prodotti e case costruttrici;
saprà programmare in Assembly ed in linguaggio C i microcontrollori ad 8 bit di Microchip;
Capacità di Applicare Competenza e Comprensione (Descrittore di Dublino #2)
Al termine del corso e dopo aver superato l’esame, lo studente:
sarà capace di comprendere i data-sheet di microcontrollori commerciali e valutarne l’impiego;
comprenderà quali specifiche del microcontrollore impatteranno sulle prestazioni di sistema;
saprà progettare circuiti a microcontrollore, programmandoli e debuggandone il firmware, per individuarne problemi e risolverli;
saprà applicare soluzioni innovative all’hardware e al firmware di sistemi a microcontrollore.
Autonomia di Giudizio (Descrittore di Dublino #3)
Grazie alla modalità di Didattica Innovativa di tipo “flipped classroom”, lo studente:
acquisirà l'autonomia di giudizio nell’analizzare e nel progettare l’hardware ed il firmware di una scheda a microcontrollore, valutando pro e contro delle varie implementazioni possibili.
Abilità Comunicative (Descrittore di Dublino #4)
Grazie al lavoro di gruppo in piccoli team di 3-4 persone presente nei laboratori, lo studente
acquisirà competenze comunicative efficaci e capacità di autogestione nel lavoro di gruppo che favoriranno la condivisione di idee, il confronto costruttivo e la collaborazione nella risoluzione di problemi tecnici.
Capacità di Apprendimento (Descrittore di Dublino #5)
Grazie alla modalità di Didattica Innovativa di tipo “flipped classroom”, lo studente:
imparerà ad apprendere in autonomia i miglioramenti introdotti da microcontrollori di futura generazione e i vantaggi di nuove implementazioni firmware;
capirà come affrontare studi successivi di prodotti e soluzioni progettuali che diverranno disponibili durante la sua attività professionale.

Microcontrollori (12 ore di lezione)
Microcontrollori a 8bit: architetture, data-sheet di prodotti commerciali, famiglie e prestazioni.
Memorie dati (RAM e flash) e programmi (ROM, OTP, E2PROM, flash) e registri di configurazione.
Periferiche interne: porte di I/O, counter, timer, convertitori Analogico-Digitale (ADC) e Digitale-Analogico (DAC), modulazione impulsiva (PWM), comunicazione seriale.
Circuiti ausiliari: reset, oscillatore, interrupt, watchdog.
Firmware e software (14 ore di laboratorio informatico)
Schemi circuitali del sistema di sviluppo utilizzato a laboratorio e ambiente di simulazione.
Linguaggio Assembly: istruzioni, cicli macchina, sviluppo di codice.
Linguaggio C: esempi di codice, compilazione, portabilità.
Esempi pratici: modalità di indirizzamento; gestione banchi di memoria; gestione periferiche; routine di interrupt.
Progetti pratici “hands-on” (24 ore di laboratorio sperimentale)
Esempi pratici con scheda di sviluppo dedicata a ciascun studente e ambiente di sviluppo.
Gestione di ingressi/uscite digitali e ingressi analogici; pilotaggio di relè e LED; interfacciamento con memorie e DAC/ADC esterni; gestione degli interrupt; gestione tastiere e display:
Temporizzazione mediante timer interni; polling, loop e interrupt; modalità low-power e sleep.
Comunicazioni seriali: SPI, I2C, RS232; gestione memorie e ADC e DAC esterni e altri dispositivi.
Schermi LCD grafici: interfacciamento; temporizzazioni; data-sheet di prodotti commerciali.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Altro
L’esame consisterà di due parti, svolte consecutivamente durante la stessa giornata:
Parte “teorica”: durata 30 minuti, strutturata con 14 semplici domande a risposta multipla su Microsoft Forms; se si risponderà correttamente ad almeno 9 domande si verrà ammessi alla parte laboratoriale. La correzione sarà istantanea e generata automaticamente da Forms. Questa parte contribuirà a 7/30 del voto finale (ad esempio, rispondendo correttamente a 12 domande si partirà da un voto finale di 12/14·30/7 = 4 trentesimi). In questa prova lo studente verrà valutato sulle architetture di base del microcontrollore, snippet di codice, schemi circuitali utilizzanti microcontrollori e codice/codifiche utilizzate nel codice C. (DD1)
Parte “laboratoriale” (solo per coloro che avranno superato la parte “teorica”): durata 2:30 ore, concernente la progettazione di un firmware (in C). Questa parte contribuirà a 23/30 del voto finale. La prova sarà strutturata in più sotto sezioni, per ciascuna si dovrà consegnare un archivio contenente l’intera cartella del progetto MikroC. Durante l’esame verrà messa a disposizione la scheda EasyPIC a ciascun esaminando, per collaudare il firmware. In questa prova lo studente verrà valutato sulla base delle sue capacità di prendere decisioni in autonomia sul progetto proposto, scegliere gli strumenti più adatti per portare a termine il lavoro, correttezza e funzionalità del firmware sviluppato insieme alla correttezza del codice C utilizzato. (DD1, DD2, DD3) Il materiale liberamente consultabile è il seguente:
File inizializzazione LCD (lcd.c);
File simulatore proteus (EasyPICVx.rar);
HRLV – MaxSonarDatasheet;
HRLV MaxSonar – EasyPIC;
Datasheet PIC18f45K22;
Schematico EasyPIC (SchematicEasyPIC.pdf).
Le consegne avverranno telematicamente tramite Microsoft Forms. La correzione avverrà in differita ed i risultati saranno pubblicati alcuni giorni dopo la prova.
Lo studente potrà decidere di congelare il voto della parte "teorica" anche per gli appelli successivi, ma dello stesso anno accademico, per poi rifare solamente la parte "laboratoriale" allo scopo di migliorare il voto.
L'esame si intenderà superato se il voto finale sarà uguale o superiore a 18/30.

Franco ZAPPA, MICROCONTROLLERS, Editore: Esculapio, Bologna, Anno edizione: 2017, ISBN: 978-88-9385-022-3

The goal of the course is to provide students with the fundamental methodologies for modelling, analysing, and designing mobile radio networks. Students will learn how radio resources are shared and reused, how mobility is managed, and how coverage, capacity and traffic requirements drive network design choices. In particular, the course covers the architectures, radio interfaces, protocols, and management mechanisms of cellular systems, from 2G to 5G.

Dublin Descriptor
Expected learning outcomes
1 - Knowledge and understanding
Students will learn how to:

• Define mathematical models for the analysis of mobile radio networks
• Analyse complex technologies related to mobile radio networks
• Identify system components and their relations
  2 - Applying knowledge and understanding
  Students will be able to:
• Dimension the components of a mobile radio network to meet traffic requirements
• Evaluate the performance of mobile radio networks across different scenarios
• Apply the mathematical models learned
  3 - Making judgements
  Students will be able to:
• Evaluate the trade-offs that govern the design of mobile radio networks and justify design choices accordingly
• Identify how the fundamental system limitations impact the design of the network
• Recognise the design space and its degrees of freedom that can be exploited to define new technologies
  4 - Communication
  Students will be able to:
• Describe complex network technologies at different levels of detail, also comparing them with respect to specific aspects
• Report on the analysis and results of an advanced topic in a technical document (optional)
  Learning skills
  Students will be able to study autonomously new mobile radio technologies by applying and extending the methods learned during the course

1. Mobile Network Basics
Multiple-access techniques in cellular radio networks
Cellular coverage and resource reuse
Network architecture and functional elements
Mobility management: cell selection, location management, and handover
2. Capacity and radio planning
Mathematical models and algorithms for coverage optimisation
Mathematical models and algorithms for static frequency assignment
Dynamic channel allocation techniques
3. Performance analysis
Models for the capacity of CDMA systems
Traffic models for the performance evaluation at session level
Models for the dimensioning of cells and location areas
4. 2G systems (GSM and GPRS/EDGE)
Architectures, interfaces, physical and logical channels
Signalling architecture, signalling protocols, network databases, call management procedures, mobility management procedures.
GPRS/EDGE: radio interface, IP network, interconnection nodes, mobility management, protocol architecture
5. 3G systems (UMTS and HSPA)
Radio access network
Core network
Radio resource management
High-speed packet data services
6. 4G systems (LTE and EPC)
System architecture
Radio Interface
Core Network
7. 5G systems
System architecture
New Radio interface
Network slicing

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
The assessment will be based on a written exam at the end of the course and optional project activities.
The written exam is worth up to 28 points and comprises numerical exercises, closed-ended questions, and open-ended questions covering all course topics. Optional project activities may contribute up to 4 additional points. The final score is the sum of all points obtained.

Slides and recommended readings are provided by the lecturers through Webeep https://webeep.polimi.it/

The course aims at describing the physical principles of energy conversion processes, with particular focus on the photovoltaic and the thermoelectric energy conversion effects, and the properties of materials of interest for such applications, with particular attention to new nanostructured materials and systems. Specific lectures will be focused on the principles and nanomaterials-related aspects of other direct energy conversion technologies.

After attending the course and after the final examination, the student will:

• know the physical principles needed for a microscopic description of electrical and heat transport phenomena in materials, with particular focus on semiconductors in non-equilibrium conditions and under illumination, and the physical principles underlying the photovoltaic effect, the thermoelectric effects and other energy conversion effects/devices (e.g. photocatalysis, fuel cells); (DdD1)
• know the working principles, the materials-related aspects and the architecture of the most important classes of photovoltaic and thermoelectric devices, including those employing nanomaterials and nanostructures; (DdD1)
• know the current research trends in the application of nanotechnologies and nanomaterials for the development of novel energy conversion devices; (DdD1)
• be able to apply the above knowledge to a critical description and discussion of the devices and the related materials properties, limitations and developments, with a quantitative approach, and to communicate this knowledge in an effective way. (DdD2)

• Introduction to direct energy conversion technologies
• Properties of solar radiation
• Introduction to irreversible thermodynamics for the description of transport phenomena; kinetic coefficients and Onsager theorem
• Review of semiconductor physics and properties
• Microscopic description of charge and heat transport in solids: Boltzmann equation; derivation of electrical conductivity for metals and semiconductors
• The photovoltaic effect; p-n junction under illumination, I-V characteristic of solar cells, definition of power conversion efficiency and quantum efficiency; limits for the efficiency (detailed balance limit, thermodynamic limit)
• Crystalline Si solar cells (1st generation)
• Thin film solar cells (2nd generation)
• Excitonic solar cells: organic (bulk heterojunction) and hybrid solar cells, dye-sensitized and perovskite solar cells
• New concepts for 3rd generation solar cells (tandem or multijunction cells, intermediate band cells, multiple exciton generation, hot carrier cells, up- and down-conversion, concentration)
• Nanostructured materials for 3rd generation solar cells (e.g. QD-based solar cells)
• Phenomenology of thermoelectric effects (Seebeck, Peltier, Thomson);
• Irreversible thermodynamics description of thermoelectric effects: relationship between thermoelectric coefficients and kinetic coefficients
• Efficiency and figure of merit of thermoelectric systems (refrigeration and power generation)
• Boltzmann equation: derivation of thermal conductivity and thermoelectric coefficients for metals and semiconductors
• Conventional and advanced thermoelectric materials; the phonon glass-electron crystal concept, the substructure approach; Bi2Te3 and related compounds, skutterudites, clathrates, complex oxides
• Nanostructured thermoelectric materials, examples (superlattices, nanowires, nanocrystalline or nanocomposite materials)
  During the course specific seminar lectures will be organized, to discuss recent developments in other energy conversion technologies involving nanomaterials (e.g. fuel cells, solar water splitting, batteries).
  See bibliography for suggested books (covering more than the programme of the course). Additional documents or lecture notes will be made available by the lecturer.

Prova orale obbligatoria
The examination is an oral discussion about the course topics, chosen by the examiner (typically one topic related to photovoltaic physics, materials and devices, and one topic related to thermoelectricity and thermoelectric materials and devices).
The student must be able to clearly describe and critically discuss the topics, with the related hypotheses, the critical points, the physical meaning, the mathematical approach (complete derivations are not strictly required, but of course their knowledge may contribute to the final mark; however understanding the physics underlying the mathematical approach is considered the fundamental aspect), the materials properties, the device architecture and properties. The student should also know the value or order of magnitude of the main important quantities involved in the discussion, and may be asked to apply the theoretical knowledge to specific examples, with a quantitative approach.

J. Nelson, The Physics of Solar Cells, Editore: Imperial College Press, Anno edizione: 2003
H.J. Goldsmid, Introduction to Thermoelectricity, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2009

The growing interest towards new improved maintenance strategies for both existing and new infrastructures requires the civil engineer to deal with the basics of Structural Health Monitoring (SHM). This is considered a fundamental step towards a sustainable, resilient and smart infrastructure management. The course aims at providing the basic knowledge about SHM, following three main steps: measurement systems, data management and analysis and in the end the final evaluation, with care about the quality of all the phases.
The course aims at providing a practical approach to these problems mainly through laboratory activity and field testing, by which the student will become familiar with the basic aspects of sensing, data acquisition and processing. Lessons will just provide the needed info for hands-on sessions.
Specific attention will be devoted to dynamic measurements, as a tool and a new emerging technology aimed at helping SHM.
A reference will be made to the use of measurements to validate models or to start model updating, enriching the continuous information exchange between experimental and numerical approaches.
At the end of the course the student will be able to make the proper choices to develop a Structural Health Monitoring application and to perform a complete test on own, to be discussed during the exam.

About knowledge and understanding, students are expected to acquire the basics about those aspects closely related to Structural Health Monitoring,, in a close relationship to their general knowledge of civil engineering, to be aware about how to properly design and use a Structural Health Monitoring System.
They will acquire knowledge about the main sensors adopted for Structural Health Monitoring, about data acquisition principles and the basics of the frequency domain analysis
Concerning Application, the students will practice on some proposed cases first, then they will be asked to develop small projects, to demonstrate they reached the goals planned for the Structural Health Monitoring expert, starting from the sensor choice, up to the best data management strategy.
Communication skills are also included, as the they will be asked to discuss their projects, with an autonomous evaluation capability for the defense of their job.
A final goal is the capability to interact with different specialists, also in areas not commonly part of the civil engineering cultural knowledge base, with simplified approach, training then to properly face new situations.

The main topics are:
The meaning of Structural Health Monitoring
Typical approaches of Structural Health Monitoring
Metrology basics
Sensors for Structural Health Monitoring
Static and dynamic aspects in measurements
Data acquisition
Signal analysis, with specific emphasis on the analyses in the frequency domain
The course will be completed with many practical examples or specific workshops, dealing with real examples from existing systems, mainly developed for both structural health and biomedical quantities monitoring.

Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
There are some check points, consisting in small projects which are going to be carried out with the teacher's and or instructor’s help, constituting the base for the exam discussion.
The projects will include both questions about the theoretical knowledge and concerning the experimentation that students will develop on their own.
Every student is asked to bring the reports to the final exam, where a final defense and discussion will be carried out to individually justify the adopted choices. The student needs to show good capability to present the project and discuss it, showing to have gained good critical skills and technical language.

The aim of the course is introducing the students to the geotechnical and geomechanical applications associated to the offshore environment. Standard theories in the field of soil and rock mechanics are applied to offshore developments for oil and gas applications, as well as to renewable energy source, such offshore wind. When necessary, theoretical aspects not covered in classical geotechnical engineering courses are introduced, including soil behaviour under cyclic loading. The main design tools in order to operate in the field of Offshore Geotechnical Engineering will be covered. The teaching activity will benefit from the active collaboration of Rina Consulting SpA, whose engineers -operating in the field- will contribute with lectures, seminars, case studies and practical activities.

Students will acquire the knowledge to deal with some typical problems of Offshore Geotechnical Engineering, including serviceability and ultimate limit states for offshore foundations, assessment of submarine geohazard and geostructures for energy production, borehole stability, sand production, in situ stress state determination, with particular attention on the comprehension of the basic hydro-mechanical interactions between the soil/rock and the structures. The understanding of the aformentioned issues will be based on theoritical fundamentals related the behavior of sedimentary rocks and cyclic behavior of soils.
Student will then be able to:

• Characterize of offshore sediments based on in situ and laboratory test;
• Characterize from the engineering point of view the behaviour of sedimentary rocks;
• Analyse and design offshore foundation systems - both shallow and deep - according standard approaches well established in the offshore industry;
• Perform wellbore stability analysis;
• Determine the in situ stress state in reservoirs;
• Identify typical geohazard in relation to offshore infrasatructures, e.g. pipeline networks.

Fundamentals:

• Laboratory characterization of mechanical and hydraulic behavior of offshore sediments;
• In situ characterization of state and hydromechanical behavior of offshore sediments (geophysical method - logs - and frac tests);
• Geological aspects of oil and gas related geomechanics;
• State of stress and faulting regimes;
  Applications: offshore geotechnics for energy production
• Elements of laboratory and in situ testing;
• Cyclic behaviour of marine soils;
• Geotechnical assessment of offshore foundations and pipelines.
  Applications: Oil and gas related geomechanics
• Stress state determination from laboratory and field data;
• Stresses around boreholes. Borehole failure criteria. Elements of drilling and wellbore stability;
• Stability analysis of wellbore completion systems;
• Geological carbon storage.
  The teaching activity will benefit from the active collaboration of Rina Consulting SpA, whose engineers -operating in the field- will contribute with lectures, seminars, case studies and practical activities.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Assessment will include an oral exam and written take-home assignments. The former will aim to assess fundamental knowledge, whereas the ability to apply theoretical knowledge to practice will be evaluated through the latter.

Erling Fjar R.M. Holt A.M. Raaen R. Risnes P. Horsrud, Petroleum Related Rock Mechanics, Editore: Elsevier, ISBN: 9780444502605
Mark Randolph, Susan Gourvenec, Offshore Geotechnical Engineering, Editore: CRC Press, ISBN: 0415477441

Il Corso "Personalità Teambuilding e Leadership" introduce lo studente alla conoscenza delle strutture di personalità che orientano l'immagine di Sé, l'atteggiarsi, l'agire, il pensare, l'interagire, il comunicare e il cooperare: per lo studio, il lavoro e le relazioni interpersonali e con particolare riferimento allo sviluppo di competenze per il teambuilding e la leadership. Porta lo studente: - a valorizzare le proprie risorse e migliorare il proprio rendimento nell'acquisizione di nuove abilità e competenze; - a conoscere e ad affrontare meglio situazioni difficili a livello personale o di gruppo; - a prepararsi alla cooperazione e alla leadership; - ad affrontare al meglio le prime esperienze di inserimento lavorativo. Il corso offre laboratori esperienziali per lo sviluppo di soft skill nelle aree trattate, presenta i principi e modelli (di area costruttivista e relazionale) che guidano le esperienze di laboratorio e che possono essere adottati nella futura vita professionale e personale.

The course aims at providing the students with a critical understanding of the philosophical foundations of science and technology. But what is the relation between philosophy and science? On the one hand, the discoveries by scientists are often inspired by philosophical ideas. On the other hand, scientific achievements and technological advancements pose deep conceptual questions to philosophers. The connection between these disciplines is thus so tied that it becomes difficult to even draw a border between them. This course explores such a connection through the study of important episodes in the history of science. Outstanding issues of philosophy of science and technology, such as scientific progress, the method of science and the confirmation of theories and laws, will be addressed. Moreover, a particular focus will be devoted to philosophical questions concerning the nature of space as they emerge in the foundations of science, especially in relation to the famous debate between Leibniz and Newton.

The course aims at providing the students with a critical understanding of the philosophical foundations of science and technology.
But what is the relation between philosophy and science? On the one hand, the discoveries by scientists are often inspired by philosophical ideas. On the other hand, scientific achievements and technological advancements pose deep conceptual questions to philosophers. The connection between these disciplines is thus so tied that it becomes difficult to even draw a border between them. This course explores such a connection through the study of important episodes in the history of science. Outstanding issues of philosophy of science and technology, such as scientific progress, the method of science and the confirmation of theories and laws, will be addressed. Moreover, a particular focus will be devoted to philosophical questions concerning the nature of space as they emerge in the foundations of science, especially in relation to the famous debate between Leibniz and Newton. Finally, in the context of philosophy of technology, we will explore epistemic tools that are used to draw scientifically-informed inferences, such as computer simulations and thought experiments.
Here's below a list of the main topics:

• Method of science
• Demarcation between science and pseudo-science
• Confirmation
• Scientific Progress
• Philosophy of Space: Absolutism vs Relationism
• Scientific Reasoning
• Philosophy of Technology

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Altro
Final written exam based on general questions about the topics of the lectures: specifically, the students are assigned to write several essays, which have to be emailed directly to the instructors at the following address: [email protected]. There are also individual class presentations scheduled during the term

Alan Chalmers, What is This Thing Called Science?, Editore: Hackett Pub Co Inc
Nick Huggett, Space from Zeno to Einstein: Classic Readings With a Contemporary Commentary, Editore: Bradford Books

The course deals with land and terrestrial surveying techniques by using photogrammetric sensors. At the beginning of the course, the analytical fundamentals of photogrammetry for the sensor orientation and for the object 3D reconstruction will be given. Then, digital images will be introduced together with algorithms for image enhancement and matching. Finally, the main products of photogrammetry, such as orthophotos, will be illustrated. The sensors for data acquisition will be outlined too. Computer laboratory activities will integrate other classes.

This course regards the main physical phenomena that occur in a photovoltaic cell. It starts with an overview of the existing technologies, first, second and third generation. It then look in more detail to the processes taking place within the active material of a photovoltaic cell and their connection to the device performance: the absorption of light, the charge generation, the charge transport and recombination. The approach is phenomenological even if it makes extensive use of the concepts and basic tools of quantum mechanics, which are briefly introduced. The goal is to provide the wealth of basic knowledge needed to design new materials for photovoltaics.
The class hosts a number of external speakers, from the academy and from the industrial world, that introduce state of art technologies.
The approach of the teaching, through front seminar and group discussion, differs from that adopted in early years of the student cv. We will not provide notions or directions, yet the student is exposed to a broad set of knowledge and experiences, suitable for mature attendants that are approaching the end of their student career.

Students:
-will learn the fundamentals regarding photovoltaic cell devices (DD1)
-will acquire knowledge on the state of art in photovoltaic conversion and on the existing technologies, both on the market and at research stage (DD2, DD3)
-will learn the fundamental concepts in photophysics for designing and characterizing new materials and devices for photovoltaic conversion (DD1, DD2)

INTRODUCTION
Solar radiation and climate change.
Ultimate theoretical limit of a cell and detailed balance.
PHOTOVOLTAIC DEVICES
General characteristics of a PV cell.
The p-n junction and silicon solar cell; Thin film solar cells; Polymer solar cells.
Dye sensitized solar cells.
Luminescent solar collectors.
Natural systems for light harvesting and conversion.
ABSORPTION
Molecular absorption. Adibatic approximation, Vibronic linewidth and Franck-Condon principle.
Einstein A and B coefficients. Strickler-Berg relation.
Kasha molecular exciton in aggregates.
Energy transfer (Foerster, Dexter, Frenkel exciton).
Absorption in a crystal (band structure, carrier relaxation,
Wannier-Mott exciton, dimensionality).
MOLECULAR DYNAMICS
Jablonski diagram, internal conversion, vibrational energy redistribution, radiative decay, inter system crossing, phosphorescence. Mono and bi molecular recombination. Vavilov-Kasha rule.
CHARGE PHOTOGENERATION
Charge transfer states.
Marcus theory.
Band to band transition, Onsager, Poole-Frenkel. Donor-Acceptor system.
TRANSPORT
Mobility
Hopping in disordered systems.
Coherent transport.
Experimental techniques to determine mobility.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Students will be required to draft a research-like scientific proposal (maximum 2 pages) on the topics covered in the course. Students will then discuss their project in a short presentation, followed by questions.

Guglielmo Lanzani, The Photophysics behind photovoltaic and photonics, Editore: Wiley VCH, Anno edizione: 2012, ISBN: 978-3-527-41054-5
Peter Würfel, Physics of Solar Cells: From Principles to New Concepts, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 2005, ISBN: 9783527404285

This course deals with power systems analyzed from ethical and social perspectives. It is intended to give students a chance to reflect on the ethical, social, and cultural impacts of power systems by focusing on the issues faced by and brought about by electrical engineers.
This integrated course includes lectures by two instructors with complementary expertise, covering the issues of power systems at the intersection of technical and socio-ethical issues, and invited lecturers, covering specific topics at the forefront of research in the socio-technical management of power systems.
Class participation is expected, as classes will be organized as short workshop sessions in which experiences, and individual and group reflections are punctuated by Socratic discussions or microlectures.

Dublin Descriptors
Expected learning outcomes
Knowledge and understanding
Students will:
Acquire a broad perspective on the ethical and social impacts and implications of power systems;
Be acquainted with normative ethics and normative argumentation;
Learn how to recognize and analyze ethical and social aspects and issues inherent in development, control, and design of power systems;
Be able to understand how technical problems are inherently connected to a social dimension within a socio-technical perspective.
Applying knowledge and understanding
Students will:
Be able to use critical skills in clarifying and ethically analyzing case-studies involving power systems;
Be able to apply ethical theories to problems created, aggravated or transformed by smart grids;
Be able to explore and assess possibilities for solving or diminishing existing and emerging ethical and social problems of smart grids.
Making judgements
Students will be able:
To autonomously analyze the ethical issues of a technology and to develop a critical analysis on that;
To evaluate and select the appropriate knowledge in the effort of elaborating and justifying a philosophical argument on a topic autonomously selected.
Communication
Students will learn to:
Work in small groups;
Present in an effective way the results of their independent research, being able to justify their choices.
Lifelong learning skills
Students will:
Be better prepared to their future professional life in an ethically and socially responsible way;
Be able to analyze problems through an ethical lens.

The course will cover different topics from both a theoretical and a more practical point of view.
The following topics will be presented within the context of power systems development and technologies:
Privacy and privacy-preserving analysis of energy data: infrastructure components and consumer devices as data acquiring network devices.
Security both at the individual and national level: power disruption causing loss of infrastructure, endangering public safety and jeopardizing national security
Equity: equitable pricing and affordability of access; fair distribution of costs and benefits; energy management burden on uniformed consumer; managing consumer behavior
Environmental sustainability: future affordability of energy; intergenerational justice; possible conflict between reliability and environmental sustainability.
AI/ML techniques and Big Data analytics for the smart grid: their increasing role and critical issues (e.g., fair algorithmic decision making).
Social acceptance issues: effects of moral values on the acceptance of smart grid technologies; ethics of technology and technology acceptance models.
Professional codes of conduct: benefits and limits; how codes face innovation such as the smart grid.
Students will be supervised in the development of the final project (class presentation) in order to achieve the required standards.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Foreword: The program is the same for the both versions of the course (i.e, 5 ECTS, and 6 ECTS).
Grading will be on the following basis.
5 ECTS: 50% final project (team presentation in class); 50% written test on the course topics.
6 ECTS: 50% final project (team presentation in class + individual assignment); 50% written test on the course topics. The additional ECTS is accounted for by the individual assignment, which will be announced and agreed upon at the beginning of the course.
Type of assessment
Description
Dublin descriptor
Final project
(class presentation)
Students are required to:
Develop a philosophical argument in which the presented claims are justified by the use of ethical argumentation and the relevant literature;
To present this argument in a presentation in class in front of the instructor and their student colleagues.
1, 3
4, 5
Written test
Questions on the course topics that require to have read and carefully studied the suggested bibliography and the ability to apply it to case-studies;
Questions on the ethical issues associated to power systems requiring the knowledge of the suggested bibliography and the development of critical skills in analyzing technical problems with the tools provided by ethical theories and argumentation.
1, 2
3, 4, 5
Individual assignment (only for 6 ECTS version of the course)
Students are required to:
To present in different forms (e.g., video, class presentation, written text, …) a specific topic related to power systems issues to their peers.
4, 5

The course is offered in a 10-CFU version (PROBABILISTIC SAFETY ANALYSIS (PSA): SYSTEM ANALYSIS METHODS, COMPUTATIONAL TECHNIQUES AND ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE ALGORITHMS), a two 5-CFU courses version (PROBABILISTIC SAFETY ANALYSIS (PSA): SYSTEM ANALYSIS METHODS, COMPUTATIONAL TECHNIQUES and PROBABILISTIC SAFETY ANALYSIS (PSA): ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE ALGORITHMS), and a 8-CFU version (PROBABILISTIC SAFETY ANALYSIS (PSA): SYSTEM ANALYSIS METHODS, COMPUTATIONAL TECHNIQUES AND ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE ALGORITHMS B). The following detailed program defines goals, learning outcomes and topics for each 5-CFU course.
PROBABILISTIC SAFETY ANALYSIS (PSA): SYSTEM ANALYSIS METHODS, COMPUTATIONAL TECHNIQUES
The objective of the course is to provide students with an understanding of the Deterministic (D) and Probabilistic (P) Safety Analysis (SA), and the system analysis methods and computational techniques needed for their assessment. These will be presented with respect to practical cases of nuclear systems.
PROBABILISTIC SAFETY ANALYSIS (PSA): ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE ALGORITHMS
The goal of this course is to provide students with the knowledge on Artificial Intelligence (AI) and advanced simulation methods used for Computational Risk Assessment (CRA).

PROBABILISTIC SAFETY ANALYSIS (PSA): SYSTEM ANALYSIS METHODS, COMPUTATIONAL TECHNIQUES
The Expected Learning Outcomes (ELO) are as follows.
The student knows:
ELO PSA1 - the potential scenarios of nuclear accidents and the methods for their deterministic (DSA) and probabilistic analysis (PSA)
ELO PSA2 - the methodological tools at the basis of the probabilistic risk analysis
The student understands:
ELO PSA3 - strengths and weaknesses of DSA and PSA, and the potential and challenges of Computational Risk Analysis (CRA)
The student is able to:
ELO PSA4 - apply the methods and tools for the probabilistic risk analysis of nuclear and energy equipment and systems.
PROBABILISTIC SAFETY ANALYSIS (PSA): ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE ALGORITHMS
The Expected Learning Outcomes (ELO) are as follows.
The student knows:
ELO CRA1 - the methods for uncertainty and sensitivity analysis of nuclear accidents models and codes used for Computational Risk Analysis (CRA)
ELO CRA2 - how to implement AI algorithms for CRA
The student is able to:
ELO CRA3 - apply AI algorithms for CRA
The student can communicate:
ELO CRA4 - the results of the application of AI algorithms for CRA of nuclear and energy equipment and systems

PROBABILISTIC SAFETY ANALYSIS (PSA): SYSTEM ANALYSIS METHODS, COMPUTATIONAL TECHNIQUES
Part 1A Deterministic Safety Analysis (DSA)
DSA safety concepts (defense-in-depth, multiple barriers, Design Basis Accidents (DBAs) and Beyond DBAs (BDBAs)) and the technological implications on the nuclear power plants design
Strengths and weaknesses of DSA
Part 2A Probabilistic Safety Analysis (PSA)
Level 1,2,3 PSA: methods and tools for modeling of nuclear accidents
Identification and quantification of accident sequences (Failure Mode and Criticality Analysis, Hazard Operability Analysis, Fault and Event Tree Analyses, Bow-tie, and Bayesian Belief Networks); Importance Measures; Dependent Failures; Risk curves and matrices; Risk analysis as a tool in support of regulatory licensing and operating requirements
Strengths and weaknesses of PSA
PROBABILISTIC SAFETY ANALYSIS (PSA): ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE ALGORITHMS
Part 1B Computational Risk Analysis (CRA)
Dynamic accidental scenarios generation:
Multi-Valued Logic (MVL) for modeling the accidental scenarios
Continuous Event Tree (CET) and Continuous Cell-to-Cell Mapping Technique (CCCMT)
Dynamic Event Tree (DET) and Monte Carlo Dynamic Event Tree (MCDET)
Dynamic accidental scenarios simulation:
Uncertainty and sensitivity analysis of Thermal-Hydraulics codes (Code Scaling, Applicability, and Uncertainty (CSAU), Automated Statistical Treatment of Uncertainty Method (ASTRUM)), global variance-based and distribution-based measures (flipped))
Risk-informed safety margin quantification (Order Statistics (OS))
Artificial Intelligence methods (Artificial Neural Networks (ANNs)) for accidental scenarios simulation
Dynamic accidental scenarios post-processing:
Artificial Intelligence methods (clustering algorithms) for system failure domain identification
Artificial Intelligence methods (evolutionary algorithms and clustering algorithms) for prime implicants and near misses scenarios identification

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale obbligatoria
Valutazione continua facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
The evaluation consists of a final written exam (covering Part 1A and 2A) and an oral exam (covering Part 1A, 2A and 1B), and of hands-on exercises continuosly evaluated during the course.
The oral exam (50% of the final grade) is aimed at verifying the student:
ability to expose and discuss the mathematical formalism of the AI and advanced simulation methods presented during the course (ELO CRA1-2)
understanding of the need (and opportunity) tackled (and offered) by AI and advanced simulation method for the safety and maintenance of industrial plants and energy systems (ELO CRA3)
ability to communicate knowledge clearly and unambiguously (ELO CRA4)

Enrico Zio, Computational methods for reliability and risk analysis, Editore: World Scientific, Anno edizione: 2009
Enrico Zio, Piero Baraldi, Francesco Cadini, Basics of Reliability and Risk Analysis: Worked Out Problems and Solutions, Editore: World Scientific
Enrico Zio, An Introduction to the Basics of Reliability and Risk Analysis, Editore: World Scientific
IAEA-TECDOC-1200, Applications of probabilistic safety assessment (PSA) for nuclear power plants, Anno edizione: 2001
NUREG/CR-6901, Current State of Reliability Modeling Methodologies for Digital Systems and Their Acceptance Criteria for Nuclear Power Plant Assessments, Anno edizione: 2006
Francesco Di Maio, Enrico Zio, Curtis Smith, Valentin Rychkov, Integrated Deterministic and Probabilistic Safety Analysis for Safety Assessment of Nuclear Power Plants, Editore: Science and Technology of Nuclear Installations (special issue), Anno edizione: 2015
Enrico Zio, Integrated deterministic and probabilistic safety assessment: Concepts, challenges, research directions, Editore: Nuclear Engineering and Design, Anno edizione: 2014, Fascicolo: 280
Mohammad Modarres, Inn Seock Kim, Deterministic and Probabilistic Safety Analysis - Handbook of Nuclear Engineering, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2010

Il corso esplora il ruolo dell'idrogeno nella transizione energetica globale e ne valuta la sostenibilità. Vengono analizzati i processi di produzione dell'idrogeno a partire da fonti rinnovabili (H2 con diversi codici di colore), le tecnologie di accumulo e quelle di trasporto. Vengono forniti i criteri d'analisi di processo in relazione alle proprietà chimico-fisiche dell'idrogeno e agli aspetti di sicurezza. La sostenibilità è valutata dal punto di vista economico, dell'efficienza energetica e di decarbonizzazione, con riferimento alle policy attive e agli scenari di ampliamento dell'utilizzo.

The course fits into the overall program curriculum and in particular it contributes to the development of the following capabilities:
Understand context, functions, processes in a business and industrial environment under the life cycle thinking perspective, and the impact of those factors on business performance towards the entire product life cycle
Identify trends, technologies and key methodologies in the domain of product life cycle management, within a pletora of different application contexts such as industrial design and engineering, mechanics and automation, fashion and food industry
Design solutions applying a scientific and engineering approach (Analysis, Learning, Reasoning, and Modeling capability deriving from a solid and rigorous multidisciplinary background) to face problems and opportunities in business and industrial environments
The aim of the course is to introduce students to the basic concepts of Product Lifecycle Management (PLM) and Life Cycle Thinking. The acronym PLM enables a holistic life cycle-oriented way of thinking through a set of principles, methods and tools supporting a more effective and efficient management of the life cycle stages of industrial products and systems, from their design/engineering, to production, distribution, usage until disposal/end of life.
In its comprehensive meaning, PLM is a business approach based on collaboration and integration of people, processes and technologies, which aims to support the development of more innovative, reliable and sustainable solutions (products and services) in a shorter time.
From a managerial perspective PLM encompass (i) a strategic management point of view where the product is the enterprise value creator; (ii) the application of a collaborative model for the empowerment of the core competences distributed along the different actors involved in the lifecycle (e.g. designers, engineers, manufacturers, suppliers, etc.); (iii) the adoption of a number of IT solutions for establishing an access-safe product information management environment.
From a technical perspective, PLM is a matter of methods, standards and techniques for structuring the engineering processes, as well as a matter of computer-based tools for enabling virtual prototyping and collaborative workspaces.
In this context, Lean Product and Process Development is a paramount support for the effective understanding and accomplishment of the above mentioned points and will play an important role, not only as topic of discussion taught within the course, but also used to generate within the students critical attitude towards problem understanding, problem setting and problem solving.
The aim of the PLM course is to introduce students to the concepts and elements of PLM, life cycle thinking and lean product and process development, from both managerial and a technical perspective, giving also the basics to run the introduction of PLM (as approach, models, methods, and tools) in the industrial practice, approach problems and process improvement via lean thinking, with the ultimate purpose to grow a life cycle thinking attitude into the students.

Expected results from Product Life Cycle Management Class are:
Understand - provide students with the prevalent knowledge in the field of PLM and Life Cycle Thinking from a theoretical and practical side to show how these aspects reflects on real business. The students are expected to gain general knowledge on PLM, life cycle thinking and all related topics.
Identify - students, will gain general knowledge needed to understand PLM, and will be provided with specific knowledge on trends and approaches existing in effective and advanced PLM impelmentation solutions from industry, such as lean product and process development. Students will be expected to be able to identify how specific approaches enable and impact life cycle thinking within enterprises. In the specific lean product and process development as a overall and growing body of knwoledge will be taught to the class that is expected to acquire deep knowledge on that.
Design - most importantly, students will be provided with the ability to aquire and develop a critical thinking attitude in business process understanding and problem solving. This will be achieved through a continuous link between in class theoretical applications and real world applications, as well as challenges proposed to students to be addressed in class via exercises, serious games, projects and teamwork activities. The ultimate purpose is to make this class not as the arrival learning point for these concepts, but to be the starting platform to build and link what has already been learned and what needs to be learned in the future to address growing buiness needs-by applying either what has been introduced in this course or learnt soemwherelse- enable a relentless life cycle thinking mindest.

Course topics include:
-Life C ycle T hinking, P roduct L ife C ycle M anagement, P roduct L ife C ycle phases
-Innovation, New Product Development Process and Concurrent Engineering
-Lean Product and Process Development
-Set-Based Concurrent Engineering (SBCE)
-The Front-End Process
-Design Methods (Design for X: Design for Manufacturing and Design for Environment)
-Value and Function Analyses (QFD & VA/VE)
-Prototyping, Examples from Virtual Prototyping and CAD tools
-Process Mapping and mapping application case
-Collaborative Platforms (PDM & PLM)
-PLM system and PLM system implementation
-PLM Projects Evaluation. Application case s
-Introduction to S ustainable P roduct D evelopment and C ircular E conomy

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Class attendance is not mandatory, though encouraged. All material will be provided digitally on line (Beep). Supporting books and references will also be suggested throughout the course. In-class exercises and teamwork will be used to facilitate advanced learning of PLM material and concepts.
The final exam will be a bout 1,5 hour written test, divided in two part: theory and problems/exercises. Questions are mainly multiple-choice questions + some short open questions. The maximum score achievable through the written exam is 30 Laude.
There are not intermediary evaluations.
Complementing the learning activities, a not-mandatory team project can be conducted to go through some of the topics investigated in class with the purpose of enhance the overall topics understanding, determining an indirect improvement of learning and exam performances. Additionally, the project enables students to gain extra score, at a maximum of 3. Time will be dedicated in class for project and practical activities. The project score does not expire through the months/years. It is not possible to run the project individually.

Ulrich and Eppinger, Product Design and Development
Note: 5th edition
Rossi, Morgan, Shook, The Routledge Companion to Lean Management - Lean Product and Porcess Development Chapter, Anno edizione: 2017
John Stark, Product Lifecycle Management, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2012
Note: 2nd edition

The course addresses the problem of control, diagnosis and supervision of production systems. In particular, the Supervisory Control Theory is studied, where the focus is on the automatic synthesis of the controller of plants modelled with labelled automata in presence of any admissible logic specification. In addition, the course will study the automatic synthesis of the diagnoser automaton, able to identify faults based on system observable events. A hint will be given also on the implementation of the supervisor and diagnoser on traditional controllers (PLC). The applications are mainly in the discrete manufacturing field, but also for energy production systems.

The diligent and careful student will learn how to synthesize an automatic controller based on logic specification, within the Supervisory Control Theory, as well as a diagnoser. He will receive a hint on possible implementations. (DdD 1 - Knowledge and understanding; DdD 2 - Applying knowledge and understanding)

Alignment on the basics of automation problems and PLC
Introduction to industrial supervision and control, and formal methododologies
Logic models: labelled automata, formal languages, labelled Petri nets.
Synchronous composition, asycnhronous composition, composition with priorities.
Refinement. Sub-automaton and super-automaton.
Static and dynamic specification. Event-based and state-based specification.
Supervisor properties: controllability, non blockingness.
Synthesis of the supreme controllable supervisor
Implementation of the supervisor. Ladder logic.
Example of a discrete production system supervision.
Monitoring and diagnosis of faults: non deterministic automata.
State observer and event-based diagnosis.
Extensions to hybrid automata: basic modeling, properties, evolution
Hints to applications to energy production systems.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Written examination. The exam typically consists of few exercises (3 to 5) with some questions. The duration is approximately less tha 2 hours. The exam will investigate the capabilities of the student to model the behaviour of process and discrete production systems through the formalism of labelled automata (DdD 1 - Knowledge and understanding; DdD 2 - Applying knowledge and understanding), to suitably model the specification on such systems (DdD 1 - Knowledge and understanding; DdD 2 - Applying knowledge and understanding), to synthesize the supremal controllable nonblocking supervisor (DdD 2 - Applying knowledge and understanding), to model a system with basic faults, to identify fault symptoms, to compute the determistic observer for an indeterministic faulty model and finally to synthesize the corresponding diagnoser (DdD 2 - Applying knowledge and understanding). A hint on possible implementations of a basic supervisor can be also asked (DdD 1 - Knowledge and understanding).

Notes on Supervisory Control Theory
Note: Lecture notes, solved exams and exercises available on the course web site

Questo corso mira a fornire agli studenti le necessarie competenze per valutare l'affidabilità sia a livello dispositivo (elettrico/elettronico e non) che di sistemi complessi utilizzando sia gli strumenti statistici e probabilistici che le moderne procedure di analisi delle informazioni. In particolare, vengono presentate le tecniche relative all'analisi dell'affidabilità dei sistemi e vengono discusse anche le metodologie per il miglioramento dell'affidabilità. Le tecniche di affidabilità, necessarie per implementare le strategie di monitoraggio e prognostica, sono tra i fattori abilitanti strategici definiti dal paradigma Industry 4.0. Per questo motivo, questo argomento è considerato strategico nel processo di sviluppo di tecnologie intelligenti. Per alcuni argomenti del corso verranno adottati alcuni approcci innovativi di insegnamento [IT] (ad es. flipped classroom and blended learning). Tali argomenti sono indicati con l'acronimo IT nel programma.

The first part of the course is aimed at allowing the student to learn and apply the main techniques for the hazard and reliability analysis of industrial and engineering systems, such as Preliminary Hazard Analysis, Failure Mode and Effect Analysis, Fault Tree Analysis. In the second part, the course focuses on the most widely used methods for the fault detection and diagnosis of complex systems. In particular, some data-driven methods are first discussed, such as control charts, principal component analysis, support vector machines, neural networks. Analytical fault detection techniques based on state observers, parity space equations, recursive estimation algorithms are then presented. Finally, some methods for the design of fault tolerant control systems are described. All these methods are applied to some realistic test cases to witness their potentialities and limitations.

Knowledge and understanding (DdD1)
Upon positive completion of the course, the students will be able to:
define the main steps of the System Hazard Analysis (SHA) of an engineering system;
perform the functional and architectural analysis of the system, and define the elements of SHA, such as its main reliability indices, operating modes, targets, risks;
apply the main SHA methods used in industry, such as Preliminary Hazard Analysis, Fault Tree Analysis, Failure Modes and Effects Analysis;
perform the fault detection analysis of dynamic systems subject to sensors, actuators, and parametric faults, based on data-driven (statistical models, support vector machines, neural networks) and analytical methods (parity space equations, unknown input observers, Binary Phase Detection Filters);
design fault tolerant controllers for systems subject to faults.
Applying knowledge and understanding (DdD2)
Through the exercise and lab sessions, students will learn to:
complete the SHA of a complex engineering system;
select the proper method for fault detection based on the available knowledge of the considered system and its characteristics;
given a system in fault, determine the achievable performance and the most appropriate algorithm for fault detection and fault tolerant control.
Making judgements (DdD3)
Upon positive completion of the course, students should be able to
perform a detailed SHA, guaranteeing given Safety Integrity Levels (SIL);
design a fault detection procedure based on data-driven and analytic methods, or a mix of them;
evaluate the limits to the achievable performance of the system in fault;
critically evaluate the achieved results and their sensitivity to the adopted design choices.
Communication skills (DdD4)
Through software labs and the development of a specific project, which is part of the exam, students will learn how to collaborate and communicate in a clear, concise, and effective way the addressed problem, the chosen solution method and the obtained results.
Learning skills (DdD5)
Through software labs and the development of the project, students will learn to address, autonomously and within a working group, a real-world problem via the advanced SHA and Fault Detection methods learned in the course.

Introduction to the safety analysis of industrial systems.
Preliminary Hazard Analysis and HAZard and OPerability analysisin automation systems.
Risk analysis techniques: Failure Mode and Effect Analysis, Fault Tree Analysis, Event Tree Analysis, Cause Consequence Analysis.
Introduction to the fault detection problem: data-driven and analytical redundancy methods, qualitative approaches.
Statistical Quality Control, control charts, principal component analysis.
Data-driven algorithms for fault detection, such as those based on support vector machines and neural networks.
On-line diagnosis with parity space equations, state observers, parameter estimation.
Design of fault tolerant control systems.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The exam is divided into two parts. In the first one the student is required to complete the hazard analysis of an engineering system. The project must be submitted in power point or pdf form and can be developed by groups of 2-3 students (DdD1, DdD2, DdD3, DdD4).
The second part, referred to fault detection techniques, consists of a written exam.
In the written exam students must prove to be able to apply to simple numerical examples the main fault detection methods, and in particular:
Select the proper fault detection technique based on the system’s characteristics (DdD2).
Apply the selected design method and critically evaluate the achieved results and their sensitivity to the adopted design choices, such as thresholds selection (DdD3).
Describe the achieved results in a clear and convincing way (DdD4, DdD5).

Slides
Note: http://corsi.metid.polimi.it/
A. Villemeur, Reliability, availability, maintainability and safety assessment, Editore: Wiley & Sons, Anno edizione: 1991
L.H. Chiang, E.L. Russel, R.D. Braatz, Fault detection and diagnosis in industrial systems, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2001
J.J. Gertler, Fault Detection and diagnosis in engineering systems, Editore: Marcel Dekker, Anno edizione: 1998

The course is aimed to deepen the concepts of dynamic modelling and simulation, and to explain the architecture of the most popular relevant software tools. To be more specific, the course is aimed to provide students with the skills needed to address problems of modeling and simulation of complex engineering systems. The first part will be dedicated to illustrate the causal approach to modeling. The second part of the course will be devoted to introducing the acausal approach, based on object-oriented programming concepts, languages and tools. In particular, in this second part, the characteristics of the modeling language Modelica will be illustrated, now standard "de facto" for the modular, multi domain modelling. The characteristics of the object-oriented modelling and simulation environments will be illustrated in reference to some application cases in a computer laboratory. These application cases will include examples of multidomain engineering and control systems.

Lectures will allow students to:
Understand the theory of numerical methods for the solution of systems of ordinary differential equations (ODE) (DdD 1).
Model and numerically solve hybrid dynamic models (events) (DdD 2).
Understand the basic theory of differential-algebraic equations systems (DAE) (DdD 1).
Use an object-oriented modelling language (Modelica) to model complex engineering systems (DdD 2).
Understand symbolic manipulation techniques applied to DAE system in order to derive efficient simulation codes (DdD 1).
Exercises will allow students to:
Build simulation models of complex systems in acausal (OpenModelica) object-oriented modelling environments (DdD 2).
Describe and numerically solve hybrid dynamical systems (DdD 2).
Select solver parameters and interpret the results of the simulations in terms of accuracy and computational efficiency (DdD 2).
After passing the exam, requiring the development of a simulation model, students will be able to:
Make design choices when building a simulation model (DdD 3) (DdD 5).
Justify design choices when building a simulation model (DdD 4).
Communicate the results of the work (DdD 4).

Lectures
1 Introduction.
1.1 System, experiment, model, simulation.
2 Causal approach.
2.1 Causal models and ODE.
2.2 From models to simulations.
2.3 IVP (Initial Value Problem)
2.3.1 Theorem of global existence and uniqueness of an IVP: hypothesis.
2.3.2 Theorem of global existence and uniqueness of an IVP: thesis.
2.3.3 Stability of an IVP.
2.3.4 Stability of the problem and numerical integration.
2.3.5 Numerical integration and stability of the solution of an IVP.
2.4 Elementary methods.
2.4.1 Forward Euler method.
2.4.2 Local truncation error and difference operator.
2.4.3 Consistency and convergence.
2.4.4 0-stability.
2.4.5 Fundamental convergence theorem.
2.4.6 0-stability of the forward Euler method.
2.4.7 Absolute stability.
2.4.8 Region of absolute stability.
2.4.9 Stiffness.
2.4.10 Backward Euler method.
2.4.11 Newton's method.
2.4.12 Modified Newton's iteration.
2.4.13 Trapezoidal method.
2.4.14 Midpoint methods.
2.5 Managing discontinuities.
2.6 Local error and tolerances.
2.7 Methods of step size selection.
2.7.1 Local error estimation: step doubling.
2.7.2 Local error estimation: embedded methods.
2.8 Higher order methods.
2.8.1 General formulation of Runge Kutta methods.
2.8.2 Accuracy, 0-stability and absolute stability regions of Runge-Kutta methods.
2.8.3 Embedded methods.
2.8.4 Implicit Runge-Kutta methods.
2.8.5 Linear multistep methods.
2.8.6 Adams-Bashforth methods.
2.8.7 Adams-Moulton methods.
2.8.8 BDF methods.
2.8.9 0-stability of multistep methods.
2.8.10 Absolute stability of multistep methods.
2.8.11 Predictor-corrector methods.
2.8.12 Milne's estimate.
3 Acausal approach.
4 Introduction to the Modelica language.
4.1 Classes, equations, parameters, constants.
4.2 Records, annotations, types.
4.3 Connectors.
4.4 Inheritance and partial models.
4.5 Events.
4.5.1 Synchronous data-flow principle.
4.5.2 Conditional models.
4.5.3 noEvent().
4.5.4 Discrete event models.
4.5.5 Events synchronization.
4.6 Stream variables and connectors.
4.7 Packages.
4.8 Components and (sub)systems.
4.8.1 Architecture driven approach.
4.9 Expandable connector.
5 DAE systems.
5.1 Examples.
5.2 Differentiation index.
5.3 Initial conditions and constraints.
5.4 Linear constant coefficient DAE systems.
5.5 Kronecker canonical form.
5.6 Algebraic index.
5.7 Index and numerical integration.
5.8 Dummy derivatives method.
5.9 Numerical methods for DAE systems.
5.9.1 Direct discretization methods: backward Euler, BDF, Radau.
6 Modelica code translation.
6.1 Hybrid DAE system.
6.2 Structural analysis.
6.2.1 Bipartite graphs.
6.2.2 Duff Algorithm.
6.2.3 Pantelides theorem.
6.2.4 BLT reordering.
6.2.4 The tearing problem.
Exercises
All exercises will be carried out in a computer laboratory
1. Model of a brushless motor in Modelica.
2. Discrete event models: event iteration.
3. Stream connectors. Control of a mixer.
4. Digital control systems in Modelica. Conditional connectors.
5. Discontinuous friction model. Stick-slip and hunting motions.
6. Conditional components: modelling and simulation of a mechanical stop.
7. Multiphysics modelling: model of an hydraulic piston.
9. Multibody package.

Prova orale obbligatoria
The evaluation test will be both practical and oral and it will be divided into two parts:
In a first part the student will be asked to develop "from scratch" and simulate the model of a freely chosen dynamic system, in an acausal object-oriented modelling environment (either OpenModelica or Dymola). The complexity of the model, the mastery of the modeling tool and the ability to interpret the results will constitute elements of judgment (DdD 1 - DdD 2 - DdD 3 - DdD 4 - DdD 5).
In the second part the student will be asked to show his/her knowledge of the theoretical contents of the course, answering theoretical questions or solving simple exercises. Examples of possible questions can be found in the texts of written exams assigned in the past, available on the course's WeBeeP page (DdD 1 - DdD 2).

U. M. Ascher, L. R. Petzold, Computer Methods for Ordinary Differential Equations and Differential-Algebraic Equations, Editore: SIAM, Anno edizione: 1998, ISBN: 978-0-89871-412-8
Modelica by Examples https://mbe.modelica.university/
Modelica Tutorial https://openmodelica.org/images/M_images/250204-ModelicaTutorial-PeterFritzson-AdrianPop-MODPROD-2025.pdf
F. E. Cellier, E. Kofman, Continuous System Simulation, Editore: Springer US, Anno edizione: 2006, ISBN: 978-1-4419-3863-3

L'insegnamento tratta argomenti relativi a due aspetti specifici e basilari concernenti l'utilizzo delle discipline ICT nell'ambito dei sistemi di automazione: le reti di comunicazione industriali ed i sistemi a logica programmabile (PLC). Le conoscenze impartite sono fondamentali nella progettazione e nello sviluppo dei sistemi di automazione moderni. L'affermarsi delle reti di comunicazione (Fieldbus e Industrial Ethernet) e di interfacce standard tra i sistemi hanno reso necessario lo sviluppo e l'applicazione di specifici protocolli industriali, trattati a livello teorico ed applicativo (in particolare Controller Area Network, ProfiBus DP, ModBus e CANopen).
1.
PLC e Sistemi di produzione integrati. Architetture dei sistemi per l'automazione. Architettura di fabbrica CIM. Controllori Logici Programmabili (PLC). Linguaggi di programmazione per PLC: Ladder, Sequential Function Chart, Function Block Diagram e Instruction List. Esercitazioni pratiche su calcolatore relative alla programmazione microPLC.
2.
Automazione e comunicazione industriale. Dispositivi per l'automazione negli impianti di produzione industriale. Introduzione ai sistemi di controllo distribuiti ed embedded. Mezzi trasmissivi cablati, modello di riferimento ISO/OSI, Bus di campo con assegnazione decentralizzata e centralizzata, topologie principali delle reti, tecniche di accesso al Bus e tecniche di rilevamento e di correzione degli errori. Reti di comunicazione nell'ambito dell'automazione e problematiche relative allo scambio di informazioni in tempo reale. Reti di campo (Fieldbus) per sistemi embedded: definizione, caratteristiche, funzionamento, analisi, struttura dei Frame, sincronizzazione, gestione errori, latenze, tempi di trasmissione, prestazioni e limiti in riferimento alle soluzioni più diffuse, ad esempio: PROFIBUS DP, CAN, CANopen, MODBUS. Reti Industrial Ethernet: definizione, caratteristiche, utilizzo, struttura Frame, prestazioni; introduzione alle reti Ethernet in riferimento alle soluzioni più diffuse (cenni EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, Ethernet Powerlink).
Analisi progettuale e ottimizzazione di reti industriali in riferimento alle soluzioni più diffuse.

This course aims to provide students with an overview and a critical perspective on the history of technologies with a focus on communication, digital media, and digital infrastructures. Starting from a critical analysis of some key case studies, the course will focus on the role played by historical accounts, narratives, and imaginaries in conceptualizing, developing, and spreading communication technologies and infrastructures in contemporary society. Thanks to the collaboration with the Museo della Scienza e della Tecnologia Leonardo Da Vinci, students will also have the opportunity to observe and study historical objects, sources and artifacts from the museum's collections and archives. At the end of the course, attending students will research and write a final essay on the social history of a selected topic related to a technological trajectory.

Dublin Descriptors
Expected learning outcomes
Knowledge and understanding
Students will:
Acquire a broad perspective on the social and cultural aspects lying behind the conceptualization, the social impact, and the spread (or the failures) of communication technologies and infrastructures;
Deepen their understanding of how the history of technologies impacts contemporary innovations also embedding cultural and social values, political and economic strategies, and ideas of the future;
Applying knowledge and understanding
Students will:
Be able to understand how the history - but also the narratives and imaginaries - about technological artifacts can impact the creation, conceptualization, and integration of technology in everyday life.
Making judgements
Students will be able:
To analyze the historical path of a technology;
To recognize recurring pattern and topoi in the narratives of contemporary technological innovations.
Communication
Students will learn to:
Present in an effective way the results of their research and participate to peer-to-peer discussion;
Lifelong learning skills
Students will:
Be aware of how their work contribute not only to technological advancements but also to historiography and future narratives of the past
Be able to analyze the social dimension surrounding technological innovation.

The course will be divided into two parts. During the first part, the course will deal with some essential theoretical and empirical aspects related to the social history of technology. In this phase, special attention will be paid to the social history of information and communication technologies (ICT, e.g., the history of computing and Internet infrastructures).
During the second part of the course, the class will visit (with the help of the instructor and a curator) the Museo Nazionale della Scienza e della Tecnologia Leonardo da Vinci of Milan, the largest science and technology museum in Italy. Then, case studies on specific technological objects/sources will be discussed in a series of lectures and interactive sessions with the instructor and with invited lecturers. During the last lectures, students will discuss and share their research for the final essay (individual or group presentations/discussions will be organized according to the number of attending students)

Prova scritta condizionata (a scelta del docente), senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
Attending students (min. 60% of attendance to lectures in presence)
Grading for attending students will be based (100%) on a final essay dealing with the social history of a selected object (e.g., a specific device, component, document, or source related to the topics of the course), starting from the seleciton of primary historical sources and put into dialogue with the theoretical framework addressed during lectures. In the last part of the course, students will be encouraged to share and debate critical issues and contents related to the case studies for the final essay. Attending students for the 3CFU course will deliver a shorter essay. There are no compulsory readings for attending students, suggested readings/slide for each lecture will be provided on Webeep.
Non attending students
Non attending students should pass a written exam. This is a closed book, combined multiple choice and short answer test concerning concepts from the compulsory readings listed on this page.
Non attending students for the 3CFU course should study the first 2 readings of the bibliography (Marx 2010; Mosco 2005)
Non attending students for the 5CFU course should study all the readings of the bibliography (Marx 2010, Mosco 2005, Bory 2020)

Leo Marx, Technology: The emergence of a hazardous concept/Technology and culture, Editore: Johns Hopkins University Press, Anno edizione: 2010, Fascicolo: 51/3
Vincent Mosco, The digital sublime. Myth, power and cyberspace, Editore: MIT Press, Anno edizione: 2005, ISBN: 9780262280266
Paolo Bory, The Internet Myth From the Internet Imaginary to Network Ideologies, Editore: University of Westminster Press, Anno edizione: 2020, ISBN: 978-1-912656-76-9 https://www.fulcrum.org/concern/monographs/tq57nt98c

Il corso intende introdurre lo studente al tema dello sviluppo sostenibile e al ruolo della tecnologia nella complessità delle sfide globali. Lo sviluppo sostenibile mira a identificare modelli innovativi per la Prosperità economica compatibili con il rispetto del Pianeta e l'inclusione sociale di tutte le Persone. In questa prospettiva il razionale e le logiche che sottendono a tale paradigma dello deve essere analizzate e compreso dalle generazioni di ingegneri che lavoreranno in contesti sempre più globali e inserito come elemento caratterizzante per una professione che inevitabilmente è in continua evoluzione. L'interesse per questi temi è evidente e ben esplicitato nell'Agenda 2030 delle Nazioni Unite e nei 17 obiettivi di Sviluppo Sostenibile, nella visione di una Europa della conoscenza e nell'interdipendenza globale marcata dagli effetti diretti e indiretti delle crisi economiche e sociali mondiali sui sistemi tecnologici e economici

The objective of the course is to address the problems, solutions, methods, and technologies for big data storage and management, with special emphasis on scalability and persistency. The course is structured in three main parts. The first part covers the main principles and approaches of big data management, spanning issues like scalability, transactionality, and distribution of data. The second part covers the different approaches to unstructured data management, describing data models, query languages, and architectural solutions for non-relational data storage, also known as NoSQL solutions, spanning graph, columnar, documental, key-value, and IR-based databases. The third part discusses the design methodologies for the specification of NoSQL data models.

Students will learn the basic concepts of modern database approaches. They will become able to design, program, and use the different database methods, and they will learn how to select and adopt the best option depending on the business and technical requirements.
Dublin Descriptors
Expected learning outcomes
Knowledge and understanding
Students will learn how to:
Identify problems that can be addressed with big data storage and processing techniques
apply the basic nosql technologies for real-world problems
Applying knowledge and understanding
Given specific project cases, students will be able to:
Define and implement a big data solution for the problem
Apply it on real datasets
Making judgements
Given specific project cases, students will be able to:
Learn how to decide which data storage and processing solution to apply and how to evaluate this decision
Communication
Students will learn to:
Write a report on a project describing and motivating the decisions taken and the results obtained
Present their work in front of their colleagues and teachers
Lifelong learning skills
Students will learn how to learn and become proficient in new data management solutions

The course content is organized in three main chapters:
1. Approaches to Big Data management
Big Data problems and dimensions
Data engineering and data science pipeline
Enterprise-scale data management
Scalability and persistency vs. volatility issues
Cross-source data integration problems and architectures
CAP theorem and implications. Non-relational distribution architectures
Evolution of transactional properties: from ACID to BASE. Modern transactional architectures
Data sharding and replication
Cloud-based, scalable data processing and computing
2. Systems and Models for Big and Unstructured Data
Graph databases
Semantic databases
Columnar databases
Document-oriented databases
Key-value databases
IR-based databases
Each category of systems is covered along 5 dimensions: (1) data model (2) (declarative vs. imperative) query languages; (3) data distribution (4) non-functional aspects (5) architectural solutions.
3. Methods for the Design of Applications
Modeling languages and methods for building unstructured data applications
Design methodology within the data engineering pipeline
Schema-less, implicit-schema, and schema-on-read approaches

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
Valutazione continua facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
The exam consists of a practical project part (project work) and a written part (written exam, with possible oral discussion if deemed necessary by the instructor). Further contributions to the mark may come from continuous evaluations throughout the course, including in-presence quizzes during lessons and other interactive modalities in class.
The project work consists of solving a realistic big data engineering problem, based on real or realistic dataset publicly accessible via Web API, datasets available online, or provided by the instructors. The project work will be developed in groups throughout the semester.
The written exam is composed of a mix of theoretical questions regarding any of the course subjects, and exercises regarding the technical content and how to apply it in practice (including programming aspects). The theoretical part consists of a mix of questions with open and closed answers. The whole exam is a closed-book evaluation. A minimum score on each part is required. Oral exam may be requested by the instructor in specific cases.
Type of assessment
Description
Dublin descriptor
Written test
Theoretical questions
Exercises focusing on big data storage and processing aspects
1,4
1, 2, 3
Assessment of project artefacts
Assessment of the design and experimental work developed by students in groups
2, 3, 5
Oral presentation
Assessment of the presentation of the work developed by students in groups
Possible oral exam on the topics of the courses, upon request of the teachers
2, 3, 4, 5

Sadalage, Fowler, NoSQL Distilled: A Brief Guide to the Emerging World of Polyglot Persistence, Editore: Addison-Wesley, Anno edizione: 2012
Marting Kleppmann, Designing Data-Intensive Applications: The Big Ideas Behind Reliable, Scalable, and Maintainable Systems, Editore: O'Reilly, Anno edizione: 2017, ISBN: 978-1449373320
Marco Brambilla, Emanuele Della Valle, Andrea Tocchetti, et al., Course Notes, Anno edizione: 2021

The course provides fundamental notions aimed at building solid awareness of the responsibilities arising from technical activities.
Specifically, the course is oriented towards providing a general overview of the rights and duties of technical experts, along with the identification of tools and procedures for legal protection (such as insurance, contractual clauses). Furthermore, the course aims to illustrate the rules protecting inventions - copyrights, and patents - granting the student immediate access to reference sources and applicable regulations, also through the analysis of practical cases.
The last part of the course offers an analysis of the legislation related to artificial intelligence and its evolution.

Caratteristiche e principi di funzionamento dei sensori per strumentazione clinica. Tecnologie a semiconduttore. Sensori di forza, pressione, movimento, accelerazione, temperatura, umidità, concentrazione di gas, radiazione elettromagnetica. Misure ottiche (fotodiodi, LED, CCD, CMOS). Sensori piezoelettrici, piroelettrici ed elettrochimici FET. Sensori a fibra ottica. Condizionamento dei sensori.
Sistemi per la diagnosi basata su immagini (endoscopia, radiografia computerizzata, tomografia computerizzata, risonanza magnetica, medicina nucleare, ecografia ed ultrasonografia). Sistemi per il monitoraggio emodinamico e respiratorio. Metodi e strumenti per laboratorio di analisi clinica (spettrometria, analisi elettrochimica ed elettroforesi). Microscopia. Strumenti per la chirurgia e la terapia.

Le aziende che operano in settori ad alta tecnologia devono continuamente adeguare le proprie capacità al ritmo dell'innovazione e alle sfide del cambiamento tecnologico, come la crescente complessità dei moderni sistemi cyber-fisici. In questo contesto, il Technology Risk Governance (TRG) comprende l'insieme di strategie, metodi e modelli organizzativi che le organizzazioni mettono in atto per comprendere, valutare e gestire le incertezze e i rischi legati alla tecnologia.
Il corso mira a trasferire agli studenti conoscenze teoriche e pratiche sulla TRG, anche attraverso la discussione in classe di casi reali e testimonianze di aziende, che copriranno un ampio spettro di sistemi industriali e di servizi (ad esempio, produzione, energia, trasporti). Il corso affronta lo stato dell'arte degli approcci, dei metodi e dei modelli per supportare decisioni informate sul rischio nella gestione di sistemi socio-tecnici complessi, dalla selezione della tecnologia alla progettazione del sistema, dai fattori di rischio organizzativi alla regolamentazione e alla governance.

Technology is one of the most pervasive features of modern society and the impact of technology on society has been a topic of longstanding concern. This course cultivates a critical approach to technology that highlights how technological objects, both old and new, are shaped by the social and cultural contexts in which they are designed, manufactured, and used.
Students are introduced to a corpus of studies that looks at how social relations and society shape technology and get ‘inside technology’, which highlights how the very design of technology (including the artifacts themselves) embodies important social, cultural, ethical, and political assumptions that inform how we use, value, or reject technology. Readings will examine some of the recent work by sociologists, anthropologists, historians, philosophers as well as feminist and postcolonial scholars who have provided new insights into our understanding of the development and dissemination of technology. Throughout we will look at studies of various technologies, such as bridges, the bicycle, the microwave, birth control, financial markets, and the internet.
Students will apply the conceptual and methodological tools from the discussed literature in a case study of a contemporary or emerging technology. This will allow for a more in-depth exploration of the conceptual frameworks provided during this course through the examination of the particular issues and concerns related to a specific technology. Students will critically examine how their selected technology shapes and is shaped by the social context in which it is produced and consumed, and what the implications are of these processes. Throughout the course, students are expected to play an interactive, collaborative, and participatory role by engaging in class discussions, writing exercises, presentations, and peer review.

Dublin Descriptors
Expected learning outcomes
Knowledge and understanding
Students will:
Acquire a broad critical perspective on the ethical and social impacts and implications of technology;
Learn how to recognize and analyze ethical and social aspects and issues inherent to old and emerging technologies;
Be able to understand how technical problems are informed by the socio-cultural contexts in which they occur.
Applying knowledge and understanding
Students will:
Be able to use critical skills in identifying and analyzing technological case studies;
Be able to apply sociological theories to problems created, aggravated or transformed by technologies;
Be able to explore and assess possibilities for addressing social problems generated by technologies.
Making judgements
Students will be able:
To independently analyze the social impact of a technology and the social processes that inform technological development and use;
To evaluate and select the appropriate critical approaches to understanding and addressing social problems generated by technology.
Communication
Students will learn to:
Exercise and improve their scholarly writing skills;
Present the results of their independent research in an effective manner;
Justify their arguments clearly and coherently.
Lifelong learning skills
Students will:
Be better prepared for their future professional life as a critical thinker and communicator;
Be better able to engage critically with issues that affect the society they live in;
Be better able to analyze problems through a theoretical lens.

The course consists of a series of interactive lectures dealing with major topics in social studies of technology. Students are required to come to class prepared and expected to actively participate.
Lectures will discuss a number of approaches central to a critical examination of technology, such as the Social Construction of Technology (SCOT), Feminist and Postcolonial studies of Technology, and Disability Studies. Students will also be introduced to several key conceptual and methodological approaches to technology studies, such as the role of technoscientific controversies, accidents and disasters; studies of maintenance and repair; technological determinism; social constructivism; the agency of artifacts; scripts and affordances; sociomateriality, and cyborg embodiment. During the lectures, students will also be introduced to case studies of contemporary and emerging technologies.
For the final essay, students are expected to focus on the social, ethical, and political dimensions of a topic or case of their choosing, rather the technical aspects of a certain technology. Students are also expected to give a final (group) presentation on a topic of their collective choosing. This topic can be, but need not necessarily be, related to the invidual papers of each student in a group. If students cannot present, they need to submit an additional (shorter) essay.
Students who take the course for 3 CFU instead of 5 CFU can submit a shorter essay.

Altro
Type of assessment
Description
Dublin descriptor
Collective presentations
Develop an argument in which the presented claims are justified by use of relevant literature and sociological argumentation and evidence;
To present this argument in an oral presentation in class in front of the instructor and their fellow students.
1, 3
4, 5
Individual written essay
The individual final essay demonstrates that a student has the capacity to read and engage with the relevant literature, and the ability to apply relevant concept and methods to a case study;
The individual final essay demonstrates an ability to conduct a thorough sociological analysis of a technology, and to communicate the results of this analysis in a clear and comprehensible manner;
The individual final essay discusses the social dynamics that are associated with their chosen case study of a contemporary or emerging technology, and critically reflect on this technology’s social impact and implications.
1, 2
3, 4, 5

H.M. Collins & T. Pinch, The Golem at Large: What you should know about technology
Ron Kline, Technological Determinism
Note: in International Encyclopedia of the Social & Behavioral Sciences, 2001 (pp. 15495-15498)
Leo Marx, Does Improved Technology Mean Progress?
Note: (1987) Technology Review, 71, 33-41.
Kline, R. & Pinch, T (1996)., Users as Agents of Technological Change: The Social Construction of the Automobile in the Rural United States.
Note: Technology and Culture, 37(4), 763-795.
David, P.A., Clio and the Economics of QWERTY
Note: (1985). The American Economic Review, 75(2), 332-337.
Judy Wajcman, Feminist Theories of Technology
Note: (2010). Cambridge Journal of Economics, 34, 143-152.
Nakamura, L., Indigenous Circuits: Navajo Women and the Racialization of Early Electronic Manufacture
Note: (2014). American Quarterly 66(4), 919-941
Audre Lorde, The Master's Tools Will Never Dismantle the Master's House.
Note: 1983
David Edgerton, The Shock of the Old: Technology and Global History Since 1900
Note: 2007
Couldry, N., Mejias, The Costs of Connection: How Data is Colonizing Human Life and Appropriating It for Capitalism
Note: (2019). Stanford University Press
Noortje Marres, The Costs of Public Involvement: Everyday devices of carbon accounting and the materialization of participation.
Note: (2011). Economy and Society, 40(4), 510-533.
Langdon Winner, Do Artifacts Have Politics?
Note: 1986
David F Noble, Social Choice in Machine Design: The Case of Automatically Controlled Machine Tools
Judy Wajcman, Technofeminism
Note: 2004